Skip to main content

Full text of "The Princeton Review"

See other formats


VvWk/uV- 


Jffrom  tf?p  iCtbrary  of 

H8or  Ifonjamin  tBmktnnfcge  Harfielft 
Upgupatljpb  by  Jjint  to 
tfjp  iCibrarg  of 

jPrinrrtnn  (Hhpnlogiral  ^>rminary 


f 


V* 


. I 


' 


4 


THE 


0^  ' "^/A 


APR  12  1924 


A 


^&06ICAL 


/ 

PR 


I N C E TO  N 

REVI  EW. 


332  2Uijotn,  all  tfjtttfls;  for  SStfjom,  .ill  tfjtuss. 


FIFTY-SEVENTH  YEAR. 


J A N U ARY — J TEN  E 


ct> 


NEW  YORK. 
1881. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/princetonreview5718unse_1 


JANUARY. 


PAGE 


GROUNDS  OF  KNOWLEDGE  AND  RULES  FOR  BELIEF  . . i 

Mark  Hopkins,  Ex-President  of  Williams  College 

THE  PUBLIC  SCHOOLS  OF  ENGLAND 19 

Prof.  William  M.  Sloane,  Ph.D.,  Princeton  College 

THE  HISTORICAL  PROOFS  OF  CHRISTIANITY.  Second  Arti- 
cle: The  Miracles 35 

George  P.  Fisher,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  Yale  College 

CHRISTIAN  MORALITY,  EXPEDIENCY  AND  LIBERTY  . 61 

Prof.  Lyman  H.  Atwater,  Princeton  College 

LEGAL  PROHIBITION  OF  THE  LIQUOR  TRAFFIC  ...  S3 

Henry  Wade  Rogers 

IS  THOUGHT  POSSIBLE  WITHOUT  LANGUAGE?  . . 104 


Prof.  Samuel  Porter,  Nat’l  Deaf  Mute  College,  Washington 

PRESIDENTIAL  ELECTIONS  AND  CIVIL  SERVICE  REFORM  129 
Prof.  William  G.  Sumner,  Yale  College 


MARCH. 


EVOLUTION  IN  RELATION  TO  MATERIALISM  . . .149 

Joseph  Le  Conte,  LL.D.,  University  of  California 

A MORAL  ARGUMENT  175 

John  P.  Coyle 

THE  HISTORICAL  PROOFS  OF  CHRISTIANITY.  Third  Arti- 
cle: The  Gospels 191 

George  P.  Fisher,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  Yale  College 

THE  STUDY  OF  ANGLO-SAXON 221 

Prof.  Theodore  W.  Hunt,  Princeton  College  ' 


PAGE 

THE  ARGUMENT  AGAINST  PROTECTIVE  TAXES  . . .241 

Prof.  William  G.  Sumner,  Yale  College 

THE  REASONABLENESS  OF  FAITH 260 

Principal  Shairp,  D.C.L.,  University  of  St.  Andrews 


MAY. 

PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY 293 

Charles  A.  Young,  Ph.D.,  Princeton  College 

CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS 315 

Prof.  Francis  Bowen,  Harvard  University 

THE  SILVER  QUESTION  AND  THE  INTERNATIONAL  MONE- 
TARY CONFERENCE  OF  1881 342 

President  Barnard,  LL.D.,  L.H.D.,  Columbia  College 

ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT 369 

President  McCosh,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART 390 

John  F.  Weir,  N.A.,  Yale  School  of  the  Fine  Arts 

THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS  . ...  406 

Prof.  Lyman  H.  Atwater,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  Princeton  College 

ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION  ...  429 

William  D.  Whitney,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Yale  University 


I 


JULY, 


CONTINENTAL  AND  ISLAND  LIFE 

John  W.  Dawson,  LL.D.,  Montreal 

ENGLISH  POETRY  IN  THE  EIGHTEENTH  CENTURY  . 

Principal  John  C.  Shairp,  D.C.L.,  University  of  St.  Andrews 

THE  HISTORICAL  PROOFS  OF  CHRISTIANITY.  Fourth  Arti- 
cle : The  Fourth  Gospel 


Prof.  George  P.  Fisher,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  Yale  College 

PHILOSOPHICAL  RESULTS  OF  A DENIAL  OF  MIRACLES 

President  John  Bascom,  University  of  Wisconsin 

LATE  AMERICAN  STATESMEN 

Francis  Wharton,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  Cambridge 

ANTHROPOMORPHISM 

M.  Stuart  Phelps,  Ph.  D.,  Smith  College 


page 

i 


30 


5i 


85 


95 


SEPTEMBER. 

ASSASSINATION  AND  THE  SPOILS  SYSTEM  . 

Dorman  B.  Eaton,  Esq.,  New  York 

THE  PROSPECTIVE  CIVILIZATION  OF  AFRICA 

Canon  George  Rawlinson,  University  of  Oxford 

THE  SUBJECTIVE  THEORY  OF  INSPIRATION  . 

Prof.  Charles  Elliott,  D.D.,  Chicago  Theological  Seminary 


145 


171 


192 


PAGE 

OUR  PUBLIC  DEBTS 205 

Robert  P.  Porter,  Esq.,  Census  Bureau,  Washington 

THE  HISTORICAL  PROOFS  OF  CHRISTIANITY.  Fifth  Arti- 
cle : The  Evangelists 223 

George  P.  Fisher,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  Yale  College 

ON  CERTAIN  ABUSES  IN  LANGUAGE 248 

Edward  A.  Freeman,  D.C.L.,  England 


NOVEMBER. 

CONSCIOUSNESS  AND  PERSONALITY 273 

Andrew  P.  Peabody,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

THE  RELATIONS  OF  MORAL  PHILOSOPHY  TO  SPECULA- 
TION CONCERNING  THE  ORIGIN  OF  MAN  ...  288 

Prof.  Henry  Calderwood,  University  of  Edinburgh 

SOCIOLOGY 303 

William  G.  Sumner,  Yale  College 

THE  ORIGIN  AND  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MUSICAL  SCALES  . 324 

Waldo  S.  Pratt 

SOME  DIFFICULTIES  OF  MODERN  MATERIALISM  ...  344 

Prof.  Borden  P.  Bowne,  Boston  University 

ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  A LAW  OF  EVOLUTION  OF  THOUGHT  373. 

Joseph  LeConte,  LL.D.,  University  of  California 

THE  KANTIAN  CENTENNIAL  . 

President  Noah  Porter,  D.D.,  LL.D. 


394 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY. 


THE  introduction  of  electricity  into  the  business  of  life  is 
probably  to  be  the  most  noteworthy  feature  in  the  history 
of  economic  civilization  during  the  last  half  of  the  nineteenth 
century.  The  latter  part  of  the  eighteenth  was  characterized, 
speaking  broadly,  by  the  invention  of  the  steam-engine,  the  sub- 
stitution of  machinery  for  hand-work,  and  the  development  of 
the  factory  system  of  manufacture;  the  first  half  of  our  own 
century,  by  the  introduction  of  the  railway  and  the  steamship, 
and  the  commercial  phenomena  which  necessarily  resulted  from 
such  improvements  in  the  means  of  transportation:  similarly, 
unless  all  signs  fail,  the  present  half-century  will  hereafter  be 
memorable  as  the  period  when  man  subdued  to  his  service 
the  mysterious  power  of  electricity.  It  is  true  that  before 
1850  science  had  discovered  nearly  all  the  facts  and  principles 
upon  which  the  present  industrial  applications  of  electricity  de- 
pend. The  galvanic  battery,  the  magneto-electric  machine,  the 
telegraph,  and  the  electroplating  bath  already  existed,  and  the 
two  latter  were  beginning  to  be  used  commercially.  But  at  that 
time  the  world  would  hardly  have  felt  the  difference  if  by  some 
strange  accident  it  had  suddenly  lost  the  use  and  knowledge  of 
them  all.  Thirty  years  have  changed  all  that.  Imagine  that 
this  morning  every  telegraph-wire  had  disappeared,  every  gal- 
vanic battery  had  lost  its  virtue,  every  dynamo-machine  was 
stopped — that  all  communication  and  operation  by  means  of 
electricity  had  come  to  an  end ; how  profoundly  the  whole  com- 
munity would  be  affected  before  nightfall ! When  a storm,  a 
few  months  ago,  prostrated  many  of  the  telegraph-lines  around 
New  York  City,  business  came  almost  to  a standstill  for  the  time. 
And  while  electricity  is  already  so  important  a .factor  in  our 


20 


294 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


business  life,  it  is  impossible  to  doubt  that  by  1900  it  will  hold 
a far  more  dominant  position.  Every  year,  almost  every  day, 
brings  to  light  some  new  application  of  this  agent,  and  its  use 
develops  with  continually  increasing  rapidity. 

We  propose  in  the  present  article  to  discuss  the  subject  in  a 
general  and,  so  far  as  may  be,  untechnical  manner,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  giving  our  readers  an  idea  of  the  extent  and  variety  of 
the  existing  applications  of  electricity  to  the  arts  of  life,  and  the 
reasons  for  expecting  their  rapid  multiplication  in  the  near 
future.  We  do  not  aim  at  scientific  completeness,  and  we  shall 
not  scruple  to  treat  with  disproportionate  brevity  those  matters 
with  which  intelligent  people  are  already  familiar,  in  order  to 
gain  space  for  other  topics  at  present  less  generally  understood. 

And  first,  by  way  of  introduction,  a few  words  as  to  the 
nature  of  electricity — a confession  of  ignorance.  All  that  science 
can  do  at  present  is  to  define  it  as  the  unknown  cause  of  certain 
effects  which  are  observed  when  a piece  of  amber  ( electron ) is 
rubbed — an  observation  dating  back  two  thousand  years.  It  is 
now  known,  of  course,  that  not  only  those  phenomena,  but  a 
whole  multitude  of  others,  depend  upon  the  same  cause.  As  to 
the  real  nature  of  the  cause  we  have  no  certain  light  as  yet : 
we  cannot  tell  whether  electricity  is  some  peculiar  kind  of  sub- 
stance, or  some  modification  or  motion  of  ordinary  matter.  In 
the  case  of  heat,  which  for  a long  time  was  thought  to  be  a sub- 
stance and  called  caloric,  experiment  has  settled  the  question, 
and  proved  it  to  be  merely  a mode  of  motion.  In  reference  to 
electricity  no  such  decision  has  yet  been  reached.  No  phenom- 
ena have  thus  far  been  discovered  which  absolutely  negative 
the  notion  that  it  may  be  a subtle,  imponderable  fluid  or  fluids, 
endowed  with  certain  peculiar  faculties  of  attraction  and  repul- 
sion, and  more  or  less  freely  circulating  among  the  particles  of 
bodies.  According  to  this  view  an  electrical  charge  consists  in 
the  collection  of  some  abnormal  quantity  of  this  substance  in  the 
charged  body;  an  electrical  discharge  is,  then,  the  actual  trans- 
ferrcnce  of  a quantity  of  the  fluid  from  one  body  to  another, 
and  an  electric  current  is  such  a transfer  continuously  pro- 
gressing. 

Another  view,  however,  seems  to  carry,  at  present,  a greater 
weight  of  opinion  in  its  favor — that,  namely,  of  Maxwell.  Ac- 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY. 


295 


cepting  the  idea  of  a medium  filling  all  space  (the  luminiferous 
ether  of  optics),  he  regards  an  electric  charge  as  the  establish- 
ment of  a peculiar  state  of  strain  among  the  atoms  of  the 
charged  bodies,  and  in  the  medium  between  them.  A discharge 
consists  in  the  sudden  relief  of  this  strain  by  a giving  way  of  the 
intervening  medium,  without  necessarily  implying  any  transfer 
of  substance  through  it;  and  an  electric  current  is  a rapid  suc- 
cession of  such  discharges.  In  its  application  the  theory  is 
mathematically  difficult,  but  it  explains  many  facts  which  the 
fluid  theories  fail  to  touch,  and  opens  the  way  for  the  establish- 
ment of  relations  between  electricity  and  the  other  physical 
agents,  especially  light  and  heat.  It  is  to  be  expected  that  the 
progress  of  science  and  mathematics  will  in  due  time  furnish 
some  experimentum  crucis  which  will  discriminate  between  the 
two  hypotheses,  or  not  impossibly  upset  them  both.  There 
is  certainly  great  probability  that  some  hypothesis  will  yet  be 
found  which  will  include  in  one  general  theory  all  the  physical 
agents — light,  heat,  gravity,  and  chemical  affinity,  as  well  as 
electricity  and  magnetism.  But  the  hour  and  the  man  have  not 
yet  come. 

We  have  confessed  ignorance  as  to  the  absolute  nature  of 
electricity;  but  the  reader  must  not  suppose,  therefore,  that 
there  is  any  corresponding  obscurity  and  uncertainty  as  to  the 
phenomena  it  produces,  and  the  laws  which  govern  them.  We 
may  not  know  what  electricity  is,  but  we  can  measure  it  in 
“farads”  and  “webers”  as  accurately  as  water  can  be  meas- 
ured in  “ quarts”  and  “ inches.”  We  can  express  electrical 
pressure  in  “ volts”  as  precisely  as  water-pressure  in  feet  of 
“head;”  and  we  can  describe  the  resistance  of  an  electrical  con- 
ductor in  “ ohms”  as  definitely  as  the  frictional  resistance  of  a 
pipe  of  given  size  and  length  upon  a stream  of  water  flowing 
through  it  can  be  expressed.  It  is  no  more  necessary  to  know 
the  nature  of  electricity  in  order  to  deal  with  and  utilize  it,  than 
it  is  to  know  the  nature  of  water  in  order  to  make  it  drive  our 
mills  ; altho,  of  course,  the  more  we  learn  about  either  the  bet- 
ter we  can  manage  it. 

Unquestionably  the  most  important  of  the  practical  uses  of 
electricity  hitherto  developed  is  the  communication  of  intelli- 
gence between  distant  points ; not  only  in  the  telegraph  proper, 


296 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


and  the  telephone,  but  in  all  the  various  signalling  arrangements 
where  electricity  is  made  to  serve  as  the  nervous  system  of  a 
complicated  organization,  co-ordinating  the  action  of  the  dif- 
ferent portions  and  bringing  them  under  central  control. 

The  history  and  operation  of  the  telegraph  is  so  familiar  to 
all  intelligent  persons  that  we  need  not  spend  much  time  in  its 
discussion.  Tho  not  yet  forty  years  old,  it  has  already  become 
such  an  essential  part  of  our  civilization  that  its  loss,  as  has  been 
said,  would  instantly  paralyze  the  life  of  the  world.  All  the  great 
operations  of  business  depend  upon  its  use.  Our  railways  are 
run  by  its  aid,  and  without  the.wire  the  carrying  capacity  of  any 
important  road  would  practically  be  reduced  at  least  one  half, 
because  trains  could  no  longer  be  moved  at  small  intervals  with- 
out constant  danger  of  collision. 

There  may  be  a question  whether  there  is  really  any  advan- 
tage to  mankind  in  the  rapidity  with  which  “ news”  now  makes 
its  way  in  the  world ; but  there  can  be  none  that  the  fact  is  a 
most  important,  even  a controlling,  element  in  determining  the 
differences  between  the  characters  of  the  men  of  the  eighteenth 
and  nineteenth  centuries.  The  only  reasonable  expectation  that 
our  people,  spread  over  so  vast  and  various  a country,  will  remain 
permanently  one  nation,  hangs  upon  the  hope  that  our  modern 
means  of  communication  will  so  intermingle  us  and  our  ideas 
that  we  shall  measurably  be  freed  from  provincialism  and  sec- 
tional dissensions  by  becoming  personally  acquainted  with  each 
other,  and  having  presented  to  us  from  day  to  day  the  same 
material  for  thought  and  feeling.  Thus  boundary-lines  vir- 
tually contract  and  a continent  becomes  a county. 

The  magnitude  and  extent  of  the  telegraphic  system  in  the 
United  States  alone  is  something  amazing;  New  York  City 
itself  has  about  6000  miles  of  telegraph-wire,  and  there  are 
nearly  300,000  miles  in  the  whole  country — enough  to  reach 
from  the  earth  to  the  moon  and  a long  distance  beyond,  since 
our  satellite  is  only  240,000  miles  away.  Many  of  these,  too, 
count  for  two  or  four  apiece,  being  worked  “duplex”  or  “ quadru- 
plex ;”  i.e.,  in  the  language  of  the  electrician,  they  have  associ-  ’ 
ated  with  each  of  them  several  “ phantom”  wires,  which,  having 
no  actual  existence,  yet  answer  all  the  telegraphic  conditions  of 
metallic  conductors.  We  know  of  nothing  more  ingenious  or 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY.  297 

surprising  than  the  methods  (for  they  are  various)  by  which  a 
single  wire  is  thus  made  to  serve  the  purpose  of  many,  in  trans- 
mitting, without  confusion  or  interference,  several  messages  at 
once,  some  in  one  direction  and  others  in  the  opposite. 

We  have  not  before  us  the  exact  statistics  of  the  subject,  but 
the  whole  length  of  telegraph-wire  on  the  earth’s  surface  and 
beneath  its  oceans  cannot  be  far  from  a million  and  a quarter  of 
miles.  Five  years  ago  it  was  reported  at  978,000,  and  since  then 
the  erection  of  new  lines  has  been  going  on  faster  than  ever 
before. 

And  not  only  has  the  length  of  the  lines  been  growing,  but 
their  efficiency  also.  We  have  spoken  of  the  contrivances  by 
which  one  wire  is  made  to  answer  the  purpose  of  three  or  four, 
but  besides  this  the  instruments  and  methods  of  telegraphy 
have  been  improving,  so  that  a quadruplex  wire  of  to-day, 
worked  with  some  of  the  “ rapid  telegraph”  apparatus,  is  capa- 
ble of  doing  at  least  ten  times  as  much  business  as  one  wire 
could  have  carried  ten  years  ago. 

How  far  the  telegraphic  system  of  the  world  will  be  ex- 
tended in  the  future  it  is  impossible  to  predict.  Wherever 
civilization  goes  the  wire  will  go,  of  course ; and,  so  far  as  can 
be  judged,  in  lands  which  now  have  the  telegraph  the  lines 
will  be  greatly  multiplied,  tho  the  competition  of  the  telephone 
will  necessarily  be  felt.  It  is  quite  within  the  range  of  possibility 
that,  so  far  as  epistolary  correspondence  is  concerned,  the  mail- 
bag  may  some  time  be  entirely  superseded  by  the  wire.  Perhaps 
it  is  hardly  likely,  however,  since  the  newspaper  and  other 
printed  matter  will  always  demand  a postal  system,  and  so 
long  as  that  exists  letters  will  probably  continue  to  be'written 
and  sent. 

We  have  alluded  to  the  competition  of  the  telephone.  It  is 
very  difficult,  however,  to  draw  the  line  between  the  telegraph 
and  telephone,  and  in  England  the  government,  which  has 
bought  out  the  private  companies  and  works  the  telegraph-lines 
as  a part  of  its  postal  system,  refuses  to  recognize  the  distinc- 
tion. If  there  is  a distinction  to  be  maintained  at  all,  it  would 
probably  lie  in  this:  In  telegraphing,  the  sender  and  receiver  of 
the  message  employ  a third  person,  and  perhaps  several  persons, 
to  transmit  the  message  between  them  ; the  process  is  analogous 


2g8 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


to  that  of  sending  a package  or  letter  by  a conveyance.  In 
telephoning  proper,  on  the  contrary,  the  sender  and  receiver 
converse  directly,  without  the  intervention  of  any  one.  The 
apparatus  is  virtually  only  a speaking-trumpet,  and  the  opera- 
tion is  analogous  to  shouting  across  an  interval  of  space.  Of 
course  in  this  view  of  the  matter  the  peculiarity  of  the  instru- 
ment itself  drops  out  of  sight.  Should  the  telephone  be  so  far 
improved  that  it  will  work  easily  over  distances  of  hundreds  of 
miles — as  it  probably  will1— then  it  is  likely  to  displace  most 
of  the  present  telegraph-instruments  at  the  minor  stations,  sim- 
ply because  it  can  be  operated  by  any  person,  without  requiring 
the  peculiar  skill  now  necessary  to  send  and  read  a telegraphic 
message.  In  railway  telegraphy  especially  its  satisfactory  intro- 
duction would  be  a great  gain.  For  through  business,  however, 
it  is  probable  that  some  form  of  rapid-telegraph  instrument, 
more  or  less  analogous  to  those  now  in  use,  will  be  retained, 
because  such  instruments  can  be  operated  with  multiplex  wires, 
and  are  capable  of  transmitting  in  an  hour  many  times  the  num- 
ber of  words  which  could  be  uttered  by  the  most  rapid  speaker. 

It  is  not  easy  to  form  an  idea  how  much  the  direct  use  of  the 
telephone  is  likely  to  extend.  In  our  cities  and  large  towns  it 
must,  of  course,  find  its  principal  use,  and  it  is  very  probable 
that  the  time  will  come  when,  as  a matter  of  municipal  organiza- 
tion, every  house  in  every  considerable  city  will  have  its  tele- 
phonic connection  with  some  central  station.  The  number  of 
purely  private  lines  for  purposes  of  business  and  friendship  is 
sure  also  to  be  very  great:  it  is  already  large,  and  would  by  this 
time  have  become  vastly  larger  but  for  the  heavy  royalty.  Five 
or  ten  dollars  a year  is  more  than  most  people  are  willing  to 
pay  for  the  mere  use  of  an  instrument  which  can  be  constructed 
for  one  or  two  dollars. 

It  is  perhaps  not  impossible  that  some  forms  of  the  telephone 
may  be  used  for  other  purposes  than  the  mere  transmission  of  con- 

1 Since  this  was  written  it  has  been  announced  that  Herz,  in  Germany,  has 
made  an  improvement  in  the  telephone  by  means  of  which,  without  using  bat- 
teries of  any' inordinate  strength,  he  has  been  able  to  converse  satisfactorily  over 
circuits  exceeding  three  hundred  miles  in  length,  and  that,  too,  when  part  of  the 
circuit  was  a submarine  cable.  We  have  not  yet  seen  any  authentic  description 
of  his  invention. 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY. 


299 


versation.  Mr.  Edison’s  “loud  speaking”  telephone  is  certainly 
a most  extraordinary  instrument:  we  shall  never  forget  the  sen- 
sation of  hearing  it  for  the  first  time.  Several  of  us  were  listen- 
ing intently,  with  telephones  of  the  usual  pattern,  to  the  voice 
of  the  person  who  at  the  other  end  of  the  line  was  reading  some- 
thing to  us  from  a newspaper.  We  could  hear  him  well  enough 
when  everything  was  perfectly  quiet,  but  it  required  close  atten- 
tion. Suddenly  the  little  chalk  cylinder  of  the  new  machine  was 
put  in  motion,  and  at  once  the  whole  room  was  filled  with  the 
voice  of  the  reader,  as  distinct  as  if  he  were  in  our  midst,  and 
much  louder  and  more  resonant ; the  tones  were  perfectly  clear, 
but  a little  strange,  just  enough  so  to  heighten  the  sensation. 
With  an  instrument  of  this  kind  a speaker  of  feeble  voice  could 
address  an  audience  of  any  size,  and  at  a distance  of  many 
miles,  far  more  effectively  than  if  he  were  before  them,  at  least 
so  far  as  the  mere  utterance  of  his  ideas  is  concerned ; and  he 
could  speak  not  only  to  one  audience,  but  to  several  at  the  same 
time  if  the  occasion  demanded. 

The  use  of  electricity  for  the  communication  of  various  kinds 
of  signals  which  can  hardly  be  considered  as  telegraphic  is  very 
important  and  extensive.  Take  for  instance  our  burglar-alarms, 
and  the  electric  annunciators  which  in  our  hotels  and  steamboats 
have  superseded  the  old  system  of  bell-wires.  In  many  kinds  of 
textile  machinery  also,  where  it  is  important  that  the  breaking 
of  a thread  or  any  derangement  of  the  machine  should  at  once 
arrest  the  movement,  electricity  is  found  to  furnish  the  most 
prompt  and  reliable  means  for  effecting  the  purpose.  Fontaine 
mentions  an  instance  where  the  application  of  such  a device  has 
reduced  the  necessary  number  of  operatives  from  one  for.  each 
knitting-frame  to  one  for  ten  ; four  operatives  aided  by  electricity 
taking  the  place  of  the  forty  previously  needed. 

In  general,  it  may  be  said  that  wherever  the  nature  of  an 
organization  or  machine  is  such  that  something  analogous  to  a 
nervous  system  is  required  to  make  it  efficient,  electricity  sup- 
plies the  want  better  than  anything  else,  at  least  if  the  distances 
to  be  covered  are  at  all  considerable.  The  organist  sits  at  his 
keyboard,  and  by  the  help  of  electricity  manipulates  pipes 
placed  at  any  distance  and  in  any  position  determined  by  the 
architect.  The  astronomer,  without  moving  his  eye  from  the 


300 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


instrument,  communicates  his  observation  to  the  chronograph 
by  a tap  of  the  finger,  and  secures  a permanent  record  of  the 
moment. 

The  clock  of  the  observatory  at  Washington  sends  out  its 
beats  each  noon  over  many  thousand  lines  of  telegraph-wire, 
and  drops  the  ball  which  furnishes  our  principal  seaport  with  its 
standard  time.  Several  other  observatories  in  this  country  do 
the  same  thing  to  a more  or  less  limited  extent,  and  in  Great 
Britain  the  system  is  far  more  complete  and  thoroughly  or- 
ganized than  here.  The  Greenwich  signals  go  to  almost  every 
important  city  in  the  kingdom,  and  all  the  railroads  are  run  by 
Greenwich  time.  In  other  parts  of  Europe,  in  Germany  and 
France  especially,  the  system  is  almost  equally  prevalent,  and  is 
gaining  ground  continually.  In  many  cases  it  is  not  considered 
enough  to  send  such  time-signals  once  or  twice  a day  merely. 
The  beats  of  the  standard  clock  of  the  Cambridge  observatory 
are  transmitted  continuously  to  some  twenty  different  stations 
in  Boston,  and  there  is  a similar  time-service  in  New  York,  which 
furnishes  to  the  subscribers  the  beats  of  a standard  clock. 
Many  systems  of  electric  clocks  are  also  established  in  our  rail- 
road-stations and  elsewhere,  the  clock-face  being  controlled  by 
the  action  of  a distant  timepiece,  moving  its  hands  either  con- 
tinuously or  at  stated  intervals.  In  Paris  a similar  system  has 
been  introduced  on  an  extensive  scale  within  the  last  few 
months,  at  the  expense  of  the  municipal  authorities.  The 
standard  clock  of  the  national  observatory  is  connected  by  spe- 
cial lines  with  about  thirty  “ horary  centres.”  At  these  points 
are  placed  clocks  the  pendulums  of  which  are  continuously  con- 
trolled by  impulses  sent  every  second  from  the  observatory,  and 
they  in  their  turn  distribute  their  beats  to  numerous  stations  in 
the  vicinity.  The  whole  city  is  thus  supplied  with  time  uniform 
and  correct  to  the  second. 

It  would  take  us  too  far  from  our  immediate  purpose  to  dis- 
cuss here  the  feasibility  and  advantages  of  a uniform  time  over 
the  whole  extent  of  our  country — uniform,  that  is,  as  to  its 
minutes  and  seconds , the  hours  being  varied  where  necessary,  so 
that  the  standard  railroad  and  business  time  should  nowhere 
differ  more  than  half  an  hour  from  the  true  local  time.  There 
are  some  obvious  objections,  of  course,  but  there  is  little  doubt 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY 


301 


that  they  will  ultimately  be  overruled  in  view  of  the  importance 
of  an  authoritative  standard,  a necessity  hich  will  be  felt  more 
and  more  imperatively  as  the  means  of  communication  multiply 
and  grow  more  swift.  It  is  not  unlikely  that  the  system  may 
even  reach  beyond  the  limits  of  a nation,  so  that  all  the  English- 
speaking  world  at  least  will  come  to  live  by  Greenwich  time — by 
telegraph,  of  course,  if  at  all. 

It  would  be  impossible,  and  it  is  not  necessary,  to  enumerate 
all  the  different  forms  of  signalling  apparatus — fire-alarms, 
watchman-inspectors,  and  such — which  depend  upon  the  use  of 
electricity  for  their  efficiency.  It  is  enough  to  say  that  con- 
trivances of  this  kind  are  multitudinous,  and  many  of  them  are 
of  great  importance  and  in  extensive  use  already. 

And  as  to  future  inventions  we  may  lay  down  the  fundamental 
principle  that  by  means  of  electricity  it  is  always  possible  for  a 
person  to  effect  at  any  distance  any  mechanical  operation  which 
he  could  perform  if  he  were  on  the  spot.  It  is  a mere  question  of 
expense:  the  number  of  telegraph-wires  needed  maybe  so  great, 
and  the  cost  of  the  apparatus  so  high, that  the  operation  would  not 
pay;  but  so  far  as  possibilities  are  concerned  the  human  arm  is 
now  virtually  as  long  as  the  electric  wire.  I can  sit  in  my  study 
and  steer  a torpedo-boat  in  New  York  harbor,  or  ring  the  bells 
of  Boston,  or  play  the  organ  in  St.  Peter’s,  or  explode  a mine  in 
China,  or  write  a letter  on  the  desk  of  my  correspondent  in  Con- 
stantinople. Just  such  things  are  done  now  every  day,  and  will 
be  done  more  frequently  and  easily  hereafter. 

We  ought  not  to  pass,  with  a bare  allusion,  the  use  of 
electricity  in  the  management  of  explosives,  for  it  has  greatly 
increased  their  efficacy  in  military  and  mining  operations.  We 
all  remember,  of  course,  how,  a few  years  ago,  the  touch  of  a 
little  child’s  finger  blew  up  the  reef  in  Hell  Gate.  Any  other 
known  method  of  firing  the  mine  would  have  deprived  it  of 
much  of  its  power,  because  it  would  have  been  impossible  to 
secure  the  simultaneity  upon  which  the  efficiency  of  the  blast 
depended.  At  present  nearly  all  the  powerful  explosives  now 
in  vogue  are  used  only  in  connection  with  electric  fuses  of  some 
kind  or  other.  For  safety,  convenience,  and  certainty  of  action 
they  are  as  immensely  superior  to  their  predecessors  as  are  the 
new  explosives  themselves. 


3 02 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


Electricity  finds  another  extremely  important  practical  appli- 
cation in  a widely  different  range  of  uses — by  means  of  its  effect 
upon  chemical  reactions.  As  typical  may  be  mentioned  the 
electroplating  industry,  the  electrotype,  and  the  use  of  electricity 
in  certain  metallurgical  and  chemical  operations. 

We  are  not  sufficiently  familiar  with  the  subject  to  be  able 
to  give  statistics  in  respect  to  these  matters,  or  even  to  enumer- 
ate all  the  different  applications  of  electricity  in  this  branch  of 
technology.  Every  one  knows,  however,  that  the  business  of 
electroplating  alone  is  something  •enormous.  The  great  firms 
of  Elkington.  in  England;  Christofle  & Co.,  in  France;  and  the 
Meriden  and  Providence  companies,  in  this  country,  not  to  men- 
tion others  nearly  if  not  quite  as  important,  employ  operatives 
by  the  hundred  and  deposit  silver  and  gold  literally  by  the  ton. 
In  the  magic  bath  the  precious  metal  is  torn  off,  atom  by  atom, 
from  the  shapeless  lump,  and  transferred  to  the  surface  it  is  to 
clothe  and  beautify  as  if  by  invisible  gnomes,  working  with  in- 
imitable speed,  deftness,  and  docility. 

The  same  agent  is  employed,  and  the  same  principles  are  in- 
volved, in  the  processes  by  which  wood-cuts  and  engravings  are 
copied  and  the  pages  prepared  for  printing.  The  plate  or  block 
upon  which  the  artist  has  expended  his  skill  is  not  subjected  to 
the  wear  and  tear  of  the  press,  but  fac-similes  are  made  in  any 
necessary  number  by  means  of  the  electrotype.  These  endure 
the  rough  service,  while  the  original  is  kept  in  reserve  ready  to 
be  recopied  whenever  Wanted. 

One  curious  application  of  the  process  is  in  the  manufacture 
of  the  so-called  compound  telegraph-wire,  which  consists  of  a 
central  wire  of  steel  covered  with  a coating  of  copper.  This 
coating  is  deposited  upon  the  steel  by  galvanic  action,  while  the 
wire  is  drawn  continuously  through  a long  trough  containing 
the  necessary  solution. 

Electricity  is  used  also  in  certain  processes  for  the  reduction 
of  copper  and  other  metals  from  their  ores,  and  in  the  manu- 
facture of  certain  chemicals  extensively  employed  in  the  arts. 

A few  years  ago  the  only  generator  of  the  electric  current  in 
ordinary  use  was  the  galvanic  battery  in  some  form  or  other. 
For  all  telegraphic  purposes  it  answered  very  well,  and  fairly  for 
the  processes  of  electro-chemistry.  But  it  was  always  a costly 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY. 


303 


and  troublesome  affair  when  currents  of  any  great  strength  were 
needed,  and  is  now  practically  superseded  in  all  such  cases  by 
mechanical  generators,  which  depend  for  their  efficiency  upon  the 
rapid  motion  of  coils  of  wire  in  a magnetic  field.  The  machines 
of  twenty  years  ago  were  cumbrous  and  inefficient;  but  in  1866 
Wilde,  in  England,  constructed  one  involving  several  new  prin- 
ciples and  possessing  a power  before  undreamed  of : it  is  the 
type  and  original  of  many  of  the  best  machines  now  in  use, 
altho  it  has,  in  the  development,  received  from  Varley,  Wheat- 
stone, Siemens,  and  others  numerous  alterations  and  improve- 
ments which  have  greatly  increased  its  efficiency.  In  1871 
Gramme,  in  France,  introduced  another  machine  of  peculiar 
construction,  which  was  at  once  recognized  as  superior  to  any- 
thing then  known ; and  it  still  keeps  its  place,  hardly  surpassed 
by  any  even  among  the  newest. 

The  machines  best  known  in  this  country  at  present  are 
those  of  Gramme,  Siemens,  Brush,  Weston,  Maxim,  and  Edison, 
tho  they  have  many  rivals,  some  of  them  perhaps  their  equals. 
Any  of  those  named,  when  driven  under  the  conditions  for 
which  they  were  designed,  are  most  effective  converters  of  horse- 
power into  electricity,  the  best  of  them  having  been  shown  by 
careful  experiment  to  realize  an  efficiency  of  nearly  90  per  cent ; 
that  is  to  say,  if  the  electric  current  produced  by  the  machine  is 
made  to  heat  a coil  of  wire  immersed  in  water,  it  is  found  that 
the  quantity  of  heat  developed  is  90  per  cent  of  that  which 
would  be  theoretically  equivalent  to  the  energy  expended  in 
driving  the  machine. 

A word  as  to  the  expression  “ efficiency,”  so  variously  used 
as  to  have  led  to  much  ambiguity.  As  we  have  just  employed 
it,  the  term  denotes  simply  the  ratio  between  the  power  ex- 
pended in  turning  the  machine  and  the  useful  effect  produced. 
In  this  sense  of  the  term  that  machine  is  most  “ efficient  ” which 
gives  the  greatest  amount  of  electric  work  in  return  for  each 
horse-power  of  propulsion,  without  regard  to  the  magnitude  or 
expense  of  the  machine  itself.  Sometimes,  however,  the  matter 
is  discussed  with  reference  to  the  cost  of  the  machine  required 
to  produce  a given  current,  and  in  that  case,  tho  only  loosely 
speaking,  the  most  “ efficient  ” machine  is  the  one  which  is 
capable  of  giving  the  most  powerful  current  for  the  money  ex- 


304 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


pended  in  building  the  apparatus,  without  regard  to  the  expense 
of  driving  it.  Again,  since  the  strength  of  the  current  produced 
depends  upon  the  arrangement  and  size  of  the  wires  through 
which  it  circulates,  it  has  been  inquired  what  arrangement  of  the 
circuit  would  enable  us  to  get  the  greatest  amount  of  electric 
work  from  a given  machine ; or,  vice  versa , what  machine  will  pro- 
duce in  a given  circuit  the  maximum  effect:  and  in  this  sense  the 
most  “efficient”  machine  is  the  one  which  will  do  the  most 
work  under  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  and  that  is  the  most 
“efficient”  circuit  which  will  realize  the  most  work  from  a given 
machine  ; the  expenditure  of  driving  energy  being  lost  sight  of 
in  this  case  also,  as  in  the  preceding. 

Of  course  the  most  efficient  machine  in  a commercial  sense 
is  the  one  which  will  give  the  greatest  effect  at  the  least  cost ; 
the  cost  being  made  up  of  two  items — one,  the  expense  of  the 
driving  power;  the  other,  the  interest  on  capital  and  the  allow- 
ance for  wear  and  replacement.  In  these  days  of  low  interest  it 
will  evidently  pay  to  aim  at  durability  and  economy  of  power, 
even  at  a considerable  first  cost.  Generally  speaking,  it  may 
also  be  said  that  it  is  much  cheaper  to  generate  electricity  in 
large  quantities  than  in  small.  A machine  which  consumes 
directly  the  whole  energy  of  a hundred  horse-power  steam- 
engine  will  produce  its  current  for  considerably  less  than  it 
would  cost  to  run  twenty  machines  each  using  five  horse-power, 
provided  always  that  profitable  employment  can  be  found  for 
such  a tremendous  current;  for  it  is  possible  to  conceive  of  a 
Great-Eastern  among  dynamo-machines,  one  too  large  to  pay. 

The  ability  to  produce  by  means  of  such  machines  currents 
of  any  desired  power,  and  at  a reasonable  expense,  has  opened 
for  electricity  an  enormous  range  of  uses  which  were  out  of  the 
question  in  the  days  of  galvanic  batteries.  It  is  quite  within 
bounds  to  say  that  to  produce  the  current  which  operates  one 
of  the  electric-light  circuits  on  Broadway  by  means  of  a battery 
would  cost  from  ten  to  twenty  times  as  much  as  it  does  to  gen- 
erate it  in  the  present  manner  by  means  of  a steam-engine;  and 
not  only  would  it  cost  more,  but  it  would  be  quite  impractica- 
ble, except  by  most  extreme  precautions,  to  keep  the  current 
running  without  interruption  as  much  as  twenty-four  hours  at  a 
time. 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY. 


305 


It  need  hardly  be  said  here,  for  every  one’s  thoughts  are 
more  or  less  fuli  of  the  matter  at  present,  that  already  one  of 
the  most  important  applications  of  electricity  is  to  the  produc- 
tion of  light.  So  far  as  regards  the  illumination  of  large  spaces 
by  lights  of  high  intensity  the  problem  may  be  considered  as 
solved  by  a number  of  inventors  whose  different  systems  are 
already  in  successful  operation.  As  to  the  lighting  of  houses 
and  limited  areas  more  perhaps  remains  to  be  done;  but  even 
as  things  stand  to-day  it  is  beyond  question  that  the  thing  is 
entirely  feasible,  and  at  a cost  considerably  lower  than  that  of  gas. 

The  lights  employed  are  of  two  kinds — the  “ arc”  lights  so 
called,  which  are  produced  by  a current  of  electricity  playing 
between  two  slightly  separated  pencils  of  carbon,  and  the 
“ incandescent”  lights,  which  are  produced  by  a current  passing 
through  a continuous  filament  or  slender  rod  of  some  refractory 
substance,  which  is  also  usually  carbon.  There  are  other  possi- 
ble forms  of  the  electric  light,  but  none  of  them  appear  likely  to 
find  much  use  in  competition  with  the  two  we  have  named,  tho 
in  some  cases  the  light  produced  by  passing  a rapid  succession 
of  discharges  from  an  induction-coil  through  a tube  filled  with 
gas  at  a low  pressure  is  utilized  for  scientific  purposes. 

The  “ arc”  light  dates  back  to  the  experiments  of  Davy  in  1 8 1 3, 
who  first  produced  it  by  touching  together  two  pieces  of  charcoal 
attached  to  the  poles  of  his  historic  battery.  On  one  occasion 
he  employed  a battery  of  two  thousand  pairs  of  plates  (probably 
equivalent  to  about  a thousand  of  those  now  used),  and  produced 
an  arc  nearly  five  inches  in  length;  i.e.,  the  current  continued  to 
pass  even  after  the  charcoal  pencils  were  separated  by  that 
space.  It  is  very  seldom  even  now  that  such  effects  are  ex- 
ceeded. The  experiment  remained,  however,  a rare  and  costly 
one  for  thirty  years.  About  1844  Foucault,  in  Paris,  hit  upon 
the  happy  idea  of  substituting  for  the  pencils  of  willow  char- 
coal, used  up  to  that  time,  rods  of  the  dense  hard  carbon  cut 
from  the  deposits  which  line  the  insides  of  old  gas-retorts. 
These  new  carbons  last  much  longer,  and  are  more  manageable. 
This  improvement,  the  introduction  of  the  powerful  batteries  of 
Grove  and  Bunsen,  and  the  invention  of  effective  lamps  or  regu- 
lators soon  made  the  use  of  the  electric  arc  much  more  common 
than  before,  tho  still  sufficiently  rare. 


306 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  PIE  IK 


In  1858  an  electric  lamp  was  established  at  the  South  Fore- 
land light-house,  on  the  English  Channel,  driven,  not  by  a bat- 
tery, but  by  a machine  constructed  by  Holmes;  a machine 
presenting  no  new  features  of  importance,  but  simply  a magnifi- 
cation of  the  smaller  machines  then  found  in  every  cabinet  of 
physical  apparatus.  In  1863  a similar  light,  driven  by  a machine 
of  slightly  different  construction,  was  established  on  the  French 
side  at  La  Heve.  These  lights  have  been  running  ever  since, 
and  several  others  have  been  added  at  different  points  upon  the 
coasts  of  France  and  England.  The  machine  invented  by  Wilde 
in  1866  (already  spoken  of)  quite  changed  the  aspect  of  affairs, 
and  since  then  progress  has  been  rapid  and  continuous. 

At  present  the  carbon  rods  employed  are  usually  manufac- 
tured for  the  purpose  by  some  one  of  many  different  processes 
of  alternate  compression  and  baking.  They  are  rather  expen- 
sive, so  that  their  cost,  according  to  the  estimates  of  Fontaine 
and  others,  generally  exceeds  by  a considerable  amount  that  of 
the  fuel  burned  in  the  engine  which  drives  the  current-generator. 
They  are  usually  burned  in  “lamps”  so  constructed  as  to  regu- 
late for  themselves  the  distance  between  the  points;  in  some  of 
them  a new  pair  of  carbons  is  automatically  substituted  for  one 
that  has  been  consumed,  and  in  nearly  all  an  arrangement  is 
provided  by  which,  in  case  of  the  failure  of  the  lamp  for  any 
reason,  the  circuit  will  be  closed  so  as  not  to  affect  other  lamps 
which  may  be  connected  with  the  delinquent. 

The  number  of  these  different  electric  lamps  is  already  very 
great,  and  is  continually  increasing.  Every  bulletin  of  the 
patent-offices  is  sure  to  contain  several  inventions  of  this  kind, 
some  of  them  comically  worthless,  but  many  of  them  exceed- 
ingly ingenious  and  well  thought  out.  Between  the  better  lamps 
there  is  not  much  to  choose,  the  steadiness  and  general  good 
behavior  of  the  light  depending  mainly  on  the  excellence  of  the 
carbons  and  the  uniform  action  of  the  generator. 

At  present  “arc”  lights  are  run  both  by  continuous  and  by 
alternating  currents  ; i.e.,  in  some  cases  the  current  is  steadily  in 
the  same  direction,  while  in  others  the  current  consists  of  pulses 
alternately  positive  and  negative,  succeeding  each  other  at  the 
rate  of  from  10  to  100  per  second. 

In  a lamp  actuated  by  a continuous  current  the  positive  car- 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY. 


30  7 


bon,  for  reasons  as  yet  undiscovered,  becomes  much  hotter  than 
the  negative,  and  is  consumed  about  twice  as  rapidly.  This 
requires  a special  mechanism  for  keeping  the  light  at  the  same 
point,  and  demands  attention  to  make  certain  that  the  wires  are 
properly  connected  to  the  two  terminals  of  the  lamp.  Where 
alternate  currents  are  used  this  difficulty  is,  of  course,  obviated  ; 
the  lamp  becomes  simpler,  and  it  is  entirely  indifferent  in  what 
order  its  terminals  are  connected  with  the  circuit.  Nor  is  the 
generator  any  more  difficult  to  construct,  tho  probably  it  is 
slightly  less  economical  of  power. 

There  is,  however,  one  literally  fatal  objection  to  the  use 
of  alternating  currents  which  ought  to  prohibit  their  use. 
The  wires  from  a continuous-current  machine  can  be  handled 
without  danger  to  life;  the  shock  obtained,  tho  disagreeable 
enough,  is  not  fatal:  with  the  alternating  current  it  is  different; 
the  shattering  power  of  the  intermittent  shocks  is  tremendous, 
and  several  persons  have  already  been  killed  by  accidents  from 
them.  Probably  all  recollect  the  recent  case  upon  the  Livadia. 

The  amount  of  light  which  can  be  produced  by  an  “arc” 
lamp  is  enormous,  depending,  of  course,  upon  the  size  and  ex- 
cellency of  the  carbons  and  the  power  of  the  current ; and  the 
larger  the  light  the  more  economical  it  is;  i.e.,  a great  light 
costs  less  for  each  candle-power  than  a small  one.  With  the 
small  lamps  it  is  usual  to  get  from  500  to  1200  candles1  for  each 
horse-power  consumed  by  the  engine;  large  burners  do  better, 
running  as  high  as  2000  or  2500.  Probably  the  most  powerful 
lamp  ever  yet  constructed  is  one  recently  made  and  tested  in 
Cleveland  by  the  Brush  Electric  Light  Company  under  a special 
order  from  the  British  Admiralty.  It  is  estimated  at  100,000 
candle-power,  using  carbons  two  inches  and  a half  in  didmeter, 
and  consuming  forty  horse-power.  The  ordinary  arc-lights,  of 
which  there  are  now  so  many  in  our  different  cities,  consume 
from  one  and  a half  to  two  horse-power,  and  give  lights  varying 
from  800  to  2500  candles. 

For  a long  time  it  was  found  very  difficult  to  run  more  than 

1 The  unit  of  illumination  ordinarily  used  in  this  country  for  photometric  pur- 
poses is  the  light  given  by  a sperm-candle  of  such  size  that  six  weigh  a pound, 
and  burning  120  grains  an  hour.  An  ordinary  gas-burner  is  from  twelve  to  fifteen 
times  as  bright. 


3°S 


THE  PRINCE  TON  REVIEW. 


one  or  two  lamps  in  a single  circuit,  and  machines  were  con- 
structed which  supplied  each  lamp  with  its  own  separate  current 
through  its  own  conductors.  Of  course  this  added  greatly  to 
the  expense,  especially  in  the  matter  of  conductors.  The  diffi- 
culty has,  however,  been  overcome  in  great  measure,  and  at 
present  Mr.  Brush  with  some  of  his  more  powerful  machines 
drives  as  many  as  forty  lamps  in  one  circuit,  the  remoter  ones 
being  as  far  as  five  miles  from  the  engine,  and  that  without  any 
inordinate  expense  for  the  conducting  cable. 

As  to  the  economy  of  the  system,  there  can  be  no  question 
that  even  in  rather  unfavorable  situations,  as,  for  instance,  in 
the  ligh  ing  of  streets  where  the  lamps  are  pretty  widely  sepa- 
rated, the  electric  light  is  at  least  as  cheap  as  gas  at  one  dollar  a 
thousand  feet.  Under  the  most  favorable  circumstances,  as  in 
the  lighting  of  mills  and  factories,  where  no  separate  plant  is 
required  to  furnish  the  driving  power,  the  saving  is  very  great. 

The  total  number  of  such  lamps  already  in  use  is  enormous. 
The  Brush  Company  alone  reported  last  January  more  than 
6000  in  operation — 1200  of  them  in  foreign  countries.  In  this 
country  4860  were  distributed,  as  follows  : 

800  lamps  in  metal-working  establishments. 


1240 

U 

cotton  and  woollen  mills. 

425 

u 

stores,  hotels,  churches,  etc. 

250 

n 

parks,  gardens,  docks,  etc. 

2 77 

u 

railway-stations. 

1500 

u 

streets  of  cities. 

380 

u 

unclassified. 

Probably  the  lamps  of  Siemens  and  the  so-called  candles  of 
Jablochkoff  are  still  more  numerous  in  Europe,  while  those  of 
other  systems  are  not  greatly  behind. 

Lights  of  this  kind,  however,  are  not  suited  for  all  purposes, 
as,  for  instance,  for  household  illumination.  What  is  wanted 
here  is  a lamp  which  will  furnish  somewhat  more  light  than  an 
ordinary  gas-burner  and  will  require  no  skilled  attention  to 
maintain  it.  To  compete  with  gas  it  must  be  at  least  as  cheap, 
and  must  not  subject  the  user  to  any  greater  inconveniences. 

What  are  called  incandescent  lamps  best  answer  these  condi- 
tions. When  a current  is  passed  through  a conductor  it  heats  it 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY.  }Og 

more  or  less,  and  if  the  conductor  is  of  such  a nature  as  to  op- 
pose considerable  resistance,  its  temperature  may  rise  far  above 
the  incandescent  point,  so  that  it  will  become  luminous  and 
shine,  without  consuming , as  long  as  the  current  passes.  At  first 
it  was  attempted  to  use  metal  filaments,  but  it  was  soon  found 
that  the  temperature  required  to  make  them  give  off  much  light 
is  perilously  near  that  of  fusion,  even  with  the  most  refractory. 
Slender  rods  of  carbon  were  then  tried,  and  so  far  as  principles 
are  concerned  the  lamp  invented  by  Starr  and  King  in  1845 
embodies  pretty  much  everything  of  value  in  the  newest.  They 
employed  carbon  and  enclosed  it  in  the  most  perfect  vacuum  then 
known  to  science,  in  order  to  prevent  the  wasting  action  of  the  air. 
But  at  that  time  rods  of  carbon  could  not  be  made  sufficiently 
slender  and  compact,  nor  were  the  present  means  of  producing  a 
perfect  vacuum  available,  and,  above  all,  the  dynamo-electric 
machine  existed  then  only  in  embryo.  It  would  take  us  beyond 
our  reasonable  limits  to  trace  the  history  of  lamps  of  this  class 
(tho  that  of  Lodyguine,  invented  in  1873,  must  not  be  passed 
quite  unmentioned),  but  we  have  at  present  one  which  seems 
likely  to  meet  all  the  requirements  of  the  problem.  We  say 
one , because  the  finished  thing  is  essentially  the  same  as  made 
by  either  of  the  three  different  inventors  who  claim  it — Swan  in 
England,  and  Edison  and  Maxim  in  this  country.  There  are, 
however,  more  or  less  important  practical  differences  in  the 
methods  by  which  the  carbon  filament,  which  is  the  essential 
feature  and  light-producing  agent  in  all  of  their  lamps,  is  pre- 
pared and  connected  to  the  conductors,  as  well  as  in  the  opera- 
tions by  which  the  glass  vessel  enclosing  the  filament  is  exhaust- 
ed and  sealed. 

Of  course  this  is  not  the  place  to  discuss  the  questions  of 
priority  and  patent  rights  involved  in  their  respective  claims. 

These  lamps  use  up  nothing,  in  shining,  except  the  current 
which  excites  them;  they  possess  no  complicated  mechanism  to 
be  kept  in  order;  they  are  small — not  larger  than  an  ordinary 
lamp-chimney ; and  they  cost  very  little  to  construct  in  a large 
way,  certainly  not  half  a dollar  apiece.  On  the  other  hand,  they 
do  not  rival  the  arc-lights  in  brilliance  (at  least  as  a general 
thing,  for  Maxim  has  constructed  a few  of  several  hundred 
candle-power),  and  their  luminous  duty,  if  we  may  coin  the 
21 


3io 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


expression,  is  as  yet  only  between  one  and  two  hundred  candles 
per  horse-power,  or  about  one  sixth  that  of  the  arc-lights.  The 
arc-light  is  not,  however,  anything  like  six  times  as  cheap  as 
the  other  per  candle-power,  because  its  consumption  of  carbon 
pencils,  as  has  already  been  said,  costs  more  than  the  engine- 
power  itself,  while  the  incandescent  light  escapes  this  charge. 
Still  the  incandescent  lamp  cannot  be  regarded  as  absolutely 
imperishable,  and  as  a matter  of  fact  is  seldom  so  perfect  in  all 
particulars  as  to  last  in  practice  more  than  two  or  three  months; 
but  the  cost  of  replacement  is  trifling. 

Besides  these  forms  of  the  incandescent  lamp  there  are  others 
which,  like  that  of  Sawyer,  more  resemble  the  original  lamp  of 
the  Starr-King  patent.  Instead  of  a slender  carbon  filament 
with  an  electric  resistance  of  from  fifty  to  two  hundred  ohms, 
they  employ  a small  pencil  of  carbon  some  half  an  inch  long, 
and  about  one  twentieth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  enclosed  in 
a case  which  can  be  taken  to  pieces  to  replace  the  pencil  when 
consumed.  The  resistance  of  these  lamps  is  generally  only 
from  five  to  ten  ohms,  so  that  they  are  used,  several  of  them 
consecutively  in  the  same  circuit,  like  arc-lamps.  The  lamps  of 
the  Edison  type,  on  the  other  hand,  have  resistances  ranging 
from  fifty  to  two  hundred  ohms,  and  are  inserted  into  the  cir- 
cuit side  by  side  (technically  “ in  multiple  arc”) : the  portion  of 
the  current  which  flows  through  one  lamp  passes  through  no 
other. 

There  are  also  lamps,  like  that  of  Werdermann,  which  are 
intermediate  between  the  purely  incandescent  and  the  arc.  The 
thin  pencil  of  carbon  from  which  the  light  emanates  touches 
lightly  a larger  block  of  carbon,  and  produces  at  the  point  of 
contact  a brilliant  star  of  light,  without,  however,  forming  an 
actual  arc.  But  the  carbon  pencil  wastes  away  pretty  rapidly, 
and  on  the  whole  the  apparatus  is  probably  inferior  to  either  of 
the  two  between  which  it  is  a cross. 

We  shall  not  undertake  to  discuss  at  length  the  economical 
question  as  to  the  lighting  of  houses  by  electricity.  As  against 
gas,  advantages  and  disadvantages  are  both  obvious : on  the 
one  side,  a whiter  light,  freedom  from  heat  and  vitiation  of  the 
air,  from  foul  smells  and  tarnish;  on  the  other,  the  inability  to 
store  the  supply  against  the  time  of  need,  the  rather  greater 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY. 


31 1 

liability  to  interruption  by  accident,  and  the  difficulty  of  gradu- 
ating the  brightness  of  a given  lamp  in  an  economical  manner. 
One  can  turn  down  a gas-flame  and  burn  it  low.  No  effective 
arrangement  is  yet  known  for  doing  the  same  thing  with  an 
electric  lamp,  at  least  in  a satisfactory  and  easy  manner. 

As  to  comparative  expense  it  is  yet  too  early  to  decide  with 
much  confidence.  The  necessary  conductors  and  current-meters 
on  the  electric  system  will  probably  about  offset  the  service  of 
gas-pipes  and  gas-meters,  but  they  may  turn  out  more  costly 
than  has  been  anticipated.  The  actual  expense  of  producing 
the  light,  apart  from  all  questions  of  interest  on  plant,  will  cer- 
tainly be  in  favor  of  electricity. 

But  here  another  consideration  comes  up  of  great  impor- 
tance. The  electric  plant  once  being  established  and  electricity 
“laid  on”  in  the  streets  of  a city  as  gas  is  now,  it  may  be  used 
very  profitably  for  other  purposes  than  that  of  lighting,  espe- 
cially for  the  transmission  of  power.  The  electric  plant  may 
thus  be  made  to  earn  revenue  by  day  as  well  as  by  night.  Un- 
less we  are  much  mistaken,  electricity  will  be  more  used  in  the 
near  future  as  a means  of  transmitting  power  than  for  any  other 
purpose. 

Many  attempts  were  made  in  the  early  days  of  electro-mag- 
netism to  construct  electro-magnetic  engines ; i.e.,  to  drive  ma- 
chinery by  means  of  a galvanic  current.  There  was  no  difficulty 
in  making  the  machines  go,  but  there  was  difficulty  in  making 
them  pay.  The  simple  fact  is  this : at  current  prices  of  min- 
ing, manufacture,  and  materials,  every  horse-power  of  energy 
developed  in  the  current  of  a galvanic  battery  costs  more  than 
twenty  times  as  much  as  a horse-power  generated  by  a,  good 
steam-engine,  and  no  ingenious  contrivances  for  using  the  cur- 
rent can  evade  the  fundamental  difficulty.  To  put  it  differ- 
ently: the  mere  coal  consumed  in  extracting  a ton  of  zinc  from 
its  ore  would  produce  as  much  power  in  the  boiler  of  a steam- 
engine  as  could  be  got  from  the  use  of  the  zinc  itself  in  a gal- 
vanic battery. 

If,  however,  a method  is  ever  found  by  which  electricity  can 
be  developed  directly,  economically,  and  manageably  by  the  con- 
sumption of  fuel,  without  the  intervention  of  steam  or  other 
engines,  the  case  will  be  altered.  To  a certain  extent  the 


% 


* 


312 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


thermo-electric  battery  now  does  this  very  thing,  but  very  im- 
perfectly and  wastefully. 

For  the  present,  then,  we  cannot  profitably  use  battery  cur- 
rents to  produce  power;  but  we  may  use  currents  developed  by 
a mechanical  generator  of  electricity  as  a means  of  transferring 
power  from  one  point  to  another;  and  apparently  this  is  a far 
more  economical  method  than  any  known  system  of  mechanical 
transmission  by  wire  ropes,  water-pipes,  or  compressed  air.  All 
that  is  needed  is  a suitable  conductor  from  the  electric  generator 
to  the  electric  motor  which  is  in  construction  identical  with  the 
generator  itself,  either  being  capable  of  driving  the  other.  The 
conductor  once  laid  remains  without  wear  and  tear,  costing 
nothing  but  the  interest.  It  would  take  us  too  far  to  discuss 
the  conditions  for  the  most  profitable  use  of  electricity  in 
this  way.  We  may  say  in  general  that  currents  of  small  quan- 
tity but  high  electro-motive  force  (like  water  streams  of  small 
velocity  and  high  pressure  in  hydraulic  pipes)  are  theoretically 
most  economical ; but  then  such  currents  are  harder  to  manage 
on  account  of  difficulties  of  insulation,  so  that  a compromise 
must  be  effected.  In  practice  it  is  found  that  many  of  the  ma- 
chines in  use  will  transmit  from  one  to  ten  horse-power  a dis- 
tance of  a mile  with  a loss  of  less  than  twenty  per  cent. 

One  of  the  earliest  applications  of  this  principle  was  in  some 
experiments  by  MM.  Chretien  and  Felix  in  France  in  1878. 
They  ploughed  fields  by  electricity,  substituting  for  the  engine 
which  had  been  used  to  pull  the  gang  of  ploughs  a Gramme 
machine.  They  also  used  the  same  sort  of  machine  upon  a 
crane  employed  for  the  unloading  of  boats  in  the  harbor  of 
Sermaize,  at  an  estimated  economy  over  steam  of  nearly  thirty 
per  cent,  after  several  months  of  trial. 

In  the  electric  railways  of  Siemens  and  of  Edison  the  rails  are 
used  as  the  conductors,  and  the  locomotive  is  replaced  by  a car 
on  which  is  an  electric  motor  deriving  its  current  from  the  rails. 
By  this  arrangement  it  is  possible  to  concentrate  the  motive 
power  at  central  stations,  and  to  substitute  for  the  wasteful  loco- 
motives engines  of  a much  more  economical  type.  It  is  prob- 
able that  for  city  tramways,  elevated  railroads,  and  other  roads 
of  similar  description,  the  system  will  come  into  extensive  use. 

We  have  seen  recent  accounts  of  various  machines  driven  by 


PRACTICAL  USES  OF  ELECTRICITY. 


313 


electricity.  One  is  a pile-driver,  in  which  the  steam-engine  is 
replaced  by  an  electric  motor.  Another  is  an  electric  elevator, 
in  which  an  electric  motor  carried  in  the  car  is  driven  by  a ca- 
ble brought  to  it  from  the  basement,  and  by  means  of  an  end- 
less screw  works  the  gearing  which  carries  the  car  up  or  down. 
This  contrivance  is  absolutely  safe;  in  case  of  the  failure  of  the 
current  for  any  reason  the  car  does  not  fall,  but  simply  stops, 
and  can  be  worked  up  or  down  by  hand  from  the  inside  so  as 
to  release  its  inmates.  Another  ingenious  machine  is  an  elec- 
tric hammer  by  Siemens,  designed  to  replace  the  steam-hammer 
for  not  too  heavy  work.  All  of  these  appear  to  be  entirely  suc- 
cessful. 

Indeed,  as  Professor  Ayrton  has  pointed  out,  it  seems  very 
possible,  perhaps  even  probable,  that  our  whole  industrial  sys- 
tem is  to  be  profoundly  modified  by  this  new  possibility  of 
economically  transmitting  the  energy  generated  in  large  quan- 
tities and  under  the  most  favorable  conditions,  and  so  distribut- 
ing it  that  it  can  be  utilized  a little  at  a time  wherever  needed. 
Instead  of  bringing  operatives  to  thei-r  work  and  herding  them 
in  mills  and  factories,  it  may  be  possible  to  send  the  work  to 
their  homes,  and  thus  to  avoid  many  of  the  most  serious  evils  of 
our  present  methods. 

Our  limits  forbid  more  than  a mere  mention  of  certain  other 
uses  of  the  electric  current.  Siemens  has  experimented  upon 
the  effect  of  powerful  electric  lights  upon  the  growth  of  plants, 
and  has  clearly  shown  the  possibility  of  forcing  vegetation  and 
fruitage  in  this  manner  to  an  almost  unlimited  extent.  The 
same  gentleman  and  Jamin,  in  France,  have  shown  how  to  em- 
ploy the  electric  arc  in  blowpipe  and  crucible  so  as  to  produce 
for  industrial  purposes  intensities  of  temperature  never  before 
attained ; and  others  have  proposed  to  use  the  current  as  a 
means  of  ordinary  heating  and  cooking  in  the  household.  As 
to  this  latter  proposition  it  is  enough,  however,  to  say  that  the 
method  cannot  be  economical,  tho  it  may  be  convenient  in  some 
cases.  The  steam-engine  which  produces  the  current  never  util- 
izes quite  twenty  per  cent  of  the  heat  produced  by  the  com- 
bustion of  its  fuel,  to  say  nothing  of  the  subsequent  loss  in 
transmission. 

Of  the  uses  of  electricity  in  medicine  and  surgery  we  add 


314 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


nothing  here,  nor  of  its  applications  in  strictly  scientific  research, 
these  subjects  lying  one  side  of  our  purpose. 

We  must  not  close  without  an  allusion  to  the  International 
Exhibition  of  Electricity  which  is  to  be  opened  at  Paris  next 
autumn  under  government  auspices.  It  is  sure  to  be  one  of  the 
most  interesting  and  important  exhibitions  ever  held.  One  will 
be  able  to  see  in  action  nearly  every  form  of  electric  generator,  all 
sorts  of  electric  lights  and  motors,  all  kinds  of  telegraphic  and 
telephonic  apparatus,  all  the  different  appliances  by  which  elec- 
tricity is  used  in  chemical  and  metallurgic  operations,  and  the 
instruments  for  measuring  and  determining  all  kinds  of  electrical 
constants. 

It  will  gather  together  the  most  magical  and  incredible  of 
facts,  some  things  completed,  the  beginnings  of  more,  the  seeds 
and  embryos  of  almost  a new  civilization. 


Charles  A.  Young. 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


u T F a man  die,  shall  he  live  again  ? ” The  Christian  Scrip- 

J-  tures  assure  us  that  he  will,  and  that  his  future  life  will 
■be,  in  some  manner,  a state  of  retribution  for  the  life  that  now  is. 
More  distinctly  still  we  have,  from  the  Master’s  own  lips,  the 
solemn  announcement  of  a fixed  period  of  Final  Judgment. 
“ For  the  hour  is  coming  in  the  which  all  that  are  in  the  grave 
shall  hear  his  voice,  and  shall  come  forth  ; they  that  have  done 
good,  unto  the  resurrection  of  life ; and  they  that  have  done 
evil,  unto  the  resurrection  of  judgment.”1  Beyond  these  gen- 
eral  assurances,  however,  fio  definite  information  is  given  respect- 
ing the  period,  nature,  or  circumstances  of  our  future  stage  of 
existence.  Enough  is  said  to  furnish  a mighty  sanction  for  the 
practical  teachings  of  the  Gospel,  and  thus  to  supply  a strong 
motive  for  the  purification  of  our  life  and  character  while  here  ; 
but  nothing  is  vouchsafed  to  gratify  an  idle  curiosity.  Hence 
a wide  field  is  left  for  conjecture  and  speculation,  which,  if  prop- 
erly conducted  in  a reverent  spirit,  and  with  due  reserves,  may 
serve  to  enlighten  and  confirm  our  faith  without  disturbing  its 
foundations,  or  pretending  to  be  wise  beyond  what  is  written. 
Along  the  outer  lines  of  what  is  explicitly  revealed,  and  without 
trespassing  at  all  upon  the  inclosed  region  of  positive  belief, 
there  is  abundant  room  for  the  legitimate  and  profitable  exer- 
cise of  a devout  imagination. 

This  was  certainly  the  opinion  of  an  eloquent  writer  and 
earnest  advocate  of  the  strictest  orthodoxy  of  Christian  belief, 
the  Count  Joseph  de  Maistre.  From  his  “ Evenings  at  St.  Pe- 
tersburg” (vol.  ii.  p.  1 9 1 ) I translate  the  following  passage: 
“ Under  this  head  [of  legitimate  conjecture]  I class  all  those 
opinions  not  directly  supported  by  revelation,  but  useful  for 

1 I have  translated  literally  si?  avddra6iv  xpidecoi,  instead  of  adopting 
from  our  Common  Version  what  seems  to  me  the  harsh  and  unauthorized  inter- 
pretation, “unto  the  resurrection  of  damnation.” 


316 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  W. 


explaining  more  or  less  plausibly  what  is  expressly  revealed. 
Take,  if  you  will,  the  theory  of  the  pre-existence  of  the  soul, 
through  which  we  can  explain  the  doctrine  of  inherited  sin. 
You  see  at  once  all  that  can  be  said  against  the  opposite  opin- 
ion— that  of  the  successive  creation  of  souls — and  the  advantage 
of  the  theory  of  pre-existence  for  a multitude  of  interesting  ex- 
planations. Now,  I do  not  adopt  this  theory  as  a portion  of 
accredited  belief ; but  it  may  reasonably  be  asked,  that  if  I,  poor 
weak  mortal,  can  thus  find  a hypothesis  not  at  all  absurd,  which 
solves  perfectly  an  otherwise  embarrassing  problem,  may  I not 
suppose,  even  if  this  theory"  be  not  true,  that  there  is  some  other 
solution  of  the  difficulty,  which  we  now  know  nothing  of  be- 
cause God  has  refused  it  to  our  idle  curiosity?  As  much  might 
be  said  of  Leibnitz’s  ingenious  hypothesis  respecting  the  crime 
of  Sextus  Tarquinius,  which  he  has  so  ably  developed  in  his 
Theodicy ; and  one  might  reason  in  like  manner  concerning  a 
hundred  other  systems.  Provided  they  are  modestly  proposed 
only  to  tranquillize  the  mind,  and  are  not  regarded  as  demon 
strated  truths,  they  will  not  conduce  to  pride  or  tempt  us  to 
undervalue  the  authority  of  revelation.” 

Foremost  among  these  open  questions,  as  they  may  be 
termed,  is  that  which  concerns  what  is  called  the  intermediate 
state.  What  becomes  of  the  soul,  we  naturally  inquire,  during 
the  indefinite  interval  between  the  dissolution  of  the  body  and 
the  Final  Judgment?  We  turn  away  with  aversion,  almost  with 
terror,  from  the  doctrine  of  the  sleep  of  the  soul  during  this 
long  period,  maintained  tho  it  be  by  Archdeacon  Blackburn, 
Bishop  Law,  and  a few  other  authorities  in  the  English  Church. 
Interpreting  literally  the  saying  of  St.  Paul,  “ As  by  man  came 
death,  by  man  came  also  the  resurrection  of  the  dead,”  Dr.  Law 
held,  “that  Jesus  Christ  at  his  second  coming  will,  by  an  act  of 
his  power,  restore  to  life  and  consciousness  the  dead  of  the  hu- 
man species,  who,  by  their  own  nature  and  without  this  interpo- 
sition, would  remain  in  the  state  of  insensibility  to  which  the 
death  brought  upon  mankind  by  the  sin  of  Adam  had  reduced 
them.”  But  an  immortality  the  entrance  upon  which  is  to  be 
so  long  deferred  seems  terribly  like  annihilation.  If  retribution 
can  be  thus  postponed,  if  the  dreamless  sleep  can  be  thus  con- 
tinued through  indefinite  ages  without  infringing  the  claims  of 


CHRIS  TIA  N ME  TEMPS  YCHOSIS. 


31/ 


justice,  it  would  seem  almost  a gratuitous  act  to  waken  the  soul 
again  to  consciousness. 

But  the  prevailing  opinion  in  the  English  Church,  as  well  as 
in  most  denominations  of  Protestant  Christians,  is  that  the  soul 
at  death  enters  immediately  upon  the  state  of  reward  or  pun- 
ishment awarded  to  it  as  its  due  by  infinite  justice,  wisdom,  and 
love  combined.  There  is  a Hades,  an  under-world,  the  invisi- 
ble place  of  departed  spirits,  Christ’s  descent  into  it  after  his 
crucifixion  being  affirmed  in  that  venerable  symbol  of  the  Chris- 
tian church,  the  Apostles’  Creed.  One  of  its  divisions  is  para- 
dise, the  region  of  the  blessed,  and  the  other  is  a place  of  pun- 
ishment for  the  impenitent  sinner;  and  the  doctrine  that  the 
soul  enters  at  once  upon  this  new  stage  of  its  existence  is  held 
to  be  taught  by  our  Saviour  in  his  assurance  to  the  penitent 
thief  on  the  cross,  “ To-day  shalt  thou  be  with  me  in  paradise.” 
The  same  immediacy  of  retribution  is  thought  to  be  shadowed 
forth  in  the  parable  of  Dives  and  Lazarus;  but  this  impressive 
apologue,  as  we  shall  see,  lends  itself  far  more  plausibly  to  a 
different  interpretation. 

The  obvious  objection  to  this  theory  of  the  intermediate 
state  is,  that  it  either  does  away  altogether  with  our  belief  in  a 
solemn  day  of  final  judgmeht  at  once  for  all  mankind,  or  reduces 
it  in  our  conception  to  a needless  ceremony,  all  the  consequences 
of  which  have  been  anticipated.  The  Romanist  doctrine  of 
purgatory  avoids  this  objection,  since  it  gives  a meaning  and  a 
purpose  to  the  limited  expiatory  pains  endured  in  the  interme- 
diate period,  as  they  are  held  to  purify  the  soul  from  the  effects 
of  sin,  and  thus  to  fit  it  for  unbroken  and  unlimited  happiness 
thereafter.  The  duration  of  these  penalties,  moreover,  may  be 
shortened  through  the  intercession  of  the  saints  and  the  church 
militant,  and  thus  an  encouragement  is  afforded  to  the  bereaved 
to  make  known  their  longings  and  their  hopes  through  prayers 
for  the  dead.  Sternly  to  forbid  such  prayers,  as  Protestants 
generally  do,  seems  harsh,  since  it  rebukes  what  we  must  admit 
to  be  a natural  tendency  of  the  sorrowing,  and  makes  divine 
justice  appear  dark  and  forbidding,  because  inexorable.  Of 
course,  the  Protestant  argument  is,  that  this  doctrine  of  purga- 
tory rests  only  on  tradition  and  the  authority  of  the  church, 
having  little  or  no  support  from  Scripture. 


THE  PRINCE  TON  RE  VIE  IV. 


3'* 


Still  another  theory  is  conceivable,  which  I venture  to  pro- 
pose only  with  great  diffidence,  because  it  has  no  weight  of  au- 
thority in  its  favor,  tho  it  has  long  seemed  to  me  an  obvious 
and  justifiable  hypothesis,  supported  by  some  intimations  in  the 
New  Testament,  and  better  than  any  other  to  reconcile  the  con- 
flicting claims  of  perfect  justice  and  infinite  mercy,  and  thus  to 
vindicate  the  ways  of  God  with  man.  The  doctrine  of  metemp- 
sychosis, or  the  transmigration  of  souls,  may  almost  claim  to 
be  a natural  or  innate  belief  in  the  human  mind,  if  we  may  judge' 
from  its  wide  diffusion  among  the  nations  of  the  earth  and  its 
prevalence  throughout  the  historical  ages.  It  has  been  held  by 
the  Brahmans  and  the  Bouddhists  as  far  back  as  we  can  trace 
their  history.  It  formed  a part  of  the  religion  of  ancient  Egypt. 
It  was  expressly  taught  by  Pythagoras  and  Plato,  and  was  adopted 
from  them  by  most  of  the  philosophical  sects  who  built  upon 
their  foundations.  We  find  a simple  and  pleasing  exposition 
of  the  doctrine,  unexceptionable  in  its  moral  tone  and  clothed 
in  magnificent  diction,  in  the  sixth  book  of  the  yEneid.  A be- 
lief so  widely  diffused  may  not  unreasonably  be  held,  like  the 
gift  of  language  and  of  fire,  to  have  formed  part  of  a primitive 
revelation  from  God  to  man. 

Our  life  upon  earth  is  rightly  held  to  be  a discipline  and  a 
preparation  for  a higher  and  eternal  life  hereafter.  But  if  limi- 
ted to  the  duration  of  a single  mortal  body,  it  is  so  brief  as  to 
seem  hardly  sufficient  for  so  grand  a purpose.  Threescore  years 
and  ten  must  surely  be  an  inadequate  preparation  for  eternity. 
But  what  assurance  have  we  that  the  probation  of  the  soul  is 
confined  within  so  narrow  limits?  Why  may  it  not  be  con- 
tinued, or  repeated,  through  a long  series  of  successive  genera- 
tions, the  same  personality  animating  one  after  another  an  in- 
definite number  of  tenements  of  flesh,  and  carrying  forward  into 
each  the  training  it  has  received,  the  character  it  has  formed,  the 
temper  and  dispositions  it  has  indulged,  in  the  stage  of  exis- 
tence immediately  preceding?  It  need  not  remember  its  past 
history,  even  while  bearing  the  fruits  and  the  consequences  of 
that  history  deeply  ingrained  into  its  present  nature.  How 
many  long  passages  of  any  one  life  are  now  completely  lost  to 
memory,  tho  they  may  have  contributed  largely  to  build  up 
the  heart  and  the  intellect  which  distinguish  one  man  from  an- 


CHRIS  TIA  N ME  TEMPS  YCHOSIS. 


319 


other!  Our  responsibility  surely  is  not  lessened  by  such  for- 
getfulness. We  are  still  accountable  for  the  misuse  of  time, 
tho  we  have  forgotten  how  or  on  what  we  wasted  it.  We 
are  even  now  reaping  the  bitter  fruits,  through  enfeebled  health 
and  vitiated  desires  and  capacities,  of  many  forgotten  acts  of 
self-indulgence,  wilfulness,  and  sin — forgotten  just  because  they 
were  so  numerous.  Then  a future  life  even  in  another  frail  body 
upon  this  earth  may  well  be  a state  of  just  and  fearful  retribu- 
tion. 

Why  should  it  be  thought  incredible  that  the  same  soul 
should  inhabit  in  succession  an  indefinite  number  of  mortal 
bodies,  and  thus  prolong  its  experience  and  its  probation  till  it 
has  become  in  every  sense  ripe  for  heaven  or  the  final  judg- 
ment? Even  during  this  one  life,  our  bodies  are  perpetually 
changing,  tho  by  a process  of  decay  and  restoration  which  is 
so  gradual  that  it  escapes  our  notice.  Every  human  being  thus 
dwells  successively  in  many  bodies,  even  during  one  short  life. 
This  physiological  fact  seems  to  have  been  known  by  Plato,  as 
in  a well-known  passage  of  the  Phaedo,  a clear  statement  of  it  is 
put  into  the  mouth  of  Cebes,  who  argues,  however,  that  this 
fact  affords  no  sufficient  proof  of  the  immortality  of  the  soul. 
“ You  may  say  with  reason,”  Cebes  is  made  to  argue,  “that  the 
soul  is  lasting,  and  the  body  weak  and  short-lived  in  comparison. 
And  every  soul  may  be  said  to  wear  out  many  bodies,  especially 
in  the  course  of  a long  life.  For  if,  while  the  man  is  alive,  the 
body  deliquesces  and  decays,  and  yet  the  soul  always  weaves 
her  garment  anew  and  repairs  the  waste,  then  of  course,  when 
the  soul  perishes,  she  must  have  on  her  last  garment,  and  this 
only  will  survive  her;  but  then,  again,  when  the  soul  is  dead,, the 
body  will  at  last  show  its  native  weakness  and  soon  pass  into 
decay.”  And  again : “ Suppose  we  admit  also  that,  after  death, 
the  souls  of  some  are  existing  still,  and  will  exist,  and  will  be 
born  and  die  again  and  again,  and  that  there  is  a natural  strength 
in  the  soul  which  will  hold  out  and  be  born  many  times — for  all 
this,  we  may  still  be  inclined  to  think  that  she  will  be  weary  in 
the  labors  of  successive  births,  and  may  at  last  succumb  in  one 
of  her  deaths  and  utterly  perish.”  1 


Jowett’s  translation,  Am.  ed.,  vol.  i.  p.  416. 


320 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


In  the  Dialogue,  Socrates  admits,  with  Cebes,  that  this  one 
fact,  taken  alone,  does  not  sufficiently  prove  that  the  soul  will 
never  die ; and  he  proceeds  to  argue  in  defence  of  immortality 
on  other  grounds.  But  what  we  are  here  especially  concerned 
to  notice  is  the  assertion,  made  in  the  passage  cited,  that  “ the 
soul  always  weaves  her  garment  anew  and  repairs  the  waste.” 
This  is  a distinct  statement  by  anticipation  of  the  modern  phy- 
siological doctrine  taught  by  Stahl,  Bouillier,  Hartmann,  and 
other  animists,  that  the  soul  has  a plastic  power,  and  is  thus  an 
unconscious  agent  of  Deity  in  constructing  its  own  corporeal 
organism.  As  bees  and  birds  instinctively  fashion  their  own 
curiously  wrought  cells  and  nests  with  an  art  which  is  not  their 
own,  since  they  know  nothing  of  the  admirable  adaptations  of 
the  parts  to  each  other,  or  of  the  uses  which  the  whole  structure 
is  to  subserve,  we  may  well  believe  that  they  also  blindly  put 
together,  from  the  earliest  embryonic  stage  upwards,  the  whole 
fabric  of  their  own  bodies.  The  animal’s  own  will  is  the  opera- 
tive agent,  the  purpose  and  the  guidance  are  divine.  This  is 
the  essential  purport  of  Dr.  Cudworth’s  noted  hypothesis  of  “ a 
plastic  nature.”  The  primal  germ  of  all  animal  life,  from  the 
animalcule  up  to  man,  is  a minute  speck  too  small  to  be  dis- 
cerned except  by  the  highest  power  of  the  microscope.  And 
yet  this  is  all  which  is  directly  inherited  from  the  parent ; all  the 
other  portions  of  the  completed  structure  are  subsequently 
brought  from  without  and  superinduced  upon  this  speck  by 
epigenesis.  Now  which  is  the  more  probable  hypothesis  ? That 
of  the  materialist,  that  within  this  infinitesimal  germ  is  lodged 
a most  complex  and  elaborate  apparatus,  which  blindly  and 
mechanically  builds  up,  step  by  step,  the  whole  animal  organism 
with  all  its  artistic  arrangement  of  parts  and  capacities  of  action? 
Or  that  of  the  spiritualist,  who  holds  that  a principle  of  life — in 
the  case  of  man,  a living  soul — is  attached  to  that  speck  by  a 
divine  hand,  and  then  this  vital  principle,  God-guided,  weaves 
for  itself  its  own  future  habitation  ? The  unconscious  action  of 
mind  or  instinct  in  keeping  up  the  organism  through  repairing 
its  waste,  healing  its  wounds,  and  remedying  its  hurts,  is  recog- 
nized by  most  scientific  observers.  Then  we  may  well  believe 
with  Plato,  that  as  “ the  soul  always  weaves  her  garment  anew,” 
and  thus  reconstructs  the  body  many  times  during  one  short 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


321 


life,  it  also  has  “ a natural  strength  which  will  hold  out  and  be 
born  many  times,”  at  each  successive  birth  fashioning  for  itself 
anew  its  future  home. 

If  every  birth  were  an  act  of  absolute  creation,  the  introduc- 
tion to  life  of  an  entirely  new  creature,  we  might  reasonably  ask 
why  different  souls  are  so  variously  constituted  at  the  outset. 
We  do  not  all  start  fair  in  the  race  that  is  set  before  us,  and 
therefore  all  cannot  be  expected,  at  the  close  of  one  brief  mortal 
pilgrimage,  to  reach  the  same  goal  and  to  be  equally  well  fitted 
for  the  blessings  or  the  penalties  of  a fixed  state  hereafter.  The 
commonest  observation  assures  us  that  one  child  is  born  with 
limited  capacities  and  perhaps  a wayward  disposition,  strong 
passions,  and  a sullen  temper ; that  he  has  tendencies  to  evil 
which  are  almost  sure  to  be  soon  developed.  Another,  on  the 
contrary,  seems  happily  endowed  from  the  start ; he  is  not  only 
amiable,  tractable,  and  kind,  but  quick-witted  and  precocious,  a 
child  of  many  hopes.  The  one  seems  a perverse  goblin,  while 
the  other  has  the  early  promise  of  a Cowley  or  a Pascal.  The 
differences  of  external  condition  also  are  so  vast  and  obvious 
that  they  seem  to  detract  much  from  the  merit  of  a well-spent 
life  and  from  the  guilt  of  vice  and  crime.  One  is  so  happily 
nurtured  in  a Christian  home,  and  under  so  many  protecting 
influences,  that  the  path  of  virtue  lies  straight  and  open  before 
him — so  plain,  indeed,  that  even  the  blind  could  safely  walk 
therein  ; while  another  seems  born  to  a heritage  of  misery,  ex- 
posure, and  crime.  The  birthplace  of  one  is  in  Central  Africa, 
and  of  another  in  the  heart  of  civilized  and  Christian  Europe. 
Where  lingers  eternal  justice  then?  How  can  such  frightful 
inequalities  be  made  to  appear  consistent  with  the  infinite  wis- 
dom and  goodness  of  God  ? 

If  metempsychosis  is  included  in  the  scheme  of  the  divine 
government  of  the  world,  this  difficulty  disappears  altogether. 
Considered  from  this  point  of  view,  every  one  is  born  into  the 
state  which  he  has  fairly  earned  by  his  own  previous  history. 
He  carries  with  him  from  one  stage  of  existence  to  another  the 
habits  or  tendencies  which  he  has  formed,  the  dispositions  which 
he  has  indulged,  the  passions  which  he  has  not  chastised,  but 
has  voluntarily  allowed  to  lead  him  into  vice  and  crime.  No 
active  interference  of  retributive  justice  is  needed,  except  in 


322 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


selecting  for  the  place  of  his  new  birth  a home  with  appropriate 
surroundings — perhaps  such  a home  as  through  his  evil  passions 
he  has  made  for  others.  The  doctrine  of  inherited  sin  and  its 
consequences  is  a hard  lesson  to  be  learned.  We  submit  with 
enforced  resignation  to  the  stern  decree,  corroborated  as  it  is  by 
every  day’s  observation  of  the  ordinary  course  of  this  world’s 
affairs,  that  the  iniquity  of  the  fathers  shall  be  visited  upon  the 
children  even  to  the  third  and  fourth  generation.  But  no  one 
can  complain  of  the  dispositions  and  endowments  which  he  has 
inherited,  so  to  speak,  from  himself ; that  is,  from  his  former  self 
in  a previous  stage  of  existence.  If,  for  instance,  he  has  neg- 
lected his  opportunities  and  fostered  his  lower  appetites  in  his 
childhood,  if  he  was  then  wayward  and  self-indulgent,  indolent, 
deceitful,  and  vicious,  it  is  right  and  just  that,  in  his  manhood 
and  old  age,  he  should  experience  the  bitter  consequences  of  his 
youthful  follies.  If  he  has  voluntarily  made  himself  a brute,  a 
brute  he  must  remain.  The  child  is  father  of  the  man,  who 
often  inherits  from  him  a sad  patrimony.  There  is  an  awful 
meaning,  if  we  will  but  take  it  to  heart,  in  the  solemn  announce- 
ment of  the  angel  in  the  apocalyptic  vision  : “ He  that  is  unjust, 
let  him  be  unjust  still ; and  he  which  is  filthy,  let  him  be  filthy 
still ; and  he  that  is  righteous,  let  him  be  righteous  still ; and  he 
that  is  holy,  let  him  be  holy  still.”  And  it  matters  not,  so  far 
as  the  justice  of  the  sentence  is  concerned,  whether  the  former 
self,  from  whom  we  receive  this  heritage,  was  the  child  who,  not 
many  years  ago,  bore  the  same  name  with  our  present  self,  or 
one  who  bore  a different  name,  who  was  born  in  another  age 
and  perhaps  another  hemisphere,  and  of  whose  sad  history  we 
have  not  now  the  faintest  remembrance.  We  know  that  our 
personal  identity  actually  extends  farther  back,  and  links  to- 
gether more  passages  of  our  life,  than  what  is  now  present  to 
consciousness;  tho  it  is  true  that  we  have  no  direct  evidence 
of  this  continuity  and  sameness  of  being  beyond  what  is  attested 
by  memory.  But  we  may  have  indirect  evidence  of  it  from  the 
testimony  of  others  in  the  case  of  our  own  infancy,  or  from 
revelation,  or  through  reasoning  from  analogy  and  from  the 
similarity  of  cases  and  characters.  The  soul,  said  the  Hindoos, 
is  in  the  body  like  a bird  in  a cage,  or  like  a pilot  who  steers  a 
ship  and  seeks  a new  vessel  when  the  old  one  is  worn  out. 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


323 


Who  shall  say,  then,  that  the  doctrine  of  original  sin  is  neces- 
sarily an  impeachment  of  God’s  justice?  If  the  theory  which  I 
am  now  setting  forth  is  well  founded,  such  sin  is  an  immediate 
and  grand  manifestation  of  such  justice. 

This  ethical  significance,  as  it  may  be  called,  of  the  doctrine 
of  the  transmigration  of  souls,  this  aspect  of  it  in  which  it  ap- 
pears as  holding  the  balance  even,  immediately  and  inseparably 
uniting  holiness  with  its  reward  and  sin  with  its  punishment,  is 
its  essential  feature  according  to  the  Brahmans  and  the  Boud- 
dhists,  and  one  upon  which  they  place  the  greatest  stress,  tho 
they  carry  out  the  retribution,  as  might  be  expected,  into  need- 
less and  whimsical  details.  They  teach  that  whatever  sufferings 
we  wrongly  inflict  upon  others  in  this  life  must  be  expiated  in  a 
future  state  by  enduring  precisely  similar  sufferings  in  our  own 
person  ; even  he  who  wantonly  maims  or  kills  a brute  animal 
will,  at  some  day  in  the  infinite  future,  be  born  again  as  such  an 
animal,  and  will  suffer  the  same  mutilation  or  death.  If  we  are 
pitiless  in  beholding  the  hunger  and  nakedness  of  others  while 
here,  our  own  cry  for  compassion  will  not  be  heard  when  we 
shall  be  called  to  endure  the  like  evils  hereafter.  The  parts  will 
be  interchanged;  the  oppressor  and  his  victim,  the  tyrant  and 
his  slave,  will  change  places  with  each  other.  All  this  may 
seem  fanciful  enough  ; but  it  is  an  apologue  which  involves  a 
great  truth,  for  it  is  essentially  the  same  lesson  which  is  so  im- 
pressively taught  in  the  parable  of  Dives  and  Lazarus.  The 
time  of  expiation  is  there  represented  as  continuous  and  parallel 
with  the  life  that  now  is  ; for  the  rich  man,  after  the  agonized 
cry  wrested  from  him  by  his  own  sufferings,  “ Have  mercy  on 
me !”  prays  that  a message  may  be  sent  to  those  who  are  still 
living,  to  his  five  brethren,  that  they  may  be  called  to  repent- 
ance. We  need  not  fix  any  arbitrary  limit  here  between  imagi- 
native illustration  and  literal  truth  ; for  we  are  only  concerned 
with  the  moral  of  the  story,  which  is  all  contained  in  the  solemn 
monition,  “ Son,  remember  that  thou  in  thy  lifetime  receivedst 
thy  good  things,  and  likewise  Lazarus  evil  things ; but  now  he 
is  comforted,  and  thou  art  tormented.”  Considered  either  as 
parable  or  prophecy,  it  is  an  accurate  picture  of  the  immediacy 
and  the  even  measure  of  God’s  justice.  The  Latin  poet  who 
seems  to  have  imbibed  most  of  the  spirit  of  Christianity,  while 


324 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


ignorant  of  its  letter,  teaches  essentially  the  same  truth  : “ Quisqiu 
suos  patimur  manes" — each  one  of  us  suffers  his  own  appropriate 
punishment. 

The  pantheists  also,  or  rather  those  who  teach  the  absolute 
unity  of  all  things  without  admitting  any  form  of  theism,  draw 
a similar  picture  of  the  immediacy  and  the  essential  nature  of 
eternal  justice,  while  seeking  only  to  interpret  the  voice  of  con- 
science in  conformity  with  their  peculiar  doctrine.  Temporal 
justice,  as  it  is  administered  by  man  through  the  institutions  of 
society,  through  its  apparatus  of  judicial  tribunals  and  prisons 
and  scaffolds,  always  admits  delay  between  the  criminal  act  and 
its  retributive  consequences ; for,  as  its  name  imports,  it  takes 
place  under  the  forna  of  time,  and  needs  time  in  order  to  be  car- 
ried out.  Hence  the  arm  of  such  justice  is  slow  to  strike  and 
uncertain  in  its  aim,  so  that  it  often  fails  altogether.  Not  so 
with  eternal  justice,  which  is  above  or  beyond  time,  so  that  the 
offence  and  its  punishment  are  inseparably  connected  as  one 
and  the  same  event,  because  there  is  no  real  or  absolute  dis- 
tinction, but  only  a phenomenal  one,  between  the  offender  and 
the  offended.  He  who  injures  another  in  fact  wrongs  himself ; 
to  adopt  Schopenhauer’s  striking  figure,  he  is  only  a wild  beast 
who  fastens  his  fangs  in  his  own  flesh.  We  cannot  accept  this 
theory,  as  it  is  founded  upon  a denial  of  the  self-evident  truth 
attested  by  every  one’s  consciousness,  that,  at  any  one  moment; 
he  is  a distinct  personality  separate  from  that  of  every  other 
human  being.  The  difference  between  you  and  me  is  more  than 
phenomenal ; conscience  as  well  as  consciousness  declares  that 
it  is  complete  and  absolute. 

Nothing  prevents  us,  however,  from  believing  that  the  pro- 
bation of  any  one  soul  extends  continuously  through  a long 
series  of  successive  existences  upon  earth,  each  successive  act  in 
the  whole  life-history  being  retributive  for  what  went  before. 
For  this  is  the  universal  law  of  being,  whether  of  matter  or 
mind ; everything  changes,  nothing  dies  in  the  sense  of  being 
annihilated.  What  we  call  death  is  only  the  resolution  of  a 
complex  body  into  its  constituent  parts,  nothing  that  is  truly 
one  and  indivisible  being  lost  or  destroyed  in  the  process.  In 
combustion  or  any  other  rapid  chemical  change,  according  to  the 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS.  325 

admission  of  the  materialists  themselves,  not  an  atom  of  matter 
is  ever  generated  or  ever  ceases  to  be  ; it  only  escapes  from  one 
combination  to  enter  upon  another.  Then  the  human  soul, 
which,  as  we  know  from  consciousness,  is  absolutely  one  and  in- 
divisible, only  passes  on  after  the  dissolution  of  what  was  once 
its  home  to  animate  another  body.  In  this  sense  we  can  easily 
accept  the  doctrine  of  the  resurrection  of  the  body.  Our  future 
life  is  not,  at  any  rate  not  while  the  present  administration  of 
this  world’s  affairs  continues,  to  be  some  inconceivable  form  of 
merely  spiritual  being.  It  will  be  clothed  again  with  a body, 
which  may  or  may  not  be  in  part  the  same  with  the  one  which 
it  has  just  left.  Leibnitz  held  that  the  soul  is  never  entirely 
divorced  from  matter,  but  carries  on  some  portion  of  what  was 
its  earthly  covering  into  a subsequent  stage  of  existence. 
Hence,  while  we  cannot  admit  the  dream  of  the  Eleatic  and  the 
pantheist  that  all  is  one,  that  there  is  no  separate  individual 
being,  that  the  distinction  between  you  and  me  and  all  other 
beings  who  even  now  walk  the  earth  is  only  phenomenal  or  ap- 
parent, like  the  difference  between  the  many  images  of  the  moon 
in  countless  pools  of  water,  all  of  which  are  mere  representa- 
tions of  the  one  moon  up  there  among  the  clouds — I say,  while 
we  cannot  admit  this  senseless  and  inconceivable  doctrine,  for 
it  is  contradicted  by  the  clearest  dictates  of  consciousness,  we 
can  easily  imagine  and  believe  that  every  person  now  living  is  a 
representation  of  some  one  who  lived  perhaps  centuries  ago 
under  another  name,  in  another  country,  it  may  be  not  with  the 
same  line  of  ancestry,  and  yet  one  and  the  same  with  him  in  his 
inmost  being  and  essential  character.  His  surroundings  are 
changed  ; the  old  house  of  flesh  has  been  torn  down  and  re- 
built ; but  the  tenant  is  still  the  same.  He  has  come  down 
from  some  former  generation,  bringing  with  him  what  may  be 
either  a help  or  a hindrance ; namely,  the  character  and  tenden- 
cies which  he  there  formed  and  nurtured.  And  herein  is  retri- 
bution ; he  has  entered  upon  a new  stage  of  probation,  and  in 
it  he  has  now  to  learn  what  the  character  which  he  there  formed 
naturally  leads  to  when  tried  upon  a new  and  perhaps  broader 
theatre.  If  this  be  not  so,  tell  me  why  men  are  born  with  char- 
acters so  unlike  and  with  tendencies  so  depraved.  In  a sense 
22 


326 


THE  PRINCE  TON  REVIEW. 


far  more  literal  than  was  intended  by  the  poet,  it  may  be  true 
of  every  country  church-yard,  that 

“Some  mute  inglorious  Milton  there  may  rest, 

Some  Cromwell  guiltless  of  his  country’s  blood.” 

They  bring  with  them  no  recollection  of  the  incidents  of  their 
former  life,  as  such  memory  would  unfit  them  for  the  new  part 
which  they  have  to  play. 


“ Animae,  quibus  altera  fato 
Corpora  debentur,  Lethaei  ad  fluminis  undam 
Securos  latices  et  longa  oblivia  potant. 

Scilicet  immemores  supera  ut  convexa  revisant." 

But  they  are  still  the  same  in  the  principles  and  modes  of  con- 
duct, in  the  inmost  springs  of  action,  which  the  forgotten  inci- 
dents of  their  former  life  have  developed  and  strengthened. 
They  are  the  same  in  all  the  essential  points  which  made  them 
formerly  a blessing  or  a curse  to  all  with  whom  they  came  im- 
mediately in  contact,  and  through  which  they  will  again  become 
sources  of  weal  or  woe  to  their  environment.  Of  course,  these 
inborn  tendencies  may  be  either  exaggerated  or  chastised  by 
the  lessons  of  a new  experience,  by  the  exercise  of  reflection, 
and  by  habitually  heeding  or  neglecting  the  monitions  of  con- 
science. But  they  still  exist  as  original  tendencies,  and  as  such 
they  must  make  either  the  upward  or  the  downward  path  more 
easy,  more  natural,  and  more  likely  to  reach  a goal  so  remote 
that  it  would  otherwise  be  unattainable. 

To  make  this  more  clear,  let  me  refer  to  the  pregnant  dis- 
tinction so  admirably  illustrated  by  Kant  between  what  he 
calls  the  Intelligible  Character  and  the  Empirical  or  acquired 
Character.  The  former  is  the  primitive  foundation  on  which 
the  latter,  which  directly  determines  our  conduct  for  the  time 
being,  is  built.  To  a great  extent,  tho  not  entirely,  we  are 
what  we  arc  through  the  influence  of  what  have  been  our  sur- 
roundings— through  our  education,  our  companions,  our  habits, 
and  our  associations.  But  these  influences  must  have  had  a 
primitive  basis  to  work  upon,  and  can  only  modify  the  opera- 
tion of  the  native  germs,  not  change  their  nature  ; and  they  will 
modify  these  more  or  less  profoundly  according  as  they  are 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


327 


more  or  less  amenable  to  outside  influences  and  manifest  more 
or  less  decidedly  a bias  in  one  direction  or  another.  What  the 
future  plant  will  be  depends  much  more  on  the  specific  nature 
of  the  seed  which  is  sown  than  on  the  fertility  or  barrenness  of 
the  soil  into  which  it  is  cast.  The  latter  only  determine  whether 
it  shall  be  a vigorous  plant  or  a weak  one,  whether  in  fact  it 
shall  grow  at  all  or  only  rot  in  the  ground  ; but  they  do  not  de- 
termine the  specific  direction  of  its  development,  whether  it  shall 
be  an  oak,  a willow,  or  an  ivy  bush.  The  empirical  or  acquired 
character,  as  it  is  open  to  observation,  is  a phenomenon ; it  is 
what  the  man  appears  to  be,  or  what  he  has  become  under  the 
shaping  influence  of  the  circumstances  to  which  he  has  been  ex- 
posed. But  the  Intelligible  Character,  the  inmost  kernel  of  his 
real  being,  is  a noumenon,  and  escapes  external  observation ; 
we  can  judge  of  its  nature  only  indirectly  from  its  effects;  that 
is  to  say,  from  the  conduct  which  it  has  co-operated  to  produce. 
A change  taking  place  in  any  substance  must  be  the  joint  result 
of  two  factors;  namely,  its  proper  cause  operating  upon  it  from 
without,  and  the  thing’s  own  nature  or  internal  constitution. 
Thus  the  same  degree  of  heat  acts  very  differently  upon  differ- 
ent substances,  say,  on  wax,  iron,  water,  clay,  or  powder.  In  like 
manner,  a given  motive,  say,  the  desire  of  wealth,  when  acting  on 
different  persons,  tho  with  the  same  strength  or  intensity, 
may  lead  to  very  dissimilar  results ; it  makes  one  man  a thief 
and  another  a miser,  renders  one  envious  and  another  energetic 
and  industrious.  If  frequently  indulged,  it  forms  a fixed  habit, 
and  thus  becomes  an  element  in  the  acquired  or  empirical  char- 
acter. 

Now  Kant,  with  the  bias  of  a necessitarian,  places  our  free- 
dom and  our  responsibility  in  the  realm  of  noumena,  attributing 
them  exclusively  to  our  Intelligible  Character.  As  to  the  ac- 
quired character  when  once  formed,  he  says  we  must  act  in  ac- 
cordance with  it,  and  therefore  we  are  not  accountable  for  the 
particular  act  to  which  it  led,  since  that  we  could  not  help. 
After  I have  once  formed  a habit  of  lying  or  stealing,  should  an 
opportunity  and  temptation  recur,  I must  repeat  the  offence. 
But  our  inborn  character,  which  expresses  what  we  really  are, 
as  a noumenon,  lies  outside  of  time,  space,  and  causality,  and 
therefore  cannot  be  led  astray  by  temptation  or  external  cir- 


*■» 


328 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


cumstances,  but  is  entirely  free.  Herein  solely  consists  our 
merit  or  our  guilt.  Hence  Kant  would  make  us  responsible 
not  for  the  particular  crime,  which  we  could  not  help  commit- 
ting, but  for  being  such  a person  as  to  be  capable  of  that  crime. 
W e are  accountable  not  for  what  we  do,  but  for  what  we  are. 
We  are  to  be  punished  not  for  stealing  this  horse,  but  for  being 
a rogue  or  thief  in  grain,  for  being  naturally  inclined  to  stealing. 

It  would  seem,  however,  that  this  theory  completely  reverses 
the  verdict  of  natural  justice,  which  declares  that  we  might  have 
resisted  the  force  of  habit  and  special  temptation,  and  conse- 
quently that  we  are  punishable  for  the  particular  act ; while  on 
the  other  hand,  we  could  not  help  being  born  with  a feeble  or 
depraved  character,  but  in  so  far,  we  are  objects  rather  of  com- 
passion than  of  censure.  And  yet  Kant  is  right  in  the  latter 
half  of  his  theory,  since  conscience  unmistakably  testifies  that 
we  are  responsible  for  our  inmost  nature ; that  is,  for  our  innate 
tendencies  to  wrong-doing  or  its  opposite.  We  do  not  esteem 
a truthful  person  any  the  less  because  he  is  so  happily  consti- 
tuted that  he  cannot  help  telling  the  truth;  rather  this  fact  en- 
hances our  respect  for  his  character.  And  we  detest  a falsehood 
all  the  more  if  he  who  utters  it  has  been  a liar  from  the  begin- 
ning. Now  it  seems  to  me  that  this  instinctive  action  of  con- 
science in  awarding  merit  or  guilt  rather  to  the  primitive  and 
inborn  character  of  the  man,  to  “ the  one  permanent  individu- 
ality which  continues  unchanged  through  all  the  various  modes 
of  consciousness,”  than  to  any  particular  act  in  which  that  char- 
acter and  individuality  happen  to  be  manifested,  can  be  ex- 
plained only  by  accepting  that  paradoxical  portion  of  Kant’s 
theory,  which  declares  that  we  were  free  to  make  our  own  in- 
most nature,  our  permanent  individuality,  other  than  it  is,  and 
we  are  therefore  responsible  for  its  perversion.  That  the  man 
was  thoroughly  bad,  bad  from  the  beginning,  surely  makes  him 
more  hateful  than  if  he  had  been  merely  tempted  into  a single 
act  of  sin  which  marred  the  uniformity  of  a character  otherwise 
pure  and  blameless.  But  this  strange  fact,  that  we  are  even 
more  responsible  for  what  we  are  than  for  what  we  do,  can  be 
accounted  for  only  by  supposing  that  we  freely  made  ourselves 
what  we  are  in  a previous  stage  of  probationary  being.  Only 
■ through  voluntary  persistence  in  wrong-doing  at  some  former 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


329 


period,  only  through  frequently  yielding  then  to  temptation, 
could  we  have  formed  the  depraved  habits  and  tendencies  which 
appeared  ingrained  into  our  inmost  nature  from  the  very  begin- 
ning of  our  present  life.  And  conversely,  a nature  happily  en- 
dowed from  the  start  must  be  the  reward,  as  it  is  the  necessary 
consequence,  of  virtuous  habits  and  a steadfast  adherence  to 
the  right  through  a former  state  of  existence. 

I know  not  how  it  may  seem  to  others,  but  to  me  there  is 
something  inexpressibly  consolatory  and  inspiring  in  the  thought 
that  the  great  and  good  of  other  days  have  not  finally  accom- 
plished their  earthly  career,  have  not  left  us  desolate,  but  that 
they  are  still  with  us,  in  the  flesh,  tho  we  know  them  not, 
and  tho  in  one  sense  they  do  not  really  know'  themselves, 
because  they  have  no  remembrance  of  a former  life  in  which 
they  were  trained  for  the  work  which  they  are  now  doing.  But 
they  are  essentially  the  same  beings,  for  they  have  the  same  in- 
tellect and  character  as  before,  and  sameness  in  these  two  re- 
spects is  all  that  constitutes  our  notion  of  personal  identity. 
We  are  unwilling  to  believe  that  their  beneficent  activity  was 
limited  to  one  short  life  on  earth,  at  the  close  of  which  there 
opened  to  them  an  eternity  without  change,  without  farther 
trial  or  action,  and  seemingly  having  no  other  purpose  than  un- 
limited enjoyment.  Such  a conception  of  immortality  is  exposed 
to  Schopenhauer’s  sarcasm,  that  if  effort  and  progress  are  possi- 
ble only  in  the  present  life,  and  no  want  or  suffering  can  be  en- 
dured except  as  the  penalties  of  sin,  there  remains  for  heaven 
only  the  weariness  of  nothing  to  do.  An  eternity  either  of  re- 
ward or  punishment  would  seem  to  be  inadequately  earned  by 
one  brief  period  of  probation.  It  is  far  more  reasonable  to  be- 
lieve that  the  future  life  which  we  are  taught  to  expect  will  be 
similar  to  the  present  one,  and  will  be  spent  in  this  world,  tho 
we  shall  carry  forward  to  it  the  burden  or  the  blessing  entailed 
upon  us  by  our  past  career.  Besides  the  spiritual  meaning  of 
the  doctrine  of  regeneration,  besides  the  new  birth  which  is  “ of 
water  and  of  the  Spirit,”  there  may  be  a literal  meaning  in  the 
solemn  words  of  the  Saviour,  “ Except  a man  be  born  again,  he 
cannot  see  the  kingdom  of  God.” 

It  would  be  a fanciful  and  bootless  task  for  us  to  attempt, 
even  in  a single  instance,  to  trace  the  same  person  through  a 


330 


The  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


succession  of  earthly  lives.  When  the  body  and  all  its  sur- 
roundings are  altered,  when  the  modes  of  action  are  new  and 
the  results  different,  it  needs  more  than  human  sagacity  to  per- 
ceive that  the  character  is  still  the  same.  Only  he  who  reads 
the  heart  can  know,  after  the  whole  environment  of  outward 
circumstances  is  changed,  that  the  personality  still  endures  and 
has  suffered  no  break  in  the  essence  of  its  life’s  history.  When 
even  our  Lord,  after  his  resurrection,  first  appeared  to  Mary 
Magdalene  and  to  the  two  disciples  at  Emmaus,  familiar  as  they 
had  been  with  his  external  appearance,  we  read  that  “ their  eyes 
were  holden  that  they  should  not  know  him.”  Then  we  can 
have  a more  lively  faith  in  the  truth  of  the  last  promise  which 
he  made  to  them,  “ And  lo,  I am  with  you  alway,  even  unto  the 
end  of  the  world.”  Even  in  this  earthly  life,  at  the  various 
stages  of  its  history,  there  is  room  for  a richly  varied  experience  ; 
there  are  countless  fields  for  distinct  effort  in  it,  and  we  may 
not  measure  the  importance  of  the  work  to  be  done  in  any  one 
of  them  by  what  the  world  thinks  of  its  dignity  or  the  large- 
ness of  its  results.  The  saintly  Carlo  Borromeo  was  a cardinal 
and  a prince,  and  therefore  found  the  whole  north  of  Italy  but 
a narrow  theatre  for  the  incessant  warfare  which  he  waged,  often 
at  the  peril  of  his  life,  against  all  forms  of  sickness,  sorrowing, 
and  sin.  He  was  canonized  not  long  after  his  death,  and  the 
gigantic  statue  of  him  which  crowns  a height  near  Arona  is 
appropriately  visible  for  many  leagues  around,  tho  by  no  means 
so  far  as  his  philanthropic  influence  extended.  If,  after  the  dis- 
solution of  his  body,  his  beneficent  spirit  was  still  allowed  to 
walk  the  earth  in  a mortal  form,  it  might  perhaps  be  found,  not 
in  any  lofty  and  conspicuous  station,  but  in  the  seclusion  of  a 
remote  Alpine  valley,  where  an  Oberlin  taught,  loved,  and  helped 
his  brother-man.  Luther  was  born  in  an  age  when  a great  crisis 
was  imminent  in  the  world’s  affairs,  and  his  indomitable  spirit, 
his  fervent  convictions,  and  his  restless  energy  had  full  scope 
and  play  in  the  opening  scenes  of  the  Reformation.  If  a mind 
and  character  the  same  as  his  could  anywhere  be  traced  in  the 
subsequent  history  of  the  world,  perhaps  it  might  be  detected 
within  the  fold  of  the  very  church  which  he  strove  to  over- 
throw, in  him  who  was  called  “the  great  Arnauld,”  who,  perse- 
cuted and  in  exile  during  the  greater  part  of  his  long  life,  still 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


33i 


bated  not  a jot  of  heart  or  hope,  but  fought  on  and  prayed  on 
in  defence  of  a sinking  cause,  and  whose  collected  works  in  phi- 
losophy and  theology  occupy  fifty  folio  volumes.  Late  in  life, 
when  his  friend  and  coadjutor  Nicole  besought  him  to  lay  down 
the  pen  and  take  some  repose,  he  exclaimed,  “ Rest ! Shall  we 
not  have  all  eternity  to  rest  in  ?”  “ Probably  not,”  I should  an- 

swer; for  surely  a heaven  in  which  there  was  nothing  to  do 
would  be  no  heaven  to  him.  Jansenism  as  a distinctive  sect  and 
creed  hardly  survived  the  death  of  its  founders,  and  has  now 
long  been  entirely  extinct.  But  I should  be  sorry  to  believe 
that  that  remarkable  group  of  excellent  scholars,  thinkers,  and 
divines,  the  Port-Royalists,  who  upheld  the  cause  of  Jansenism 
for  three  quarters  of  a century,  have  finally  passed  away  from 
earth.  On  the  contrary,  if  anywhere  in  these  later  times  the 
model  of  a Christian  scholar  and  historian  could  be  found,  we 
might  well  say  that  the  spirit  of  Tillemont  lives  again  in  him. 
If  we  could  find  one  who  united  in  himself  all  the  best  qualities 
of  a Christian  teacher  stainless  in  heart  and  life,  we  might  well 
believe  that  it  was  Lancelot  in  another  earthly  form.  For  either 
Pascal  or  Arnauld,  it  must  be  admitted  that  we  should  not  know 
where  to  look ; if  their  spirits  are  yet  in  this  world,  they  must 
be  in  the  obscurity  of  some  lowly  station. 

All  this  speculation,  I repeat,  is  completely  fanciful,  and  can 
serve  no  other  purpose  than  to  show,  even  if  the  doctrine  of 
metempsychosis  were  true,  that  we  should  not  be  able  to  iden- 
tify one  person  in  any  two  of  his  successive  appearances  upon 
earth.  We  surely  could  not  know  of  him  in  this  respect  any 
more  than  he  knows  of  himself ; and  as  already  said,  the  total 
break  in  memory  at  the  beginning  of  every  successive  life  must 
prevent  the  newly  born  from  recognizing  the  oneness  of  his  own 
being  with  any  former  existence  in  an  earthly  shape. 

Curiously  enough  this  want  of  self-knowledge  is  confessed 
in  the  only  case  in  which  we  have  a direct  assertion  in  Scripture, 
(if  language  is  to  be  interpreted  in  its  ordinary  literal  meaning, 
and  not  strained  into  a figurative  sense),  that  one  of  the  heroes 
of  the  olden  time  had  reappeared  upon  earth  under  a new  name, 
as  the  forerunner  of  a new  dispensation.  At  the  time  of  the 
Saviour,  there  appears  to  have  been  a general  expectation  among 
the  Jews,  that  the  coming  of  the  Messiah  was  to  be  heralded  by 


332 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


the  reappearance  upon  earth  of  the  prophet  Elijah,  this  expec- 
tation being  founded  upon  the  text  in  Malachi,  “ Behold,  I will 
send  you  Elijah  the  prophet  before  the  coming  of  the  great  and 
dreadful  day  of  the  Lord.”  Early  in  the  public  ministry  of 
John  the  Baptist,  we  read  that  the  belief  prevailed  among  his 
hearers  that  this  prophecy  was  fulfilled  in  him.  But  when 
directly  asked,  “Art  thou  Elias?”  he  replied,  “ I am  not.  Art 
thou  that  prophet?  And  he  answered,  No.”  He  had  no 
memory  of  his  former  life  under  that  name ; and  tho  he 
must  have  been  aware  of  the  popular  belief  upon  the  subject, 
and  of  the  many  points  of  similarity  between  his  own  career 
and  that  of  the  great  restorer  of  the  worship  of  the  true  God  at 
an  earlier  period,  he  was  too  honest  to  claim  an  authority  which 
he  did  not  positively  know  to'  belong  to  him. 

Yet  we  learn  that  our  Lord  subsequently  twice  declared,  in 
very  distinct  language,  that  Elijah  and  John  the  Baptist  were 
really  one  and  the  same  person.  Once,  while  John  was  still 
alive  but  in  prison,  Jesus  told  the  multitude  who  thronged 
around  him,  “ Among  them  that  are  born  of  women  there  hath 
not  risen  a greater  than  John  the  Baptist and  he  directly  goes 
on  to  assert,  “ if  ye  will  receive  it,  this  is  Elias,  which  was  for  to 
come”  (Matt.  xi.  14).  And  again,  after  John  was  beheaded, 
Jesus  said  to  his  disciples,  “ Elias  is  come  already  and  they  knew 
him  not,  but  have  done  unto  him  whatsoever  they  listed.” 
“ Then  the  disciples  understood  that  he  spake  unto  them  of 
John  the  Baptist.”  (Matt.  xvii.  12,  13.)  Still  again,  in  the  scene 
on  the  mount  of  Transfiguration,  “ behold  there  talked  with  him 
two  men,  which  were  Moses  and  Elias;”  and  it  is  said  of  the 
three  disciples  who  were  then  in  company  with  Jesus  that, 
“ when  they  were  awake,  they  saw  his  glory  and  the  two  men 
that  stood  with  him.”  (Luke  ix.  30,  32.)  That  the  commenta- 
tors have  not  been  willing  to  receive,  in  their  obvious  and  literal 
meaning,  assertions  so  direct  and  so  frequently  repeated  as 
these,  but  have  attempted  to  explain  them  away  in  a non-natu- 
ral and  metaphorical  sense,  is  a fact  which  proves  nothing  but 
the  existence  of  an  invincible  prejudice  against  the  doctrine  of 
the  transmigration  of  souls. 

This  prejudice  is  largely  attributable,  as  it  seems  to  me,  to  a 
corrupt  admixture  of  the  proper  doctrine  with  oriental  fables 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


333 


respecting  the  interchange  of  souls  between  human  beings  and 
the  brute  creation.  But  in  the  sixth  book  of  Virgil,  where  the 
dogma  is  probably  stated  in  the  form  in  which  it  was  accepted, 
if  at  all,  by  cultivated  minds  among  the  Greeks  and  Romans 
about  the  time  of  our  Lord’s  ministry,  this  idle  and  offensive 
corruption  of  it  does  not  appear.  Certainly  I do  not  accept  the 
hypothesis  of  the  transmigration  of  souls  between  men  and  the 
lower  animals,  because  I do  not  believe  that  these  animals  have 
any  souls  to  migrate.  This  wild  Indian  fable  may  be  left  to  the 
credulity  of  our  modern  evolutionists,  who  can  believe  that  birds 
are  generated  from  fishes,  and  that  man  was  born  of  a monkey. 
The  gulf  between  the  mental  constitution  of  the  highest  brutes 
— anthropoid  apes,  for  instance — and  a human  soul,  capable  even 
in  its  lowest  state  of  progress,  language,  free  will,  morality,  and 
religion,  is  so  broad  and  deep  that  those  who  believe  it  can  be 
bridged  over  had  better  not  talk  about  the  incredibility  of  mir- 
acles. The  only  high  endowment  of  merely  animal  life,  that  of 
instinct,  is,  as  I have  elsewhere  argued,  not  a free  and  conscious 
power  of  the  subject  in  which  it  appears  and  works.  It  is,  so  to 
speak,  a foreign  agency,  which  enters  not  into  the  individuality 
of  the  brute.  The  animal  appears  subject  to  it,  controlled  and 
guided  by  it,  but  not  to  possess  and  apply  it  for  its  own  chosen 
purposes.  In  its  highest  functions  the  brute  appears  only  as  the 
blind  and  passive  instrument  of  a will  which  is  not  its  own. 

“ And  Reason  raise  o’er  Instinct  as  you  can, 

In  this  ’tis  God  directs,  in  that  ’tis  man.” 

The  power  thus  granted  to  it  for  a time  cannot  be  improved  by 
practice,  is  invariably  applied  in  the  same  way  and  with  perfect 
success,  and  disappears  when  it  is  no  longer  needed.  No  moral 
character  is  attributable  to  a faculty  which  is  thus  unconsciously 
exerted,  and  no  moral  aim  can  exist  where  progress  or  change 
is  impossible.  When  deprived  of  this  extraneous  power,  or 
viewed  apart  from  it,  the  brute  appears  in  its  true  light  as  the 
creature  of  a day,  born  for  purposes  not  connected  with  its  own 
being,  but  as  an  humble  instrument  or  means  in  the  great  circle 
of  animated  nature,  which,  as  a whole,  is  subservient  to  higher 
ends.  In  the  General  Scholium  to  his  “ Optics,”  Sir  Isaac  New- 
ton rightly  says,  “ The  instinct  of  brutes  and  insects  can  be 


334 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


nothing  else  than  the  wisdom  and  skill  of  a powerful  ever-living 
Agent,  who,  being  in  all  places,  is  more  able  by  his  will  to  move 
all  bodies,  and  thereby  to  form  and  reform  the  parts  of  the  uni- 
verse, than  we  are  by  our  will  to  move  the  parts  of  our  bodies.” 
There  is  ample  room  and  verge  enough  for  the  action  of 
metempsychosis  within  the  limits  of  the  human  race,  excluding 
the  brute  animal  kingdom  altogether.  The  interval  between  a 
Newton  and  an  Australian  savage,  between  a St.  Louis  and  an 
Attila  or  a Genkhis  Khan,  is  vast  enough  to  afford  scope  for 
indefinite  moral  advancement  or  degradation,  even  if  the  history 
of  the  world  thus  far  showed  all  that  either  holiness  or  wicked- 
ness in  a human- shape  is  capable  of ; and,  always  excepting  on 
the  former  side  Him  who  was  both  human  and  divine,  there  is 
not  the  least  reason  to  believe  that  the  limits  of  what  is  possi- 
ble for  human  nature  either  way  have  yet  been  reached.  Assum- 
ing the  doctrine  to  be  well  founded,  it  is  for  every  person  to 
determine  with  what  character  he  will  leave  the  world  at  the 
close  of  one  stage  of  his  earthly  being,  believing  that  with  this 
same  character  thus  trained  for  weal  or  woe  he  is  inevitably  at 
once  to  begin  a new  life,  and  thus  either  to  rise  or  fall  farther 
than  ever.  It  seems  to  me  that  the  dogma  of  a future  life,  so 
prolonged  through  a countless  succession  of  other  lives  on  earth 
until  it  becomes  an  immortality,  is  thus  brought  home  to  one 
with  a force,  a vividness  and  certainty,  of  which  in  no  other  form 
is  it  susceptible.  It  has  been  said  that  no  prudent  man,  if  the 
election  were  offered  to  him,  would  chocse  to  live  his  present  life 
over  again  ; and  as  he  whom  the  world  calls  prudent  does  not 
usually  cherish  any  lofty  aspirations,  the  saying  is  probably  true. 
We  are  all  so  conscious  of  the  many  errors  and  sins  that  we 
have  committed  that  the  retrospect  is  a saddening  one;  and 
worldly  wisdom  would  probably  whisper,  “It  is  best  to  stop 
here,  and  not  try  such  a career  over  again.”  But  every  one 
would  ardently  desire  a renewal  of  his  earthly  experience  if  as- 
sured that  he  could  enter  upon  it  under  better  auspices,  if  he 
believed  that  what  we  call  death  is  not  the  end  of  all  things  even 
here  below,  but  that  the  soul  is  then  standing  upon  the  thresh- 
old of  a new  stage  of  earthly  existence,  which  is  to  be  brighter 
or  darker  than  the  one  it  is  just  quitting  according  as  there  is 
carried  forward  into  it  a higher  or  lower  purpose,  a purer  or 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


335 


more  corrupt  nature,  than  the  one  it  began  with  perhaps  half  or 
three  quarters  of  a century  ago.  As  applied  to  describe  our 
condition  in  a future  life  thus  understood,  the  much-abused 
words,  heaven  and  hell,  would  have  a more  obvious  and  intelli- 
gible sense,  a meaning  less  exposed  to  captious  objections  and 
scoffs,  than  could  be  given  to  them  on  any  other  interpretation. 
We  should  thus  understand  the  full  purport  of  our  Saviour’s 
solemn  declaration  that  they  do  not  mean  any  particular  place, 
but  only  a state  of  mind : “ They  shall  not  say,  Lo  here ! or,  lo 
there!  for,  behold,  the  kingdom  of  God  is  within  you.”  We 
could  then  apply  to  the  whole  succession  of  lives  of  any  indi- 
vidual soul  what  Lacordaire  finely  says  of  any  one  life,  that  it 
may  be  made  a series  of  metempsychoses  or  transfigurations 
which  constantly  lead  the  soul  nearer  to  God. 

This  doctrine  also  suggests,  as  it  seems  to  me,  a clearer  and 
more  satisfactory  explanation  than  would  otherwise  be  possible 
of  the  fall  of  man  through  disobedience  and  its  consequences, 
as  narrated  in  Genesis  and  interpreted  by  St.  Paul.  Certainly 
the  primeval  man,  the  Adam  of  each  one  of  us,  when  he  first 
through  the  inspiration  of  Deity  “ became  a living  soul,”  was 
born  into  a paradise,  an  Eden,  of  entire  purity  and  innocence, 
and  in  that  state  he  talked  directly  with  God.  There  was  also 
given  to  him  through  his  conscience  the  revelation  of  a divine 
law,  an  absolute  command,  to  preserve  this  blessed  state  through 
restraining  his  appetites  and  lower  impulses  to  action,  and  mak- 
ing the  love  of  holiness  superior  even  to  the  love  of  knowledge. 
But  man  was  tempted  by  his  appetites  to  transgress  this  law ; 
he  aspired  after  a knowledge  of  good  and  evil,  which  can  be  at- 
tained only  through  experience  of  evil,  and  he  thereby  fell  from 
innocence  into  a state  of  sin,  which  necessarily  corrupted  his 
whole  future  being.  The  habit  of  disobedience  once  formed, 
sin  in  the  same  person  has  a self-continuing  and  self-multiplying 
power.  The  stain  carried  down  from  a former  life  becomes 
darker  and  more  inveterate  in  the  life  that  follows.  We  have 
no  reason  to  complain  of  the  corruption  of  human  nature,  for 
the  world  is  what  we  have  made  it  to  be  by  our  own  act.  The 
burden  has  not  been  transmitted  to  us  by  others,  but  has  been 
inherited  from  ourselves ; that  is,  from  our  former  selves.  Re- 
demption from  it  by  man’s  own  effort  thus  became  impossible. 


336 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


This  is  death,  moral  death,  the  only  death  of  which  a human 
soul  is  capable.  It  is  so  called  in  the  parable,  where  the  father, 
speaking  of  the  prodigal  son’s  return,  says  of  him,  “ For  this  thy 
brother  was  dead,  and  is  alive  again  ; was  lost,  and  is  found.” 
Salvation  became  possible  only  through  the  Incarnation,  by  a 
new  creation,  by  the  appearance  of  a sinless  and  divine  nature 
in  a human  form,  reconciling  the  world  unto  God.  And  this 
appears  to  be  the  full  meaning  of  St.  Paul’s  language:  “For 
since  by  man  came  death,  by  man  came  also  the  resurrection  of 
the  dead.  For  as  in  Adam  all  die,  even  so  in  Christ  shall  all  be 
made  alive.” 

Thus  far  we  have  considered  metempsychosis  as  a means  of 
retribution  ; that  is,  of  awarding  to  each  soul  in  the  next  future 
life  upon  which  it  is  entering  that  compensation  either  of  weal 
or  woe  which  it  has  earned  for  itself — has  in  fact  necessarily 
entailed  upon  itself  by  its  conduct  in  the  life  which  it  has  just 
completed.  But  the  transmigration  of  souls  may  be  regarded 
also  in  another  light,  as  that  portion  of  the  divine  government 
of  this  world’s  affairs  which  maintains  distributive  justice,  since, 
through  its  agency,  in  the  long-run,  all  inequalities  of  condition 
and  favoring  or  unfavoring  circumstances  may  be  compensated, 
and  each  person  may  have  his  or  her  equitable  share  of  oppor- 
tunities for  good  and  of  the  requisite  means  for  discipline  and 
improvement.  If  our  view  be  confined  within  the  limits  of  a 
single  earthly  life,  it  must  be  confessed  that  the  inequality  is  glar- 
ing enough,  so  that  it  seems  to  justify  the  honest  doubts  of  the 
trembling  inquirer,  while  it  has  offered  a broad  mark  for  the 
scoffs  and  declamation  of  the  confirmed  unbeliever.  Dives  and 
Lazarus  form  a contrast  that  is  almost  constantly  before  our 
eyes.  It  is  a long  way  from  a poor  laborer’s  hut  to  a throne, 
and  a still  longer  one  from  a birthplace  in  one  of  the  sinks  of 
misery  and  crime  which  pollute  our  great  cities  to  the  affection- 
ate nurture  of  a comfortable  Christian  household.  One  saint 
must  encounter  martyrdom,  while  another,  in  a different  age 
and  country,  seems  to  find  the  road  to  heaven  comparatively 
straight  and  easy.  There  are  some  situations  so  degraded  and 
miserable  that  they  seem  almost  to  take  away  the  guilt  of  trans- 
gression by  rendering  goodness  practically  unattainable,  while 
those  who  occupy  them  are  hardly  fit  subjects  either  of  praise 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


33  7 


or  censure.  An  Australian  savage  or  a native  New  Zealander, 
as  he  u'as  a century  ago,  could  not  have  become  by  death  a 
proper  candidate  for  either  the  happiness  or  the  misery  of  a 
spiritual  immortality  begun  then  and  there.  And  yet  one  is  re- 
luctant to  classify  him  with  the  brutes  that  perish  ; for,  savage  as 
he  was,  he  was  still  man,  having  in  him  the  germs  of  a moral  and 
religious  nature,  which  proper  Christian  culture  could  develop. 

Now  the  parable  gives  us  a simple  and  effective  solution  of 
these  difficulties  by  merely  suggesting  that  the  immediately 
future  life  is  also,  like  the  present  one,  to  be  spent  on  this  earth, 
only  the  position  of  the  two  characters  in  it  being  reversed  ; and 
a belief  in  such  transposition  would  be  always  a desirable  warn- 
ing for  Dives  and  a needed  comfort  for  Lazarus.  In  this  way, 
as  it  seems  to  me,  a firm  and  well-grounded  faith  in  the  doctrine 
of  Christian  metempsychosis  might  help  to  regenerate  the  world. 
For  it  would  be  a faith  not  hedged  round  with  many  of  the  diffi- 
culties and  objections  which  beset  other  forms  of  doctrine,  and 
it  offers  distinct  and  pungent  motives  for  trying  to  lead  a more 
Christian  life,  and  for  loving  and  helping  our  brother-man. 
“ And  this  also  shall  pass  away’  was  the  motto  which  a wise 
king  had  engraved  on  his  signet,  to  temper  alike  his  grief  in 
adverse  fortune  and  his  exultation  in  prosperity.  Even  the  old 
heathen  poet,  an  avowed  Epicurean,  gives  the  same  advice. 

“ j^quam  memento  rebus  in  arduis 
Servare  mentem,  non  secus  in  bonis 
Ab  insolenti  temperatam 
Lsetitia,  vioriture  Delli.” 

But  no  hog  from  Epicurus’  sty  ever  put  such  counsel  into  the 
impressive  form  in  which  it  is  enforced  in  the  parable.  Nothing 
can  teach  so  forcibly  the  essential  brotherhood  of  all  men  as  a 
belief  that  we  are  soon  to  experience  in  our  own  person  all  the 
varieties  of  condition  to  which  human  nature  is  subject ; that 
the  rich  and  the  poor,  the  savage  and  the  civilized  man,  the 
monarch  and  the  peasant,  are  soon  to  change  places  with  each 
other.  We  should  thus  learn  to  repeat  with  more  earnestness 
than  ever  the  Christian  prayer, 

. “ The  mercy  I to  others  show, 

That  mercy  show  to  me.” 


338 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


For  the  probation  which  is  to  fit  us  for  eternity  must  be  com- 
prehensive enough  to  leave  no  form  of  being  untried,  no  tempta- 
tion that  has  not  been  resisted,  no  trial  that  has  not  been  borne, 
no  opportunity  for  the  exercise  of  pity,  trust,  and  love  left  un- 
improved. Herein  is  no  distinction  of  persons,  and  no  one  has 
any  advantage  over  another,  since  all  must  complete  the  same 
long  journey,  and  each  must  have  essentially  the  same  experi- 
ence while  on  the  road. 

The  doctrine  is  full  of  solemn  warning  then,  but  it  is  also 
full  of  consolation.  For  it  teaches  that  the  friends  who  have 
been  separated  from  us  by  what  we  call  death  have  only  passed 
out  of  our  limited  field  of  sight,  but  are  still  in  the  body  and 
really  near  us,  are  still  tenanting  the  earth  like  ourselves,  tho 
in  forms  which  we  cannot  recognize.  Intercession  for  the  so- 
called  dead,  therefore,  ceases  to  appear  out  of  place  or  in  any 
way  objectionable;  for  they  are  not  only  still  living,  but  living 
in  a probationary  state,  exposed  to  trial,  temptation,  and  suf- 
fering just  as  we  are,  and  therefore  as  proper  subjects  for  inter- 
cessory prayer  as  they  were  before  they  changed  their  name  and 
dwelling-place.  The  intermediate  state,  considered  as  a series 
of  existences  of  the  same  soul  in  a succession  of  earthly  bodies, 
is  a sort  of  purgatory,  by  passing  through  which  the  soul  may, 
if  it  will , be  purified  from  the  stains  of  sin  and  regain  its  primi- 
tive Eden,  its  state  of  purity  and  innocence.  If  the  fervent 
prayer  of  a righteous  man  availeth  much,  I cannot  see  why  it 
should  not  aid  in  completing  this  happy  work. 

This  hypothesis — and  I do  not  claim  for  it  any  other  charac- 
ter than  that  of  a highly  probable  and  consolatory  hypothesis — 
also  throws  a new  and  welcome  light  upon  the  deep  and  dark 
problem  of  the  origin  of  evil.  In  the  first  place,  according  to 
the  views  which  have  now  been  taken,  the  sufferings  which  are 
the  immediate  consequence  and  punishment  of  sin  are  properly 
left  out  of  the  account,  since  these  evince  the  goodness  of  God 
no  less  than  the  happiness  resulting  from  virtue,  the  purpose  in 
both  cases  being  to  advance  man’s  highest  interests  by  the  im- 
provement of  his  moral  character;  just  as  the  affectionate  parent 
rewards  the  obedience  and  punishes  the  faults  of  his  child,  love 
equally  constraining  him  to  adopt  either  course.  And  how  many 
of  the  evils  borne  both  by  individuals  and  by  communities  are 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


339 


attributable  directly  to  their  own  misconduct,  to  their  wilful  dis- 
regard of  the  monitions  of  conscience!  The  body  which  is  now 
languid  from  inaction  through  sloth,  and  enfeebled  or  racked  by 
disease,  might  have  been  active,  vigorous,  and  sound,  prompt  to 
second  every  wish  of  its  owner,  and  ministering  to  his  enjoy- 
ment through  every  sense  and  limb.  And  could  we  know  all, 
could  we  extend  our  vision  over  the  whole  history  of  our  former 
self,  how  would  our  estimate  of  this  purely  retributive  character 
of  our  present  suffering  be  enlarged  and  confirmed  ! It  would 
then  be  evident  that  no  portion  of  it  is  gratuitous  or  purpose- 
less. And  the  community  which  is  now  torn  with  civil  dissen- 
sion, desolated  by  war,  or  prostrated  in  an  unequal  strife  with 
its  rivals,  might  have*  been  peaceful,  affluent,  and  flourishing,  if 
rulers  and  ruled  had  heeded  the  stern  calls  of  duty,  instead  of 
blindly  following  their  own  tumultuous  passions.  And  as  na- 
tions, too,  have  a continuous  life,  like  that  of  a river,  through  a 
constant  change  of  their  constituent  parts,  many  of  their  woes 
are  clearly  attributable  to  the  misdeeds  of  their  former  selves. 
Once  admit  the  great  truth,  that  virtue,  not  happiness,  is  man’s 
highest  interest,  and  most  of  the  pains  of  this  life  indicate  the 
goodness  and  justice  of  God  quite  as  much  as  its  pleasures. 

But  according  to  the  theory  which  we  are  now  considering,  a 
still  larger  deduction  must  be  made  from  the  amount  of  apparent 
evil  at  any  one  time  visible  in  the  world.  All  the  inequalities  in 
the  lot  of  mankind,  which  have  prompted  what  are  perhaps  the 
bitterest  of  all  complaints,  and  have  served  sceptics  like  Hume 
and  J.  S.  Mill  as  a reason  for  the  darkest  imputations  upon 
divine  justice  in  the  government  of  the  world,  disappear  from 
the  picture  altogether.  Excepting  only,  what  we  have  just  con- 
sidered, the  retributive  consequences  of  more  or  less  sin,  there 
are  no  inequalities.  All  start  from  the  same  point,  and  journey 
through  the  same  vicissitudes  of  existence,  exhausting  sooner  or 
later  all  varieties  of  condition.  Prince  and  peasant,  bond  and 
free,  barbarian  and  cultured,  all  share  alike  whatever  weal  or 
woe  there  is  in  the  world,  because  all  must  at  some  future  time 
change  places  with  each  other.  But  after  these  two  large  de- 
ductions from  the  amount  complained  of,  what  remains?  Very 
little,  certainly,  which  we  cannot  even  now  see  through;  that 
is,  which  we  cannot  assign  an  adequate  reason  for;  and  to  the 


340 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


eye  of  faith  nothing  remains.  The  world  becomes  a mirror 
which  reflects  without  blot  or  shadow  the  infinite  goodness  of 
its  Creator  and  Governor.  Death  remains ; but  that  is  no  evil, 
for  what  v/e  call  death  is  only  the  introduction  to  another  life 
on  earth,  and  if  this  be  not  a higher  and  better  life  than  the  one 
just  ended,  it  is  our  own  fault.  Our  life  is  really  continuous,  and 
the  fact  that  the  subsequent  stages  of  it  lie  beyond  our  present 
range  of  immediate  vision  is  of  no  more  importance,  and  no 
more  an  evil,  than  the  corresponding  fact  that  we  do  not  now 
remember  our  previous  existence  in  antecedent  ages.  Death 
alone,  or  in  itself  considered,  apart  from  the  antecedent  dread 
of  it,  which  is  irrational,  and  apart  from  the  injury  to  the  feelings 
of  the  survivors,  which  is  a necessary  consequence  of  that  attach- 
ment to  each  other  from  which  so  much  of  our  happiness 
springs,  is  not  even  an  apparent  evil;  it  is  mere  change  and 
development,  like  the  passage  from  the  embryonic  to  the  adult 
condition,  from  the  blossom  to  the  fruit. 

Only  one  question  remains,  and  it  may  be  very  briefly  men- 
tioned, as  a full  discussion  of  it  evidently  transcends  the  limited 
powers  of  a finite  mind.  This  series  of  successive  lives  on  earth, 
is  it  to  be  endless,  or  will  it  culminate  at  last  in  some  grand 
manifestation  of  infinite  justice  and  mercy  combined?  The 
answer  in  general  terms  cannot  be  a matter  of  doubt ; for  the 
scientific  reason  confirms  what  revelation  also  teaches,  that  this 
world  had  a beginning,  and  that  it  must  also  have  an  end.  It  is 
not  more  certain  that  “ in  the  beginning,  God  created  the  heavens 
and  the  earth,”  than  it  is  that  the  period  will  come  when  the 
present  succession  of  days  and  nights  will  cease,  and,  the  grand 
term  assigned  for  probation  being  closed,  all  mankind  must 
appear  to  meet  their  Judge.  This  is  what  John  foresaw  in  the 
apocalyptic  vision,  when  he  beheld  the  angel  stand  upon  the  sea 
and  upon  the  earth,  who  “ lifted  up  his  hand  to  heaven,  and 
sware  by  Him  that  liveth  for  ever  and  ever  that  there  should  be 
time  no  longer.” 

We  may  even  reverently  conjecture  what  the  nature  of  the 
account  will  be  which  each  one  must  then  render  of  all  that  he 
has  thought  or  done  during  the  whole  period  of  his  probation  in 
the  body.  Most  persons -are  acquainted  with  the  facts,  for  they 
are  numerous  and  well  authenticated,  which  go  to  prove  that  the 


CHRISTIAN  METEMPSYCHOSIS. 


341 


latent  and  undeveloped  powers  of  memory  are  vastly  greater 
than  those  which  are  consciously  under  our  control  at  any  one 
time  under  ordinary  circumstances ; and  that  abnormal  mental 
excitement,  such  as  often  results  from  high  fever,  delirium,  or 
the  passion  and  ecstasy  of  imminent  and  sudden  death,  may 
bring  out  into  luminous  consciousness  all  those  stores  of  recol- 
lection which  had  thus  been  buried  for  many  years.  Leibnitz 
first  directed  attention  to  these  singular  phenomena;  Coleridge 
cited  from  the  German  a remarkable  case  in  point ; and  Sir  W. 
Hamilton  has  collected  a number  of  instances  of  such  wonderful 
revival  of  memory.  Whole  languages,  acquired  in  early  child- 
hood, but  wholly  forgotten  in  maturer  years,  have  thus  been 
recovered.  Most  old  men,  I suppose,  have  been  perplexed  at 
times  by  flashes  and  gleams  from  the  memory  thus  occasionally 
stimulated  into  new  life  and  vigor.  The  conclusion  to  be  drawn 
from  such  phenomena  is  obvious  enough,  and  cannot  be  better 
stated  than  by  Coleridge,  in  his  “ Biographia  Literaria,”  chap,  vi.: 

“ As  we  cannot  rationally  suppose  the  feverish  state  of  the  brain  to  act 
in  any  other  way  than  as  a stimulus,  this  fact  (and  it  would  not  be  difficult 
to  adduce  several  of  the  same  kind)  contributes  to  make  it  even  probable 
that  all  thoughts  are  in  themselves  imperishable;  and  that,  if  the  intelli- 
gent faculty  should  be  rendered  more  comprehensive,  it  would  require  only 
a different  and  apportioned  organization,  the  body  celestial  instead  of  the 
body  terrestrial,  to  bring  before  every  human  soul  the  collective  experience 
of  its  whole  past  existence.  And  this — this,  perchance,  is  the  dread  Book 
of  Judgment,  in  whose  mysterious  hieroglyphics  every  idle  word  is  re- 
corded ! Yea,  in  the  very  nature  of  a living  spirit,  it  may  be  more  possible 
that  heaven  and  earth  should  pass  away  than  that  a single  act,  a single 
thought,  should  be  loosened  or  lost  from  that  living  chain  of  causes  to  all 
whose  links,  conscious  or  unconscious,  the  free  will,  our  only  absolute  Self, 
is  coextensive  and  co-present.” 

Francis  Bowen. 


23 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION  AND  THE  INTERNATION- 
AL MONETARY  CONFERENCE  OF  1881. 


S these  lines  are  in  writing,  the  delegates  to  the  Third  In- 


ternational Monetary  Conference  are  on  their  way  to  their 
place  of  meeting.  Before  the  words  here  written  can  be  printed 
the  deliberations  of  that  body  will  probably  have  been  brought 
to  a close,  and  their  conclusions  will  have  become  more  or  less 
distinctly  known  to  the  world.  Nothing  which  can  now  be  said 
can  have  any  influence  in  affecting  those  conclusions ; but  as, 
whotever  they  may  be,  it  is  entirely  too  much  to  expect  that 
they  will  give  universal  satisfaction,  the  subject  will  continue 
long  to  be  discussed,  and  the  public  will  be  interested  in  the 
discussion. 

It  is  a fact  worthy  of  mention  here  that  the  motive  which  led 
to  the  call  of  the  earliest  of  these  international  councils  was  very 
different  from  that  which  has  prompted  the  later.  Before  1867  the 
exciting  controversy  which  has  in  more  recent  years  been  styled 
the  “ battle  of  the  standards”  had  not  begun.  It  was  in  that  as- 
sembly indeed,  and  while  its  deliberations  were  in  progress,  that 
the  war  first  regularly  opened.  The  motive  of  the  convention 
itself,  however,  was  the  hope  of  advancing,  through  its  instru- 
mentality, the  progress  of  a movement  which,  with  steadily 
growing  activity  and  success,  had  been  already  going  forward 
for  about  three  quarters  of  a century,  having  an  object  no  less 
important  than  the  establishment  among  all  nations  of  a perfect 
uniformity  in  the  chief  instrumentalities  of  commercial  inter- 
course, the  weights,  measures,  and  moneys  of  the  world.  The 
almost  endless  diversity  which  from  the  earliest  times  has  pre- 
vailed in  the  modes  of  estimating  the  quantities  and  values  of 
exchangeable  commodities  in  commerce  has  been  one  of  the 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


343 


most  serious  hindrances  in  the  way  of  that  intercourse  between 
nations  on  which  progress  in  civilization  is  so  largely  dependent. 

It  is  a curious  fact  that  the  conception  of  a scheme  so  preg- 
nant as  this,  with  consequences  of  incalculable  benefit  to  the 
human  race,  should  have  first  presented  itself  to  a European 
monarch  in  so  dark  a period  of  human  history  as  the  beginning 
of  the  fourteenth  century.  Philip  V.,  surnamed  le  long,  or  the 
Tall,  formed  the  project  of  establishing  complete  uniformity 
of  weights  and  measures  throughout  his  realm ; but  which, 
had  it  been  successfully  accomplished,  would  undoubtedly  have 
induced  similar  reforms  among  neighboring  peoples.  He  pro- 
jected also  a reform  of  the  monetary  system  of  France,  which 
failed  for  a similar  reason  ; but  if  he  effected  nothing  in  his  ef- 
forts to  improve  the  currency,  he  had  at  least  the  merit  of  leav- 
ing it  in  no  worse  condition  than  he  found  it — a remark  which 
can  hardly  be  made  with  truth  of  any  of  his  predecessors,  or  even 
of  his  successors  down  to  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  century. 
The  noble  disposition  of  this  young  monarch,  who  died  prema- 
turely in  his  28th  year,  may  be  inferred  from  the  reply  which  he 
made  to  certain  courtiers  and  pretended  friends,  when  urged  by 
them  to  crush  a supposed  enemy  : “ II  est  beau”  he  answered, 
“ de  pourvoir  se  venger , et  de  ne  le  pas  faire 1 

The  great  reform  so  early  projected  by  this  enlightened  ruler 
ceased  with  his  premature  death  to  occupy  the  minds  of  men  ; 
and  for  nearly  five  centuries  it  remained  in  the  state  of  an  ab- 
stract beau  ideal,  deemed  probably  incapable  of  a practical  reali- 
zation. At  length,  however,  in  the  year  1790,  it  was  energetically 
revived  by  a man  destined  to  bear  a conspicuous  part  in  his  coun- 
try’s history,  the  famous  and  sagacious  Talleyrand,  who  in  the 
year  just  named  laid  before  the  constituent  assembly  of  France  a 
proposition  to  invite  the  concurrence  of  the  leading  European 
nations  in  a scherrre  for  the  construction,  on  scientific  principles, 
of  a system  of  weights  and  measures  for  the  common  use  of  all 
mankind.  The  scheme  so  constructed  it  was  proposed  to  sub- 
stitute in  place  of  all  the  endlessly  numerous,  discordant,  and 
illogical  systems  then  actually  existing.  The  plan  was  favorably 
received,  and  in  the  first  measures  taken  toward  its  prosecution 


Biographie  Universelle,  tom.  34,  art.  “ Philippe  le  long. 


344 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


France  had  the  co-operation  of  Spain,  Italy,  Switzerland,  the 
Netherlands,  and  Denmark.  In  the  subsequent  commission  ap- 
pointed to  meet,  and  which  in  1799  at  length  actually  met,  to 
settle  the  exact  length  of  the  unit-base  of  the  system,  derived 
from  the  great  meridian  survey  which  had  occupied  the  interven- 
ing years,  there  were  present  the  representatives  of  ten  dif- 
ferent governments. 

Altho  the  original  creation  of  a system  involving,  like  the 
metric,  for  the  determination  of  its  first  element,  a great  geodetic 
operation,  extending  through  the  third  part  of  the  lifetime  of  a 
generation,  was  in  itself  a work  of  vast  magnitude,  the  introduc- 
tion of  the  system  into  actual  use  after  it  had  been  perfected 
was  an  undertaking  still  more  formidable.  The  first  was  an  en- 
terprise falling  within  the  domain  of  exact  science,  and  its  suc- 
cessful accomplishment  involved  no  question  but  that  of  time  ; 
the  other  was  the  task  of  statesmen  who'  have  to  do  with  the 
whims  and  prejudices  of  men,  and  who  often  find  their  most 
earnest  efforts  for  the  public  welfare  frustrated  by  coming  into 
collision  with  prescriptive  usages  and  with  the  long-established 
habits  of  the  many.  Thus  the  metric  system,  real  and  immeas- 
urable as  are  the  advantages  which,  from  the  simplicity  of  its 
theory  and  the  facility  it  introduces  into  calculations,  it  offers 
over  every  other  for  the  transaction  of  the  business  of  life,  did 
not  find  immediate  acceptance  even  in  France  ; and  it  made  its 
way  still  more  slowly  among  neighboring  peoples.  About  the 
middle  of  the  present  century,  however,  it  had  been  legally  and 
practically  established  not  only  in  France  and  her  colonies,  but 
also  in  Spain,  Portugal,  Switzerland,  Denmark,  Greece,  and  some 
of  the  South  American  republics;  and  from  that  time  onward 
adhesions  were  frequent  on  the  part  of  other  European  powers. 
Among  these  there  were,  in  Germany,  Wtirtemberg,  Bavaria, 
Baden,  and  Hesse,  and,  in  Italy,  Piedmont,  Parma,  Modena,  the 
Pontifical  States,  and  Naples.  The  system  was  also  adopted  on 
this  continent  by  Mexico  in  1856,  and  it  extended  itself  gradu- 
ally throughout  the  greater  part  of  Central  and  Southern  Ameri- 
ca, having  been  legalized  in  Brazil  in  1862.  This  so  rapid  progress 
of  a reform  so  important,  a reform  which  has  since  extended 
itself  to  embrace  the  entire  civilized  world  with  the  exception  of 
Russia  and  the  English-speaking  peoples,  stimulated  a very  gen- 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


345 


eral  desire  to  see  the  same  degree  of  uniformity  prevailing  among 
the  nations  as  to  their  means  of  estimating  values  which  had 
already  become  so  nearly  universal  in  their  modes  of  measuring 
quantity.  A striking  evidence  of  the  prevalence  of  this  feeling 
was  seen  in  the  proceedings  of  the  Fifth  International  Statistical 
Congress  held  in  Berlin  in  1863.  The  object  of  these  congresses, 
of  which  there  have  been  held  nine  up  to  this  time,  has  been  to 
insure  a thorough  exploration  of  all  the  sources  of  national 
wealth  and  national  strength  throughout  the  world,  as  a basis  on 
which  to  found  enlightened  legislation,  and  as  a guide  to  direct 
the  councils  of  international  diplomacy.  The  nature  of  its 
avowed  design  rendered  it  necessary  that  this  body,  gathering 
its  material  indifferently  from  all  lands,  should  adopt  some  com- 
mon mode  of  estimating  quantities ; and  it  seemed  almost 
equally  necessary  that  there  should  be  also  employed  some  single 
system  of  estimating  and  computing  values.  It  cost,  of  course, 
no  long  deliberation  to  arrive  at  the  conclusion  that  for  quanti- 
ties the  metric  system  of  weights  and  measures  should  be  used 
in  all  the  proceedings  of  the  congress  and  in  all  its  published 
documents  ; but  the  money  question  was  not  so  easily  settled. 
The  question  of  standard  metals  was  not  raised  ; but  a very  lively 
debate  arose  as  to  the  proper  unit  of  value.  The  pound  ster- 
ling, the  dollar,  the  florin,  and  the  franc  (the  marc  had  not  yet 
been  created),  all  had  their  advocates  ; but  neither  party  could 
command  a majority  of  voices,  and  the  congress  arrived  at  last 
at  the  impotent  conclusion  that  it  would  be  advisable  to  conserve 
all  these  types. 

Thus  the  congress  could  not  agree  upon  a type  ; but  the  out- 
side world  who  interested  themselves  in  this  matter  were  not  on 
that  account  discouraged.  On  the  contrary,  there  spread  itself 
every  day  more  and  more  widely  a feeling  that  this  object  was 
one  which  was  not  only  capable  of  being  accomplished,  but 
which  ought  to  be  accomplished,  and  which  another  conference 
called  expressly  ad  hoc  could  not  fail  to  accomplish.  And  out 
of  this  feeling  grew  the  International  Monetary  Conference  of 
1867.  It  was  expressly  called  to  devise  a scheme  for  the  prac- 
tical unification  of  the  money  and  coinage  of  all  nations.  At  the 
opening  of  the  session  this  object  was  distinctly  announced  by 
the  president. 


346 


TIIE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


The  main  question  before  this  body  was  of  course  the  ques- 
tion of  an  international  monetary  unit ; but  the  discussion  of 
this  brought  into  immediate  and  unavoidable  prominence  the 
associated  question,  In  what  metal  shall  the  representative  of 
the  common  unit  be  struck?  This  question  proved  to  be  so 
absorbing  in  the  interest  it  awakened  that  it  occupied  the  atten- 
tion of  the  conference  for  several  days,  to  the  exclusion  of  every- 
thing else.  Three  distinct  propositions  were  presented  for  con- 
sideration : i.  To  adopt  the  single  standard  of  silver.  This  was 
rejected  with  entire  unanimity,  altho  one  half  of  the  dele- 
gates voting  were  representatives  of  countries  in  which  silver 
was  at  the  time  the  standard  actually  existing.  2.  To  adopt  the 
single  standard  of  gold.  In  the  discussion  of  this  question,  the 
entire  argument  in  favor  of  the  only  remaining  alternative,  viz., 
the  double  standard  of  both  gold  and  silver,  was  urged  with  per- 
sistence and  ability,  especially  by  Mr.  Wolowski,  representing 
France,  who  sustained  that  view  with  remarkable  zeal  and'  in- 
genuity. The  conference,  however,  in  the  end  approved  the 
single  gold  standard  by  a vote  which  lacked  but  a single  voice 
of  unanimity,  and  thus  practically  disposed  of  the  third  and 
only  remaining  alternative — the  double  standard — at  the  same 
time. 

The  question  of  the  standard  metal  was,  however,  only  sec- 
ondary to  the  main  object  for  which  the  conference  assembled, 
which  was  to  decide  on,  if  possible,  and  to  recommend  for  uni- 
versal and  exclusive  adoption,  a common  system  equally  of 
money  of  account  and  of  its  representative  coinage,  to  be  sub- 
stituted for  the  variety  of  systems  in  actual  use  among  the  na- 
tions. This  question  was  formulated  in  the  following  words, 
which  we  copy  from  the  supplementary  report  on  the  proceed- 
ings of  the  conference,  made  in  April,  1870,  to  the  Department 
of  State  of  the  United  States,  by  the  Hon.  Samuel  B.  Ruggles, 
delegate  to  the  conference: 

“ By  what  means  it  is  most  easy  to  realize  monetary  unity  : whether 
by  the  creation  of  a system  altogether  new  and  independent  of  existing 
systems,  or  by  the  mutual  co-ordination  of  existing  systems,  taking  into 
account  the  scientific  advantages  of  certain  types,  and  the  numbers  of  the 
populations  which  have  already  adopted  them  ?” 

The  first  of  the  alternatives  here  presented,  tho  advoca- 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


347 


ted  by  the  representatives  of  Holland  and  Belgium,  on  the 
ground  of  scientific  simplicity  and  because  it  would  avoid  all 
national  susceptibilities,  was  rejected  as  involving  insuperable 
difficulties,  not  the  least  of  which  would  be  the  necessary  re- 
coinage of  all  the  gold  in  circulation  throughout  the  world.  On 
the  other  hand,  in  considering  the  possible  co-ordination  of  ex- 
isting types,  the  national  type  of  France  had  in  its  favor  the 
consideration  that  the  amount  of  the  gold  coinage  represented 
by  it,  and  in  actual  circulation  in  the  states  of  the  Latin  Union, 
was  hardly  inferior,  according  to  the  best  estimates  obtainable 
at  the  time,  to  that  of  the  entire  gold  coinage  of  all  the  other 
nations  of  the  earth  put  together. 

This  consideration,  with  the  additional  one  that  the  franc  is 
nearly  the  fifth  part  of  the  dollar  of  the  United  States  and  the 
twenty-fifth  part  of  a pound  sterling  of  Great  Britain,  while  Aus- 
tria was  at  that  very  moment  negotiating  a monetary  treaty 
with  France  for  the  assimilation  of  the  coinage  systems  of  the  two 
countries  by  issuing  pieces  inscribed  io  florins , 25  francs , Rou- 
mania  had  actually  adopted  the  French  coinage,  and  Spain, 
Sweden,  and  Greece  had  given  evidence  of  their  readiness  to  do 
so,  operated  with  such  force  upon  the  minds  of  the  delegates 
as  to  bring  them  at  length  to  the  conclusion,  with  only  one  vote 
in  the  negative,  to  recommend  to  their  respective  governments 
that  they  should  adopt,  as  the  unit  of  the  proposed  international 
coinage,  the  weight  in  gold  nine  tenths  fine  of  the  existing  gold 
piece  of  five  francs. 

To  say  that  the  recommendations  of  this  conference  were 
without  influence  upon  subsequent  legislation  among  the  nations 
would  be  an  error ; altho  it  is  quite  certain  that  in  regard  to 
the  principal  end  for  which  it  was  called  together  the  confer- 
ence proved  a complete  failure.  Neither  Austria  nor  Sweden  ful- 
filled the  promise  held  out  by  those  governments  in  1 867  of  adopt- 
ing the  proposed  international  unit ; and  in  the  United  States,  tho 
the  effort  to  secure  this  result  was  pressed  with  great  energy, 
ability,  and  persistence,  the  impression  produced  was  so  greatly 
disproportioned  to  the  amount  of  zeal  displayed  as  to  overwhelm 
the  advocates  of  the  measure  with  discouragement. 

But  the  secondary  recommendation  of  the  conference,  favor- 
ing the  single  standard  of  gold  and  condemning  the  double 


34-8 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


standard,  did  not  prove  equally  fruitless.  This  was  no  doubt 
one  of  the  causes,  perhaps  not  the  least  weighty,  inducing  the 
government  of  the  German  Empire  to  abandon  the  silver  stand- 
ard which  had  prevailed  in  most  of  its  constituent  states  pre- 
viously to  the  union  in  1870,  and  to  adopt  the  gold  standard  in 
its  stead.  This  was  one  of  the  reasons,  but  not  the  only  one. 
Silver  bullion  was  at  the  time  at  a premium  in  the  double- 
standard nations,  where  the  legal  relation  of  value  between  the 
metals  was  as  1:15^;  and  gold  was  therefore  in  fact  the 
standard  in  France  and  throughout  the  Latin  Union,  no  less 
than  in  the  gold-standard  countries  of  Great  Britain  and  Portu- 
gal. The  statesmen  of  Germany,  accordingly,  very  naturally 
desired  to  put  themselves  upon  the  common  European  basis. 
Tho  the  mint  of  France  was  open  to  the  free  coinage  of  both 
metals  for  all  comers,  yet  silver  had  almost  ceased  to  be  offered 
for  coinage;  so  that  between  1856  and  1867  not  a single  full 
legal-tender  coin  of  silver  had  been  struck  in  that  country.  The 
small  coinage,  from  two-franc  pieces  downward,  had  only  been 
maintained  in  sufficient  quantity  for  the  ordinary  petty  traffic  of 
every-day  life,  by  the  issue  of  a debased  currency  of  limited 
amount  and  legal  tender  only  in  sums  not  exceeding  fifty  francs. 
In  adopting,  therefore,  for  the  imperial  coinage  a system  of  gold 
monometallism,  Germany  was  only  conforming  in  her  law  to  a 
state  of  things  which  actually  at  the  time  existed  all  around  her 
in  fact,  and  yielding  to  a tendency  which  seemed  to  be  carrying 
all  the  great  commercial  nations  in  the  same  direction. 

But  it  was  a necessary  consequence  of  this  action  of  hers  that 
she  had  no  longer  need  of  the  large  amount  of  silver  in  circula- 
tion among  her  people,  which  was  supposed  to  amount  to  not 
less  than  $400,000,000  in  value.  This,  after  1871,  she  commenced 
calling  in  ; and  a portion  of  the  old  coin  thus  obtained  she  re- 
coined to  serve  as  a subsidiary  currency.  The  law  regulating 
the  coinage  restricts  this  description  of  coin  to  an  amount  not 
exceeding  ten  marcs,  or  two  and  a half  dollars,  per  head  of  the 
population  ; and  thus  there  has  been  absorbed  something  over 
$100,000,000  of  the  stock  of  demonetized  silver.  The  re- 
mainder, as  called  in,  has  been  offered  by  parcels  for  sale  in  the 
bullion  markets  of  the  world.  A very  large  proportion  remains 
still  in  circulation  up  to  the  present  time,  and  about  $75,000,000 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


349 


are  said  to  be  now  lying  in  the  hands  of  the  government.  When 
this  action  of  the  German  Government  took  place,  several  cir- 
cumstances conspired  to  render  the  occasion  unpropitious  for 
so  heavy  a financial  operation. 

The  populous  empire  of  Russia  (double  standard)  and  that 
of  Austro-Hungary  (silver  standard),  having  suspended  specie 
payments,  the  first  in  1857  and  the  second  in  1868,  were  no 
longer  purchasers  of  either  metal;  and  Italy,  a double-standard 
nation,  which  had  suspended  in  1866,  was  coining  only  the 
limited  amount  which  her  relations  to  the  Latin  Union  per- 
mitted ; and  coining  that  not  so  much  for  use  at  home,  as  for 
circulation  in  the  territory  of  those  of  her  associates  of  the  union 
as  were  still  paying  specie. 

It  happened  also,  inopportunely,  at  the  same  time,  that  the 
amount  of  the  so-called  “ council-bills”  drawn  in  London  on 
India,  from  about  £4,000,000  in  1867-8,  had  been  annually  and 
rapidly  increasing,  till  in  1872-3  the  total  had  reached  the  enor- 
mous sum  of  £14,000,000,  or  $70,000,000.  Thus  the  outflow  of 
silver  from  Europe  toward  the  great  eastern  dependency  of  the 
British  Empire,  with  its  practically  unlimited  capacity  for  the 
absorption  of  that  metal,  was  for  the  time  being  checked  or  en- 
tirely arrested,  and  a market  for  the  silver  of  Germany  had  to 
be  found  nearer  home.  Nor,  if  the  theories  of  the  advocates  of 
the  double  standard  are  to  be  relied  on,  should  there  have  been 
any  difficulty  in  finding  it.  The  demonetization  of  silver  in 
Germany  did  not  affect  in  any  way  the  amount  of  the  money 
metals  of  Europe;  it  involved  only  the  necessity  of  a change  of 
place  of  a portion  of  them.  It  is  the  special  merit  of  the  double 
standard,  as  the  defenders  of  that  system  maintain,  that  it  allows 
such  change  of  place  to  occur  without  disturbance  of  the  rela- 
tions between  the  two  metals.  The  double  standard  is  in  fact, 
according  to  them,  the  great  equalizer  which,  like  the  governor 
of  the  steam-engine,  makes  the  driving  power,  which  is  money, 
uniform  in  effect  throughout  all  the  vast  machinery  of  the  com- 
mercial world.  Just  in  proportion  as  the  silver  of  Germany  was 
withdrawn  from  circulation  it  was  necessary  that  the  vacuum 
thus  created  should  be  filled  up  with  gold.  This  demand  of 
Germany  for  gold  is  spoken  of  by  many  as  a fearful  thing, 
threatening  to  create  a monetary  famine  throughout  the  world. 


350 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


The  alarm  is  continually  sounded  that  the  world  has  not  gold 
enough  to  provide  for  the  money  wants  of  all  nations.  But 
that  is  not  the  question  in  issue  here  at  all.  The  question  is 
only  whether,  so  long  as  throughout  the  larger  part  of  Europe 
silver  continued  to  be  the  material  of  legal-tender  money,  while 
among  more  than  half  the  populations  of  the  Continent  the 
double  standard  prevailed,  we  ought  not  to  have  had  a beautiful 
example  of  the  saving  influence  of  this  double-standard  principle 
in  the  emergency  presented.  According  to  the  estimates  made 
by  Mr.  Ruggles  in  his  supplementary  report  on  the  monetary 
conference  of  1867,  the  states  of  the  Latin  Union  alone  had 
§1,250,000,000  of  coined  gold  in  their  possession ; while  the  total 
amount  of  silver  in  all  its  denominations  in  circulation  through- 
out Germany  reached  only  about  the  sum  of  $400,000,000. 
Certainly,  if  the  principle  of  the  double  standard  is  worth 
anything,  there  ought  to  have  been  no  perceptible  impression 
produced  upon  the  money  market  by  allowing  all  the  silver 
which  Germany  could  possibly  gather,  and  which  has  hardly  ex- 
ceeded the  half  presumed  to  be  in  circulation,  to  be  bought  with 
French  gold  and  coined  at  the  French  mint.  Even  had  there 
been  German  silver  enough  to  displace  all  the  French  gold,  no- 
body ought  to  have  been  concerned  about  the  matter.  On  the 
other  hand,  according  to  one  of  the  most  thorough  of  the  cham- 
pions of  the  double  standard,  such  an  occurrence,  had  it  taken 
place,  ought  rather  to  have  been  regarded  with  satisfaction  if  not 
with  triumphant  gratification. 

“ In  the  past  history  of  the  case,”  observes  Mr.  Weston, 
“ the  actual  use  of  only  one  of  the  metals,  arising  from  their 
market  fluctuations,  has  been  one  of  the  rpost  familiarly  known 
occasional  results  of  the  double  standard,  and  has  always  been 
insisted  on  by  its  supporters  as  one  of  its  capital  recommendations ; 
because  it  insures  the  use  of  the  more  abundant  and  therefore 
better  money,  and  tends  to  lessen  the  dearness  of  the  dearer 
money  by  furnishing  it  to  the  markets  of  the  world.”  1 (The 
italics  are  ours.) 

It  seems  to  be  a sad  pity  that  the  conference  of  the  Latin 
Union,  held  as  early  as  January,  1874,  immediately  after  Ger- 

1 The  Silver  Question.  By  Geo.  M.  Weston.  New  York,  1878.  (p.  87.) 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


351 


many  began  to  move  in  this  matter,  failed  so  completely  to 
“ insist  ” on  this  “ capital  recommendation  ” of  the  system  which 
it  was  the  business  of  the  union  to  maintain,  that  they  re- 
solved to  limit  the  coinage  of  the  “better  money”  for  the  year 
then  commencing,  and  for  all  the  associated  states,  to  less 
than  $25,000,000;  against  which  they  charged  at  the  same  time 
$10,000,000  already  delivered  from  the  mint  on  certificates  of  De- 
cember, 1873,  so  that  the  actual  amount  allowed  was  only  about 
$15,000,000,  and  only  a portion  of  this  was  actually  coined. 
Similar  limitations  were  imposed  in  each  of  the  years  successively 
following,  until,  just  after  the  adjournment  of  the  abortive  Inter- 
national Monetary  Conference  of  1878,  the  mints  were  closed 
against  the  coinage  of  legal-tender  silver  entirely.  The  Latin 
Union,  instead  of  giving  a hospitable  welcome  to  the  rich  flood 
streaming  over  her  boundaries  from  Germany,  threw  up  dikes 
to  shut  it  out  and  keep  it  back. 

Now  it  is  worthy  of  note  that  when  they  thus  resolved  to 
repel  the  fertilizing  streams  of  German  silver  from  their  terri- 
tory, it  was  not  in  the  least  necessary  that  they  should  buy  this 
silver  with  their  own  gold.  They  might  have  let  Germany  find 
her  gold  where  she  could.  All  that  France  had  to  do  was  to 
keep  her  mint  open,  and  to  allow  the  holders  of  the  silver,  who- 
ever they  might  be,  to  bring  it  there  for  coinage  into  pieces  of 
five  francs.  New  blood  would  thus  have  been  infused  into  all 
the  veins  of  French  industry;  and  if  there  is  any  truth  .in  the 
theory  that  the  more  a people  have  of  money  the  better  they 
are  off,  France,  instead  of  finding  herself  in  1881  in  a monetary 
strait-jacket,  and  having  half  her  legal-tender  coin  depreciated 
to  a point  at  which  it  is  totally  unavailable  for  use  except  in  petty 
transactions  of  retail  traffic,  might  have  been  to-day  the  happiest 
nation  on  the  face  of  the  earth. 

The  double  standard  was  therefore  killed  in  the  house  of  its 
friends,  in  what  ought  to  have  been,  if  there  is  any  true  philosophy 
at  the  bottom  of  its  theory,  the  very  hour  of  its  most  signal  tri- 
umph. Had  not  France  and,  following  her  example,  the  Scan- 
dinavian states  and  the  Netherlands  practically  demonetized 
silver  themselves,  it  is  not  conceivable  that  the  act  of  Germany 
could  have  disturbed  in  any  manner  the  monetary  equilibrium 
in  Europe.  The  amount  of  money  would  not  have  been  in  the 


35* 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  PIE  IP. 


slightest  degree  affected  by  that  act.  There  would  have  been  an 
exchange  between  neighboring  countries  of  the  coin  in  circula- 
tion within  their  respective  borders  ; nothing  more. 

Why  then  did  France  pursue  a course  so  apparently,  on  her 
own  theory,  suicidal  ? Beyond  any  question  she  did  it  because 
she  believes  that,  for  a great  commercial  nation,  gold  is  a more 
desirable  material  for  coinage  than  silver.  In  this  respect  her 
opinion  is  shared  by  the  great  majority  of  the  most  intelligent 
people  of  other  nationalities.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  this 
is  the  intelligent  view  of  the  subject  taken  in  the  United  States. 

During  all  the  time  that  this  movement  was  going  on  upon 
the  other  continent,  it  happened  providentially  that  the  people 
of  the  United  States  had  no  interest  whatever  in  the  turn  the 
affair  should  take.  For  more  than  ten  years  not  a single  coin 
of  any  description,  gold  or  silver  or  copper,  had  been  in  circula- 
tion throughout  our  entire  territory.  During  all  the  eighty 
years  up  to  1873  which  had  passed  since  the  establishment  of 
the  mint,  we  had  coined  but  eight  millions  of  silver  dollars,  or 
about  $100,000  a year;  and  for  nearly  forty  of  these  years  we 
coined  no  such  dollars  at  all.  Such  silver  dollars  as  had  been 
coined  had  disappeared  from  circulation,  their  value  as  bullion 
having  been  greater  than  that  for  which  they  were  receivable  as 
coin,  and  consequently,  in  the  statute  adopted  in  1873  reorgan- 
izing the  mint,  provision  for  the  further  coinage  of  the  silver 
dollar  was  very  judiciously  omitted  ; and  the  revised  statutes 
with  equal  propriety  provided,  in  the  year  following,  that  this 
piece  should  be  coined  no  more.  This  was  simply  recognizing 
in  law  a state  of  things  which  had  existed  in  fact  for  about  half 
a century.  If  ever  since  the  world  began  there  was  offered  to 
a nation  a more  fitting  opportunity  for  illustrating  the  wisdom 
of  the  maxim  to  let  well  enough  alone,  the  opportunity  was  in 
that  crisis  ours.  The  occasion  was  nevertheless  seized  by  poli- 
ticians for  throwing  the  country  into  an  excitement  almost 
without  a parallel,  by  charging  the  disastrous  fall  in  the  price  of 
silver  in  the  London  market  as  a consequence  of  the  coinage 
act  of  1873;  and  charging  further  that  the  provision  of  that  act 
in  regard  to  the  silver  dollar  had  been  procured  by  secret  and 
artful  practices  of  the  moneyed  men  in  Wall  Street  and  Lom- 
bard Street  for  their  own  selfish  purposes.  It  was  even  asserted. 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


353 


and  it  has  been  constantly  maintained  down  to  this  day,  that 
the  Congress  which  passed  the  act  and  the  President  who  signed 
it  did  not  know  what  it  contained — a signal  example,  if  true,  of 
the  carelessness  with  which  legislation  often  goes  on  in  Wash- 
ington ; but  in  this  case  the  more  wonderful  from  the  fact  that 
the  bill  was  under  discussion  in  two  successive  congresses,  was 
printed  in  both  newspaper  and  pamphlet  form  and  widely  circu- 
lated, and  that  its  provisions  were  familiar  in  all  their  details, 
for  months  before  its  final  passage,  to  most  of  the  more  intelli- 
gent among  the  people  who  interest  themselves  in  such  things. 
For  an  entire  quarter  of  a century  before  this  enactment  the 
coinage  of  silver  dollars  at  our  mint  had  not  amounted  to  six 
millions  of  dollars  in  all.  This  fact  alone  suffices  to  show  the 
absurdity  of  the  assertion  that  the  stoppage  of  such  coinage, 
under  the  operation  of  the  act  in  question,  could  have  in  any 
manner  influenced  the  price  of  that  metal.  Moreover,  this  legis- 
lation, so  far  from  having  been  brought  about  by  dishonest  in- 
fluences exercised  by  interested  men,  was  due  to  the  advice  of 
the  finance  officers  of  the  government  itself ; for  the  very  suffi- 
cient reason  that,  as  prices  then  stood,  silver  bullion  uncoined 
was  worth  about  three  per  cent  more  than  the  same  metal 
coined  into  dollars ; so  that  all  the  dollars  issued  from  the  mint 
were  immediately  exported,  or  melted  up  and  converted  into 
bullion  again. 

It  has  been  said  already  that  the  act  of  1873  demonetizing 
silver  was  an  act  which  simply  recognized  in  law  a state  of  things 
which  had  already  existed  in  fact  in  our  country  for  about  forty 
years.  In  this  respect  our  experience  and  our  history  were  but 
a repetition  of  those  of  Great  Britain  in  1816  and  earlier;  for  in 
the  year  named  England  had  been  practically  a gold-standard 
country  for  the  whole  preceding  century.  The  entire  monetary 
history  of  that  country  indeed,  from  the  period  of  the  first  intro- 
duction of  gold  into  the  coinage  under  Henry  III.,  has  been  one 
long-continued  illustration  and  demonstration  of  the  utter  pow- 
erlessness of  law  to  maintain  in  permanent  circulation  side  by 
side  both  the  precious  metals  as  money  at  the  same  time.  The 
very  first  experiment  of  this  kind  resulted  in  a failure  so  com- 
plete and  absolute  that  it  was  not  repeated  for  nearly  a century. 
Gold  coins  seem  indeed  to  have  been  struck  in  Britain  as  early 


354 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


as  the  time  of  the  Romans,  and  also  later  under  the  Saxon  and 
Danish  kings ; but  these  with  all  other  traces  of  that  primitive 
rule  disappeared  on  the  advent  of  the  Conqueror.  In  the  letter 
on  the  coinage  of  Great  Britain  addressed  by  Lord  Liverpool  in 
1805  to  his  Majesty  King  George  III.  there  is  presented  a very 
lucid  and  interesting-  history  of  the  vicissitudes  to  which  the 
monetary  system  of  the  kingdom  has  been  subjected,  and  of  the 
chaotic  condition  into  which  it  has  been  repeatedly  thrown,  by 
governmental  tampering  with  the  currency.1  For  almost  three 
hundred  years  after  the  Conquest  the  only  coinage  in  circulation 
in  England  was  of  silver;  and  the  only  form  of  silver  coin  struck 
was  the  penny,  of  the  weight  of  22^  grains,  making  it  a little 
heavier  than  the  present  half-dime  piece.  This  penny  was  deep- 
ly marked  by  a cross  dividing  it  into  four  equal  parts ; and  for 
smaller  payments  it  was  customary  to  break  it  through  these 
divisions  into  halfpennies,  and  quarters  or  fourths — whence  the 
modern  farthing.  The  first  gold  coin  struck  after  the  Conquest 
was  issued  by  Henry  III.  in  1257,  and  was  also  called  a penny. 
It  had  twice  the  weight  and  twenty  times  the  nominal  value  of 
the  silver  penny,  from  which  it  appears  that  gold  was  then  rated 
to  silver  as  ten  to  one.  Gold  seems  at  this  time  to  have  been 
very  cheap  in  England,  and  the  people  by  common  consent  re- 
fused to  receive  the  gold  penny.  Lord  Liverpool  says  that  the 
citizens  of  London  made  representations  against  this  coin,  and 
the  king  found  himself  obliged  by  proclamation  to  deprive  it  of 
its  legal-tender  character.  It  was  of  course  soon  driven  out  of 
use.  A like  fate,  and  for  the  same  reason,  befell  the  coin  of  the 
same  metal  issued  about  a century  later  by  Edward  III.,  in  1345, 
called  a fiorence  or  florm.  This  coin,  like  the  former,  proved  un- 
acceptable to  the  people  ; and,  after  having  been  at  first  made  by 
proclamation  optionally  receivable,  was  within  a few  months 
after  its  issue  withdrawn  from  circulation. 

This  monarch,  however,  succeeded  at  length  in  the  establish- 
ing  gold  as  a part  of  the  coinage  ; but  such  was  the  instability 
of  the  ratio  between  the  nominal  values  of  the  two  metals  that 
the  legal  ratio  during  his  own  and  subsequent  reigns  was  subject 

1 A Treatise  on  the  Coins  of  the  Realm,  in  a Letter  to  the  King.  By  Charles, 
Earl  of  Liverpool.  Oxford  1805. 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


355 


to  continual  changes.  He  himself  first  fixed  this  ratio  at 
i : I2-|  nearly;  but  this  he  afterwards  altered  to  and 

in  the  course  of  the  ten  years  following  he  made  two  additional 
changes.  Neither  of  these  was  great,  but  experience  has  shown 
that  only  a very  slight  discrepancy  between  the  legal  and  commer- 
cial ratio  is  necessary  to  produce  an  active  traffic  in  the  coins  and 
a rapid  disappearance  of  one  metal  or  the  other.  As  illustrations 
of  this  some  examples  reported  by  Sir  Isaac  Newton  in  1717  are 
instructive.  He  states  that  in  the  reign  of  William  III.  louis 
d’ors  of  France  were  current  in  England  at  17s.  6d.,  when  they 
were  actually  worth  but  17s.  fd.;  and  that  when  by  a royal 
proclamation  it  was  ordered  that  these  coins  should  be  received 
for  only  17s.,  they  immediately  disappeared.  The  profit  made 
by  their  importation  was  over  two  per  cent,  which  was  of  course 
a considerable  temptation ; but  that  on  their  exportation  was 
only  f of  one  per  cent ; yet  they  disappeared.  At  another 
time  moidores  of  Portugal  passed  in  England  for  28  shillings, 
being  worth  only  27s.  7d.  Being  reduced  by  proclamation  to 
27s.  6d.,  they  also  disappeared.  The  profit  this  time  on  importa- 
tion was  one  and  a half  per  cent ; on  exportation  only  one  third 
of  one  per  cent.  So  that  a change  apparently  insignificant  in 
the  legal  ratio  between  the  metals  often  serves  to  drive  one  or 
the  other  out  of  circulation  altogether. 

The  struggle  to  maintain  both  metals  in  the  coinage  was 
continued  from  the  time  of  Henry  III.  down  to  the  accession  of 
George  I.  early  in  the  eighteenth  century — that  is  to  say,  for 
more  than  five  hundred  years ; but  at  this  last-named  epoch  it 
was  definitely  abandoned,  and  silver  has  since  ceased  to  be  used 
in  England  except  for  petty  retail  traffic. 

During  the  reigns  of  James  I.  and  Charles  I.  this  struggle 
was  very  energetic.  It  ceased  temporarily  to  occupy  attention 
under  stress  of  more  urgent  affairs,  during  the  great  rebellion  and 
the  Commonwealth.  But  after  the  Restoration,  and  down  to 
the  accession  of  William  of  Orange,  it  went  on  actively,  one 
metal  or  the  other  disappearing  from  circulation  after  every 
fresh  effort  to  prevent  this  annoying  result.  The  two  monarchs 
named  above,  in  addition  to  employing  the  natural  means  of 
accomplishing  their  object,  which  consists  of  course  in  endeav- 
oring to  conform  the  legal  ratio  of  values  accurately  to  the  com- 


356 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


mercial  ratio,  invoked  the  terrors  of  the  penal  law  and  exercised 
all  the  powers  of  the  High  Court  of  Star  Chamber  to  deter  men 
from  the  grave  misdemeanor  of  melting  down  the  coin  or  carry- 
ing it  out  of  the  kingdom. 

After  the  Restoration,  the  rise  of  the  value  of  gold  continu- 
ing, Charles  II.,  in  coining  a new  20  shilling  piece  under  the 
name  of  the  guinea , reduced  its  weight  below  that  of  the  piece 
of  similar  nominal  value  issued  by  James  I.,  and  which  he  had 
called  a laurel ; but  the  reduction  was  not  sufficient  to  put  it 
into  proper  adjustment  with  the  silver  coins  in  circulation,  and 
hence  the  kingdom  was  again  menaced  with  a loss  of  its  gold  as 
complete  as  had  occurred  in  the  beginning  of  the  reign  of  the 
last-named  monarch.  But  here,  by  a common  consent  among 
the  people,  an  expedient  was  adopted  by  which  this  misfortune 
was  prevented,  or  at  least  mitigated.  This  was  to  receive  and 
pay  the  guinea  not  at  its  mint  value,  but  at  its  value  relatively 
to  silver  (which  was  always  the  practical  standard)  in  the 
bullion  market.  The  guinea  therefore  passed  for  21  or 
22  shillings,  and  it  is  stated  by  Locke  that  “ the  gold  coins 
varied  in  their  values  according  to  the  current  rates.”  This 
practice  seems  not  to  have  pleased  the  government,  for  Lord 
Liverpool  says  there  is  an  order  on  the  council-books  for  enforc- 
ing the  currency  of  the  guinea  at  20  shillings;  but  he  adds 
that  it  was  never  issued,  and  that  if  it  had  been,  it  would  have 
driven  all  the  guineas  out  of  the  country. 

During  the  successive  reigns  of  Charles  II.  and  his  brother 
the  silver  coin  of  England  became  greatly  depreciated  by  clip- 
ping and  abrasion ; and  at  the  accession  of  William  of  Orange 
it  was  found,  by  a careful  examination  of  the  exchequer,  that 
they  had  lost  on  an  average  nearly  half  their  weight.  A report 
of  Mr.  Lowndes,  secretary  of  the  treasury  in  1695,  states  that 
this  condition  of  the  coin  (silver  being  the  general  standard  of 
value)  occasioned  “ great  contentions  among  the  king’s  subjects 
in  fairs,  markets,  and  shops,  to  the  disturbance  of  the  public 
peace;”  that  it  embarrassed  bargains  and  greatly  diminished 
trade ; “ that  persons  before  they  concluded  any  bargain  were 
necessitated  first  to  settle  the  price  or  value  of  the  very  money 
they  were  to  receive  for  their  goods,  and  that  they  set  a price 
upon  their  goods  accordingly;”  also  “that  these  practices  had 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


35  7 


been  one  great  cause  of  the  raising  of  the  price  not  only  of  all 
merchandises,  but  of  every  article  necessary  to  the  sustenance 
of  the  common  people,  to  their  great  grievance.”  He  further 
states  that  the  guinea,  in  consequence  of  the  deplorable  con- 
dition of  the  silver  coin,  had  risen  so  as  to  be  current  for  30 
shillings,  which  was  “ much  higher  than  the  state  of  the  bullion 
market  would  justify  and  that  consequently  “ silver  bullion, 
instead  of  being  brought  to  the  mint,  was  exported  to  be  sold 
abroad  for  gold,  in  which  foreigners  made  their  payments,  to  the 
great  detriment  of  the  merchants  and  manufacturers  of  England.” 
In  this  embarrassing  state  of  things  the  government  sought  the 
advice  of  eminent  men  of  science,  among  them  Sir  Isaac  New- 
ton, who  was  made  warden  of  the  mint,  and  under  whose  super- 
vision the  silver  coinage  was  thoroughly  reformed.  Before  this 
was  accomplished  the  guinea  was,  by  successive  orders,  reduced 
in  current  value  first  to  26  shillings,  above  which  it  was  not 
lawful  to  pay  or  to  receive  it,  and  afterwards  to  22  shillings,  -at 
which  nominal  value  it  remained  till  1717,  when  it  was  reduced 
to  21,  at  which  point  it  remaine*d  permanently  fixed. 

After  the  completion  of  the  recoinage,  it  was  supposed,  or  at 
least  hoped,  that  the  price  of  silver  bullion  in  the  market  would 
fall  to  the  mint  price ; but  the  guinea  continuing  to  be  over- 
rated in  popular  esteem,  it  did  not  do  so,  and  consequently  silver 
coin  began  to  be  exported  for  the  purchase  of  gold  bullion 
abroad,  as  silver  bullion  had  been  before  the  recoinage.  Hence, 
in  1717,  Sir  Isaac  Newton  said  that  “if  silver  money  should  be- 
come a little  scarcer,  people  would  in  a little  time  refuse  to 
make  payments  in  silver  without  a premium.”  He  showed  that 
the  real  value  of  the  guinea  in  silver  was  only  20s.  8d.,  while  it 
was  passing  current  at  21s.  6d.,  and  he  recommended  that  its 
legal-tender  currency  should  be  reduced  to  21  shillings,  which 
was  done,  the  other  gold  coins  being  reduced  in  propor- 
tion. But  as  this  reduction  was  not  sufficient,  silver  continued 
to  be  exported,  and  silver  soon  ceased  to  be  the  practical  stand- 
ard of  value  in  England.  From  that  time,  consequently,  except 
for  petty  traffic,  it  has  ceased  to  be  in  circulation  in  England 
altogether;  or,  in  the  words  of  Lord  Liverpool,  “from  this 
period  all  considerable  payments  have  been  made  in  the  gold 
coin ; and  the  silver  coins  have  generally  served  in  making  small 

24 

t 


353 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


payments,  *or  in  exchange  for  the  fractional  parts  of  gold 
coins.  Previous  to  this  proclamation  (fixing  the  guinea  at  21 
shillings)  the  people  were  disposed  to  make  their  payments  in 
the  gold  coins  in  preference  to  those  of  silver.  This  last  meas- 
ure tended  to  confirm  what  was  before  the  disposition  of  the 
people,  and  gave  to  the  gold  coins  a complete  ascendency  in 
the  currency  of  the  kingdom ; and  the  silver  coins  have  since 
become  a mere  representation  of  the  gold  coins,  for  the  pur- 
poses before  stated.  The  greatest  part  of  the  good  and  weighty 
silver  coins  which  then  remained  have  since  been  melted  down 
and  exported.”  He  adds  that  from  1717  to  the  end  of  the 
eighteenth  century,  a period  of  eighty-three  years,  not  so  much 
as  ^600,000,  equal  to  $3,000,000,  in  silver  had  been  coined  in 
England  ; and  that  in  the  last  forty  years  of  the  century  less 
than  .£64,000,  equal  to  $320,000,  had  been  coined ; that  is,  only 
;£i6oo,  equal  to  $8000  per  annum.  The  legal  ratio  of  value  be- 
tween the  metals  fixed  by  this  last  royal  determination  was 
I:15r3865490'  > and  the  entire  risq  in  the  value  of  gold  from  the 
time  of  Henry  III.  was  4 7-2JT20  Per  cent-  Of  this  32|~f  occurred 
within  sixty  years  after  the  accession  of  James  I. 

It  was  therefore  not,  as  is  commonly  said,  by  the  act  of 
Parliament  of  56th  George  III.,  but  by  the  proclamation  of  3d 
George  I.  above  mentioned,  that  the  demonetization  of  silver  in 
England  was  for  all  practical  purposes  accomplished  ; but  this 
effect,  which  followed  that  proclamation  by  the  simple  operation 
of  natural  laws,  was  confirmed  by  statute  law  fifty-seven  years 
later,  when,  by  act  of  Parliament  of  1774,  it  was  declared  “ that 
no  tender  in  payment  of  money  made  in  the  silver  coin  of  this 
realm  of  any  sum  exceeding  the  sum  of  ,£25  at  any  one  time 
shall  be  reputed  in  law  or  allowed  to  be  legal  tender  within 
Great  Britain  and  Ireland.” 

But  tho  this  statute  demonetized  silver  as  early  as  the  year 
1774  by  destroying  its  legal-tender  character  except  for  a limit- 
ed amount,  it  did  not  reduce  that  coinage  to  a purely  subsidiary 
position.  That  was  the  special  effect  which  the  act  of  56th 
George  III.,  in  1816,  did  accomplish  by  reducing  the  weight  of 
the  shilling  from  to  .-bit  °f  a pound  of  standard  silver, 
and  limiting  the  legal  tender  to  sums  not  exceeding  40 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


359 


shillings.  Great  Britain  has  therefore  been  a gold-standard  na- 
tion for  nearly  two  centuries,  instead  of  less  than  one  as  is  com- 
monly stated.  She  became  so  in  consequence  of  an  ineffectual 
struggle  of  several  centuries  to  maintain  the  double  standard  ; 
during  the  greater  part  of  which  time  silver  was  her  actual 
standard  and  her  preference. 

Our  own  briefer  history  is  entirely  similar.  Having  estab- 
lished our  coinage  in  1792  upon  the  ratio,  supposed  at  the  time 
to  be  the  commercial  ratio,  of  1:15,  our  gold  coins  disappeared 
as  fast  as  they  were  issued  from  the  mint,  and  in  fact  the  coin- 
age  of  gold  was  very  small.  On  the  other  hand,  the  facilities  of 
the  mint  were  not  sufficient  to  supply  the  demand  for  coins  of 
the  cheaper  metal,  and  we  were  flooded  with  Spanish  silver  for 
nearly  forty  years.  We  too,  in  1834  made  a readjustment  of 
the  relation  between  the  metals,  as  England  had  done  before  us 
so  often  ; but  our  experience  was  precisely  that  of  King  James: 
we  made  the  change  too  great,  and  our  silver  disappeared  as 
rapidly  as  our  gold  had  done  before.  We  submitted  to  this, 
and  in  1853  provided  against  the  loss  of  all  our  small  money  by 
reducing  the  fractional  silver  to  the  condition  of  a subsidiary 
overrated  token  currency  of  limited  legal-tender  character,  pre- 
cisely as  England  had  done  in  her  law  of  1816.  And  the  act  of 
1873  discontinuing  the  coinage  of  the  silver  dollar  was,  like  the 
last-mentioned  act  of  the  British  Parliament,  simply  a recogni- 
tion of  the  existing  condition  of  things. 

Such  being  the  case,  the  fact  that  we  should  have  allowed 
ourselves,  in  a season  of  universal  tranquillity  and  contentment, 
to  be  suddenly  embroiled  in  an  affair  in  which  the  consequences 
of  our  meddling  could  only  be  certain  harm  to  ourselves  and 
probable  harm  to  others,  admits  of  no  explanation  except  on 
the  supposition  of  one  of  those  accesses  of  popular  delusion  and 
folly  of  which  so  many  have  marked  the  history  of  mankind. 
The  harm  to  ourselves  was  certain ; since,  had  the  plan  origin- 
ally proposed  of  throwing  our  mint  freely  open  to  all  comers 
been  carried  out,  the  refuse  silver  of  Germany,  and  not  only  that 
but  the  silver  coin  of  the  Katin  Union,  Holland,  Denmark, 
Sweden,  and  Norway,  would  have  poured  in  upon  us  all  together, 
and  gold  would  have  disappeared  from  our  land  at  once  and 


360 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


forever.  That  disaster  was  momentarily  averted,  but  its  com- 
ing was  only  postponed;  for  the  operation  of  the  law  actually 
enacted  is  bringing  it  nearer  to  us  every  day. 

The  harm  to  others  also  was  more  than  probable,  since  the 
advocates  of  the  double  standard  in  Europe  saw  very  clearly 
that  to  open  the  American  mint  to  silver  was  likely  to  drive 
European  governments  generally  into  adopting  in  law,  as  they 
have  already  done  in  fact,  the  single  gold  standard.  The  ablest 
and  most  sagacious  of  all  these  economists,  Mr.  Henri  Cernuschi, 
has  been  unceasing  in  his  protests  against  this  supreme  of  fol- 
lies on  our  part ; and  he  took  the  trouble  to  come  all  the  way  to 
this  country  in  1876  to  make  his  protest  before  the  Congres- 
sional silver  committee  of  that  year.  Of  that  committee  Mr. 
Richard  P.  Bland  of  Missouri  was  a member,  and  the  response 
to  the  protest  was  the  introduction  into  the  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives of  the  notorious  Bland  Bill. 

But  even  supposing  there  had  been  wisdom  in  a movement 
in  this  matter  on  our  part,  the  form  in  which  our  movement  was 
made  was  unwise  to  the  last  degree.  It  was  insisted  that  we 
should  coin  once  more  the  dollar  of  41 2\  grains,  sentiment- 
ally called  the  “ dollar  of  the  fathers  of  the  republic.”  But  to 
do  this  requires  the  preservation  of  the  ratio  to  gold  of  I : 16, 
while  the  leading  European  states  are  agreed  on  a ratio  of 
1:15^.  The  inevitable  consequence  must  be  that,  in  case  the 
free  coinage  of  silver  is  recommenced  in  foreign  mints — the 
thing  which  our  bimetallist  friends  profess  to  hope  for  and  de- 
sire— our  entire  legal-tender  silver  will  be  exported  and  melted 
up  for  recoinage  abroad.  This  is  not  a result  which  depends  in 
any  manner  upon  the  price  of  silver.  Whether  silver  is  dear  or 
cheap,  it  will  pay  a profit  of  3^  per  cent  to  melt  up  dollars  and 
coin  them  into  pieces  of  five  francs.  We  have  coined  between 
eighty  and  ninety  million  silver  dollars  since  the  passage  of  the 
Allison  Bill  of  February,  1878,  and  our  only  security  for  the  per- 
manent existence  of  a single  one  of  these  coins  lies  in  the  pos- 
sibility that  the  Latin  Union  may  refuse  to  coin  silver  any 
more.  For  the  hope  that  they  will  adopt  our  ratio  of  1 : 16  has 
not  a shadow  of  foundation.  They  expect  to  drive  us  to  the 
adoption  of  theirs ; which  we  cannot  do  without  equally  con- 
demning our  $80,000,000  already  coined  to  the  melting-pot. 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


361 

Thus  the  inconsiderate  rashness  with  which  the  forty-fifth  Con- 
gress rushed  into  the  coinage  of  the  dollar  of  grains  has 
no  parallel  except  in  the  blindness  and  folly  which  led  to  the 
coinage  of  the  silver  dollar  at  all. 

Several  special  arguments  are  urged  in  defence  of  the  re- 
monetization of  silver  in  our  country,  to  which  in  conclusion  it 
is  proper  to  give  a moment’s  attention.  It  is  said,  first,  that 
silver  constitutes  half  the  money  of  the  world,  and  that  to  de- 
prive it  of  its  character  as  such  would  be  an  infinite  wrong  to 
mankind.  Very  well,  then  let  it  continue  to  be  money.  The 
question  at  present  is  not  what  is  good  for  the  world,  but  what 
is  good  for  us  here  in  the  United  States. 

If  silver  is  needed  for  the  world’s  money,  as  it  probably  is,  it 
will  continue  to  be  used  where  it  is  needed.  Suppose  that  all 
nations  should  prefer  gold,  but  that  all  cannot  get  gold ; those 
who  cannot  will  use  such  money  as  they  can  get.  But  all  do 
not  prefer  gold  by  any  means ; and  more  than  half  the  popula- 
tion of  the  globe  do  most  decidedly  prefer  silver,  and  are  likely 
to  do  so  for  centuries,  if  not  for  all  time.  Hindostan,  Burmah, 
Siam,  the  Philippines,  and  the  Chinese  Empire  not  only  employ 
silver  for  money,  but  they  consume  quantities  of  it  for  personal 
ornament  and  for  other  purposes  of  luxury.  If  the  present  low 
price  of  silver  has  been  really  caused,  as  is  claimed,  by  the  adop- 
tion of  the  gold  standard  in  Germany  and  the  cessation  of 
silver  coinage  in  the  mints  of  the  civilized  world,  it  cannot  be 
permanent;  and  it  will  be  followed  by  a rise  when  the  free  flow 
to  the  East  is  re-established  and  the  temporary  glut  of  the 
London  market  is  worked  off.  In  the  words  of  Mr.  Bagehot,1 
“ there  is  therefore,  in  the  end,  a certain  market  for  the  silver 
displaced  from  Europe  ; it  will  ultimately  go,'  as  the  rest  has 
gone,  to  the  East,  where  it  is  the  ancient  and  the  best  attain- 
able paying  medium.”  The  price  therefore  must  ultimately 
rise  to  the  point  determined  Ijy  the  cost  of  production.  But  if 
it  has  heretofore  been  ' sustained  artificially  above  that  cost,  it 
will  hardly  return  to  the  same  level  again,  nor  can  the  reopen- 
ing to  its  coinage  of  all  the  mints  in  the  world  force  it  to  do  so. 

But  then  it  is  claimed  that  the  production  of  silver  is  a great 


1 The  Depreciation  of  Silver.  By  Walter  Bagehot.  London,  1877.  (p.  3.) 


362 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


industry,  and  an  industry  peculiarly  our  own ; also  that  our 
silver  mines  are  a source  of  incalculable  wealth : consequently, 
that  to  refuse  to  coin  silver— that  is,  to  buy  it — is  to  discourage 
that  industry  and  to  check  the  development  of  our  abundant 
natural  resources.  To  this  it  may  be  replied,  that  any  industry 
which  cannot  live  unless  it  is  supported  by  the  state,  had  better, 
to  the  full  extent  to  which  that  is  true,  be  abandoned.  Mines 
that  will  pay  at  the  present  prices  of  silver  will  continue  to  be 
worked ; mines  which  will  not,  may  be  given  up  ; but  it  does 
not  follow  that  the  productive  energy  which  would  otherwise 
have  been  spent  on  them  will  be  lost  to  the  country.  It  will 
only  be  turned  to  something  more  profitable.  As  a general 
principle  of  public  economy  it  maybe  said  that  a state  can  com- 
mit no  greater  folly  than  to  pay  men  for  carrying  on  an  indus- 
try which  is  so  little  needed  that  it  will  not  pay  for  itself.  There 
is  nothing  in  the  nature  of  gold  or  silver  to  make  its  production 
more  worthy  of  encouragement  than  that  of  hemp  or  hay,  or 
rice  or  cotton.  On  the  other  hand,  the  powerful  fascination 
exercised  by  the  precious  metals  over  the  imaginations  of  men, 
has  made  the  search  for  them  one  of  the  most  demoralizing 
pursuits  in  which  any  people  have  ever  been  engaged.  It  has 
everywhere  engendered  a spirit  of  reckless  adventure  and  blind 
trust  in  chance  which  has  made  the  whole  business  little  better 
than  a gigantic  system  of  gambling.  And  if  in  this  grand 
game  it  occasionally  happens  that  a great  stake  is  won,  it  is  too 
true  on  the  other  hand  that  more  frequently  the  players  lose  all 
they  possess.  The  amount  of  capital  which  has  been  hopelessly 
sunk  and  wasted  in  our  country  in  ill-judged  mining  schemes 
within  the  last  thirty  years,  according  to  recent  statements  pub- 
lished in  leading  mining  journals  of  this  city,  reaches  a total 
truly  appalling.  We  are  hence  compelled  to  make  a heavy  de- 
duction from  the  supposed  contributions  of  these  enterprises  to 
the  wealth  of  the  country.  For  these  reasons  every  statesman 
and  every  true  economist  will  regard  as  of  something  more  than 
doubtful  expediency  the  policy  of  encouraging  by  positive  legis- 
lative action  the  production  of  the  precious  metals  as  a national 
industry. 

But  it  is  further  urged  in  favor  of  the  rehabilitation  of  silver, 
that  without  a legally  established  ratio  of  value  between  this 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


363 


metal  and  gold  we  have  no  basis  for  a par  of  exchange  in  inter- 
national commerce  with  silver-standard  nations.  There  would 
be  something  at  least  plausible  in  this  if  exchanges  were  usually 
made  at  par ; but  as  that  is  not  the  case,  the  par  of  exchange  is 
useful  only  as  a point  of  reference,  by  means  of  which  to  state 
simply  the  actual  rate.  It  is  not  in  the  least  necessary  to  its 
usefulness  that  it  should  be  a true  par — it  may  for  that  matter 
be  entirely  arbitrary  and  false : all  that  is  needed  is  that  it  should 
be  fixed.  We  had  a false  par  between  ourselves  and  England 
for  all  the  first  half  of  the  present  century,  but  it  answered  its 
purpose.  The  par  is  like  the  zero  of  the  thermometer — it  may 
be  fixed  at  freezing,  as  in  the  centigrade,  or  at  the  temperature 
of  melting  snow  and  salt,  as  in  Fahrenheit ; but  the  actual  indi- 
cations are  equally  accurate  in  either  case.  In  the  absence  of 
law,  common  consent  will  soon  fix  on  a mean  point  about  which 
the  fluctuations  of  the  bullion  market  oscillate ; and  this  will 
afford  probably  a better  par  than  any  that  law  could  establish. 

After  what  has  been  said,  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  state  our 
own  conviction,  that  any  attempt  to  constrain  a people,  by 
royal  decree,  by  legislative  enactment,  or  by  international  treaty, 
to  accept  a system,  political,  social,  or  monetary,  to  which  they 
are  not  borne  by  the  natural  course  of  events,  and  which  does 
not  approve  itself  to  their  general  sense  of  fitness  or  need,  must 
be  a necessary  failure.  It  is  certain  that  the  United  States  have 
become  a single-standard  nation  by  the  force  of  circumstances ; 
it  is  certain  that  a very  decided  majority  of  our  people  do  not 
want  the  double  standard,  and  do  not  approve  its  principle.  It 
is  next  to  certain  that  any  arrangement  entered  into  at  Paris  for 
the  adoption  of  such  a system,  in  establishing  which  the  great- 
est of  all  the  commercial  nations  shall  decline  to  be  a party, 
must  prove  a failure  ; and  it  is  more  than  doubtful  whether  the 
concurrence  of  that  nation,  which  is  altogether  improbable,  could 
make  it  a success.  Yet  we  are  told  that  our  delegates  have  de- 
parted on  their  mission  “with  light  hearts,”  and  in  the  full  ex- 
pectation of  triumphantly  solving  the  most  knotty  problem  of 
the  century. 

The  problem  is  incapable  of  solution  by  any  means  which 
the  conference  is  likely  to  contemplate.  For,  first,  the  delegates 
apoear  to  be  practically  under  instructions  to  frame  if  possible 


364 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IP. 


a convention  fixing  a definite  ratio  of  values  between  gold  and 
silver,  which  ratio  the  assenting  nations  are  to  accept  and  to 
employ  in  their  coinage.  The  actual  ratio  in  the  market  is  at 
present  i : 1 8 nearly.  In  defiance  of  this  the  European  bimet- 
allists propose  to  force  the  adoption  of  the  French  ratio  i : ish 
Our  delegates  are  expected  to  yield  in  this  matter,  tho  our 
eighty  millions  of  dollars  have  been  coined  at  the  ratio  of  i : 16. 
This  decision,  if  it  be  what  is  expected,  will  either  control  the 
market  or  it  will  not.  If  it  does,  the  holders  of  silver  certifi- 
cates in  the  United  States  will  immediately  draw  their  coin, 
melt  it  into  bullion,  and  carry  it  to  the  mint  to  be  coined  over. 
If  the  whole  is  so  recoined,  the  owners  will  reap  an  apparent 
benefit  of  two  million  six  hundred  thousand  dollars;  compen- 
sated, however,  by  a probable  corresponding  fall  in  the  purchas- 
ing power  of  money.  In  so  far  as  the  government  is  an  owner, 
it  will  participate  in  this  advantage,  whatever  it  may  be  worth. 
But  if  the  decision  does  not  control  the  market  the  owners  of 
gold  coin  will  buy  silver  bullion  for  coinage,  making  a profit  of 
a little  over  i6i  per  cent  so  long  as  the  present  commercial  rate 
continues.  Under  these  circumstances  of  course  gold  will  soon 
cease  to  form  a part  of  our  metallic  currency. 

. But  it  will  be  said  gold  cannot  be  exported  with  profit  be- 
cause it  will  bring  no  more  in  a foreign  market  than  in  ours. 
This  is  hardly  true.  Unless  the  oriental  peoples  come  into  the 
agreement  gold  will  soon  begin  to  make  its  way  in  India,  where 
it  is  doing  so  already  under  the  peculiar  financial  relations  of 
that  country  to  England ; and  before  many  years  are  past  the 
East  will  prove  a more  productive  silver  mine  than  the  Comstock 
lode  has  ever  been  in  its  palmiest  days.  If  all  the  oriental  na- 
tions could  be  brought  into  the  agreement  a very  sensible  effect 
upon  the  market  rate  might  very  possibly  be  produced,  for  the 
coinage  demand  for  silver  would  so  far  exceed  any  other  possi- 
ble demand  for  that  metal  as  to  raise  its  price ; but  even  this 
could  not  overrule  and  control  that  more  efficient  cause  which 
determines  finally  the  price  of  all  commodities,  the  cost  of  pro- 
duction. Stamped  silver  would  by  force  of  law  be  exchangeable 
for  stamped  gold,  as  stamped  paper  is  now ; but  unstamped 
silver,  like  unstamped  paper,  would  have  to  take  its  chances  in 
the  market.  It  would,  moreover,  soon  be  found  that  gold  coin 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


365 


would  possess  a greater  purchasing  power  than  silver — just  as 
before  resumption  it  had  the  same  advantage  over  paper;  and 
throughout  the  world  there  would  be  two  kinds  of  money  in 
circulation,  legally  equal  in  value,  but  practically  unequal,  to  the 
great  confusion  of  business  and  the  great  embarrassment  of 
trade. 

Moreover,  in  case  England  should  not  be  a party  to  the  ar- 
rangement, and  even  probably  if  she  should  be,  gold  would  con- 
tinue to  be,  as  it  is  now,  the  real  standard  of  the  world  ; and  all 
the  great  transactions  of  commerce  would  be  made  with  refer- 
ence to  that  standard.  Furthermore,  in  the  settlement  of  inter- 
national balances  gold  would  always  be  the  metal  preferred  and 
employed,  on  account  of  its  superior  portability ; so  that  it 
would  steadily  accumulate  with  creditor  nations,  and  be  with- 
drawn from  debtor  nations. 

As  the  work  which  the  conference  have  apparently  been 
called  together  to  do  is  to  report  in  favor  of  universal  bimetal- 
lism on  the  basis  of  the  ratio  1 : 1 5-^,  there  seems  to  be  every 
probability  that  they  will  do  this  work  and  adjourn.  But  there 
is  something  much  better  which  they  might  do,  and  in  doing 
which  they  might  much  more  effectually  serve  the  interests  of 
mankind.  Let  them  recommend  to  the  world  to  abandon  the 
artificial  distinctions  of  pounds  sterling,  dollars,  francs,  and  marc-s, 
and  to  restore  the  precious  metals  to  the  footing  on  which  they 
stood  when  they  began  first  to  be  used  as  money ; viz.,  that 
of  simple  units  of  weight.  Let  our  coins  of  either  metal  be 
stamped  simply  with  the  number  of  units  of  weight  which  they 
severally  contain,  and  with  the  degree  of  their  fineness;  and  let 
them  find  their  relative  values,  as  other  commodities  do,  by  free 
competition  in  the  open  market.  Under  these  circumstances 
one  metal  or  the  other  will  be  the  practical  standard  of  value,  and 
prices  will  be  quoted  in  reference  to  that.  The  other  may  be 
equally  legal  tender,  but  legal  tender  only  at  a relative  value  de- 
termined by  the  condition  of  the  bullion  market..  This  relation 
might  even  be  made  permanent  for  brief  periods — say  for  a 
month  or  a year  at  a time — by  circular  notice  issued  by  the  Sec- 
retary of  the  Treasury  with  the  advice  of  a syndicate  of  mer- 
chants, or  of  the  chambers  of  commerce  of  the  principal  cities  ; 
but  the  relation  would  probably  remain  so  nearly  constant  that 


366 


THE  PRINCE  TO X RE  VIE  W. 


these  announcements  would  rarely,  and  only  at  long  intervals,  be 
anything  more  than  confirmations  of  the  rates  previously  estab- 
lished. 

Under  such  a system  the  standard  metal  would  continue  in 
the  United  States  and  England  to  be  gold  as  at  present.  The 
probability  is  that  the  same  standard  would  prevail  throughout 
the  Latin  Union,  Spain,  Holland,  Germany,  and  the  Scandina- 
vian states.  But  in  all  these  silver  would  be  equally  a legal 
tender  for  the  payment  of  debts;  only  that  at  present  it  would 
only  be  so  at  one  eighteenth  of  the  value  of  gold,  and  not  at  the 
present  legal  ratio  of  France  or  of  our  own  country.  If  by  this 
use  of  silver,  which  fully  reinstates  it  in  its  function  as  a money 
metal,  its  price  should  rise,  all  the  better.  Then  its  legal-ten- 
der efficacy  will  rise  also ; and  in  case  of  a new  and  unexampled 
increase  hereafter  in  the  supply  of  the  more  precious  metal,  and 
an  extraordinary  diminution  of  that  of  the  less  precious,  nothing 
could  prevent  the  advance  of  its  purchasing  power  to  any  ex- 
tent. In  Austria,  Russia,  Turkey,  and  all  the  East  the  standard 
metal  would  probably  be  silver,  and  gold  would  be  rated  as 
money  relatively  to  that,  varying  occasionally  in  its  legal-tender 
power,  as  we  have  supposed  silver  to  do  among  the  more  west- 
ern nations.  But  everywhere,  east  or  west,  both  metals  would 
be  equally  current  as  money. 

A state  of  things  like  that  here  proposed  did  actually  exist 
in  Great  Britain  from  the  time  of  the  Commonwealth  down  to 
the  revolution.  Silver  was  the  standard  of  value  ; but  the  gold 
coins,  tho  issued  at  a fixed  legal  valuation  in  reference  to  silver, 
were  nevertheless  received  and  paid,  as  stated  by  Mr.  Locke, 
“ according  to  the  current  rate.”  No  inconvenience  was  expe- 
rienced from  this  practice.  On  the  other  hand,  it  was  attended 
with  the  great  advantage  that  it  prevented  the  gold  from  being 
melted  up  and  exported. 

It  is  worth  considering,  moreover,  that  by  adopting  a series 
of  simple  units  of  weight  as  coins  we  shall  not  be  compelled  to 
depart  to  any  inconvenient  degree  from  our  ordinary  habits  of 
thought  in  matters  of  money.  Take,  for  example,  as  the  basic 
unit  one  gram  of  gold  nine  tenths  fine.  The  value  of  this  in 
the  money  of  the  United  States  is  six  dimes  less  two  mills  ; in 
that  of  Great  Britain,  one’ half-crown  less  one  halfpenny;  in 


THE  SILVER  QUESTION. 


367 


that  of  France,  three  francs  ten  centimes  exactly;  and  in  that 
of  Germany,  two  and  a half  marcs  plus  one  pfennig.  A coin  of 
ten  grams,  which  would  be  a little  heavier  than  our  half-eagle, 
would  be  worth  six  dollars,  or  thirty-one  francs,  or  twenty-five 
marcs,  or  twenty-five  shillings  less  five  pence,  with  scarcely  a 
sensible  error  in  either  case.  Such  coins  could  easily  be  made 
use  of  as  a part  of  the  existing  monetary  systems  of  the  leading 
commercial  nations,  and  might  in  no  very  long  time  supersede 
them  all. 

One  important  advantage  which  would  result  from  the  use  of 
coins  like  those  here  suggested  would  be  that  they  would  be  instru- 
mental in  fixing  in  the  minds  of  the  people  the  idea  of  intrin- 
sic value  as  an  essential  quality  of  money,  and  in  eradicating  the 
pernicious  notion  which  seems  to  have  become  so  popular,  and 
which  a no  less  distinguished  man  than  Mr.  Cernuschi  has  dis- 
tinctly avowed,  that  “money  is  an  artificial  value  created  by 
law.”  It  is  to  the  prevalence  of  this  mischievous  delusion  that 
most  of  the  great  flood  of  financial  fallacies  which  have  deluged 
the  nations  of  the  earth  in  modern  times,  leaving  behind  them 
only  disaster  and  ruin,  have  been  mainly  owing. 

The  scheme  here  suggested  is  not  unsupported  by  authorities 
entitled  to  respect.  It  was  advocated  as  the  basis  of  an  inter- 
national coinage  by  Michel  Chevalier,  the  well-known  and 
highly  distinguished  senator  and  public  economist  of  France, 
more  than  ten  years  ago.  It  was  proposed  in  substance  for  a 
similar  purpose  to  the  Seventh  Statistical  Congress,  held  at  the 
Hague  in  1869,  by  the  eminent  statistician  Dr.  Farr,  delegate 
from  Great  Britain.  It  has  been  recommended  in  formal  reso- 
lutions adopted  by  the  American  Metrological  Society  and  by 
the  American  Social  Science  Association,  and  it  has  had  the  ap- 
proval of  many  men  of  sound  judgment  and  large  experience  in 
financial  matters. 

Its  adoption  by  the  nations  would  settle  at  once  and  forever 
the  vexed  silver  question.  And  if  it  is  true,  as  has  been  main- 
tained, that  the  relation  of  value  between  the  precious  metals, 
when  not  disturbed  by  legislation  prejudicial  to  either,  is  one  of 
the  most  stable  known  to  human  affairs,  this  relation,  in  the  free 
play  of  exchanges,  will  soon  fix  itself  with  an  exactness  which 
no  arbitrary  rule  of  statute  law  can  possibly  attain  ; and  will  re- 


368 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IP. 


main  at  the  point  so  determined,  with  oscillations  practically 
insensible.  If  it  could  be  counted  on  as  among  the  reasonable 
possibilities  that  a proposition  so  judicious  as  this  could  be  the 
outcome  of  the  present  council  of  the  nations,  the  Third  Inter- 
national Monetary  Conference  might  have  the  honor  of  tri- 
umphantly accomplishing  the  object  for  which  the  first  was 
called ; viz.,  that  of  giving  to  the  world  a system  of  universal 
money,  destined,  by  its  simplicity  and  convenience,  soon  to 
supersede  and  obliterate  the  whole  perplexing  multitude  of 
locaL  and  discordant  systems  now  in  existence ; and  in  doing  so 
might  leave  upon  the  page  of  history  a record  far  more  enviable 
than  that  which  now  probably  awaits  it,  of  having  added  one 
more  to  the  innumerable  fruitless  struggles  of  the  past  for  the 
attainment  of  the  unattainable. 


F.  A.  P.  Barnard. 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 


I AM  not  singular  in  holding  that  the  whole  subject  of  causa- 
tion has  become  confused  in  the  minds  of  educated  men, 
including  scientific  men ; and  that  the  time  has  come  for 
reconsidering  it  in  the  light  which  science  now  furnishes.  In 
.our  day  two  or  three  doctrines  have  been  elaborated  which  re- 
quire us  to  revise  (so  I think)  the  statements  made  as  to  cause, 
more  especially  in  its  relation  to  force  and  energy.  It  is  to  be 
understood  that  throughout  this  paper  I refer  to  causation  ob- 
jective, and  not  subjective  ; that  is,  to  causation  as  it  acts  inde- 
pendent of  our  mind  observing  it  (an  ignited  lucifer-match  will 
kindle  a rick  of  hay  whether  we  notice  it  or  not),  and  not  to  the 
special  metaphysical  question  of  ages,  as  to  the  origin  and  nature  of 
our  belief  in  the  relation  of  cause  and  effect.  It  is  further  to  be 
borne  in  mind  that  in  the  body  of  the  article  I speak  exclusively 
of  physical  causation  ; that  is,  of  the  forces  or  activities  of  bodies  ; 
only  towards  the  close  showing  that  there  may  be  mental  or 
spiritual  powers  operating  in  our  world  quite  as  certainly  as 
there  are  physical  forces.  It  has  been  established  that, 

First,  there  is  a duality  or  plurality  in  causation;  that  there 
are  two  or  more  bodies  in  all  causal  action  of  a physical  nature. 
There  were  thinkers  who  had  a glimpse  of  this  doctrine  fro'm  an 
old  date.  Aristotle  spoke  of  evvaiTiov,  which  Hamilton  in 
noticing  it  translates  concause.*  But  the  truth  was  first  clearly 
enunciated  by  Mr.  J.  S.  Mill  in  his  “ Logic”  (B.  IV.  c.  v.)  “ The 

statement  of  the  cause  is  incomplete  unless  in  some  shape  or 
other  we  introduce  all  the  conditions.  A man  takes  mercury, 
goes  out  of  doors  and  catches  cold.  We  say  perhaps  that  the 
cause  of  his  taking  cold  was  exposure  to  the  air.  It  is  clear, 

* Sextus  Pyrrh.  iii.  15,  speaks  of  GvvEKTiua,  dvvairia,  and  dvvspycc  a'iria. 


37° 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  FIE  IV. 


however,  that  his  having  taken  mercury  may  have  been  a neces- 
sary condition  of  his  catching  cold ; and  tho  it  might  consist 
with  usage  to  say  that  the  cause  of  his  attack  was  exposure  to 
the  air,  to  be  accurate  we  ought  to  say  that  the  cause  was  ex- 
posure to  the  air  while  under  the  effect  of  mercury.” 

The  doctrine  had  occurred  to  me  before  I read  Mr.  Mill’s 
“ Logic  but  as  he  published  it  first,  I do  not  claim  any  credit  in 
it.  As  approaching  it,  however,  from  a somewhat  different  direc- 
tion, I believe  I can  make  it  more  explicit  and  comprehensive. 
In  all  physical  action  there  are  two  or  more  bodies,  molecular 
or  molar ; at  the  present  stage  of  science  I ought  to  add  that 
this  body  may  be  the  ether  in  which  the  undulations  of  light 
take  place.  Now  the  cause— by  which  I mean  that  which  invari- 
ably has  produced  the  effect,  and  will  invariably  produce  it — 
consists  in  the  mutual  action  of  two  or  more  bodies;  that  is,  their 
action  on  each  other.  Thus  in  the  case  adduced  by  Mr.  Mill 
the  true  cause  of  the  effect,  the  cold,  was  not  the  air  alone  or 
the  body  alone,  but  the  air  and  the  body  under  mercury.  With- 
out the  concurrence,  or  rather  the  joint  action,  of  the  two,  the 
effect  would  not  have  been  produced.  It  is  the  same  in  all 
other  cases.  A ball  at  rest  is  struck  by  a ball  in  motion  ; the  one 
ball  is  made  to  move,  the  other  has  its  motion  stayed.  The 
cause  consists  of  the  two  balls  in  a certain  state,  and  the  effect 
the  balls  in  another  state.  A picture-frame  falls  from  a wall 
and  breaks  a jar  standing  on  a table  below.  We  say  that  the 
frame,  or  rather  the  fall  of  the  frame,  was  the  cause  of  the  frac- 
ture of  the  jar.  But  the  true  cause,  that  which  forever  will  pro- 
duce the  same  effect,  is  the  frame  falling  with  a certain  momen- 
tum and  the  brittleness  of  the  jar.  Had  the  frame  come  down 
with  less  violence  or  the  jar  been  stronger,  there  might  have 
been  no  breakage.  In  most  cases  of  action  a considerable  num- 
ber, in  some  a vast  number,  and  variety  of  agents  combine  to 
produce  the  result.  Take  the  sprouting  of  a flower  in  spring: 
in  the  cause  there  are  the  increased  heat  and  light  of  the  sun, 
the  state  of  the  plant  in  the  earth,  and  the  state  of  the  soil. 
Without  the  concurrence  of  all  these  the  effect  would  not  be 
produced. 

Secondly , there  is  a duality  or  plurality  in  the  effect.  This  is  a 
further  truth  which  Mr.  Mill  has  not  expounded,  but  which  oc- 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT.  37 1 

curred  to  me  as  I was  thinking  out  the  doctrine  which  Mr.  Mill 
preceded  me  in  unfolding.  It  follows  from  Mr.  Mill’s  doctrine 
when  it  is  properly  understood,  and  seems  to  me  to  be  quite  as 
certain  and  fully  more  important  and  of  wider  range  in  its  applica- 
tions. Thus  in  Mr.  Mill’s  illustration  the  cause  was  the  state  of 
the  atmosphere,  and  the  body  as  affected  by  mercury;  the  effect 
was  the  same  atmosphere  insensibly  changed  in  temperature, 
and  the  body  under  a cold.  In  the  second  case  the  true  cause 
consisted  of  the  two  balls,  one  in  motion  striking  the  other  at 
rest ; the  effect  (which  would  be  forever  produced  by  the  same 
cause)  the  ball  which  was  at  rest  moving  and  the  ball  which  was 
in  motion  at  rest.  In  the  third  case  the  cause  was  the  picture- 
frame  with  a certain  momentum  striking  ajar  of  a certain  struc- 
ture; the  effect  was  the  frame  losing  part  of  its  momentum  and 
the  jar  broken.  In  the  case  of  the  plant  germinating  there  must 
have  been  in  the  effect  changes — it  may  be  incapable  of  meas- 
urement— in  all  the  agents  acting  as  the  causes  in  the  sun’s  heat 
and  light  absorbed  in  the  earth  and  in  the  plant  sprouting. 

Taking  these  views  with  us,  it  may  be  of  great  use  to  have 
appropriate  and  definite  phrases  to  express  them.  The  word 
Cause,  that  which  invariably  produces  the  effect,  should  be  re- 
sefved  for  the  combination  of  agencies  producing  the  result. 
The  cause  of  the  man’s  taking  cold  is  not  merely  the  cold  atmos- 
phere or  his  frame  being  affected  by  mercury,  but  in  the  two 
acting  on  each  other.  The  word  Effect  should  in  like  manner  be 
applied  to  the  combined  result,  and  comprises  the  change  in  the 
air  as  well  as  the  colded  affection  of  the  body.  In  the  other 
illustrative  cases  it  implies  the  movement  of  the  one  ball  and 
the  staying  of  the  other  ; the  loss  of  momentum  in  the'  picture- 
frame  as  well  as  the  breaking  of  the  jar;  and  the  change  in  the 
rays  of  heat  and  light  coming  from  the  sun  as  well  as  the  -germi- 
nating of  the  plant. 

As  causes  are  dual  or  plural,  it  is  proper  to  have  phrases  to 
express  the  parts.  The  law  is  often  stated  that  the  same  cause 
always  produces  the  same  effect  in  the  same  circumstances.  But 
in  order  to  clearness  and  accuracy  it  is  essential  to  specify  what 
are  the  circumstances;  it  is  in  fact  necessary  to  put  them  into  the 
cause,  as  without  them  the  effect  would  not  follow.  In  order  to  the 
germinating  of  the  flower  there  is  not  only  the  state  of  the  plant 


372 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  PIE  IK 


and  soil,  but  the  additional  heat  of  the  sun.  All  the  acting 
parts  may  be  called  agents  or  agencies,  without  specifying  what 
they  are.  They  are  bodies  in  a certain  state  acting  on  other 
bodies. 

Very  often  one  of  these  agents  is  more  important  in  itself,  or 
in  our  estimation,  or  for  our  present  purpose,  than  the  others  ; this 
is  designated  pre-eminently  the  cause,  and  little  or  no  evil  may 
arise  from  this  provided  always  that  it  be  understood  that  this 
agent  needs  one  or  more  co-operating  agents  which  are  parts  of 
the  full  cause.  If  it  be  said  that  the  cold  air  was  the  cause  of  the 
man  being  colded,  it  was  because  his  body  was  disposed  towards 
such  an  issue  by  mercury.  It  is  not  easy,  or  perhaps  even  possible, 
to  lay  down  a rule  as  to  which  of  the  agents  should  be  called  the 
special,  the  main,  or  the  prominent  cause,  for  the  cause  consists 
in  the  mutual  action  of  the  whole.  When  man  is  working  he 
often  calls  in  one  agent  to.  produce  an  intended  effect.  If  he 
wishes  to  kindle  a heap  of  straw,  the  agent  he  attends  to  is  the 
fire  he  applies ; if  he  wishes  a good  crop  from  his  ground,  he 
looks  to  the  manure ; if  he  wishes  to  be  cured  of  a disease,  he 
selects  his  medicine : tho  in  all  such  cases  there  is  need  of  co- 
operation in  the  state  of  the  straw,  or  of  the  ground,  or  of  his 
bodily  frame.  In  nature  there  is  often  one  agent  that  is  par- 
ticularly potent.  When  a tree  is  struck  by  lightning  it  is  the 
electricity  that  is  specially  noticed,  tho  the  structure  of  the  tree 
had  also  to  do  with  the  effect  produced. 

Fixing  on  the  agent  that  is  most  prominent  in  itself  or  in 
our  eyes  as  the  cause  or  special  force  then  co-operating,  that  agent 
may  be  called  the  Occasion.  This  phrase  is  specially  applied  to 
circumstances  which  cast  up  to  call  forth  a power  into  exercise 
or  to  work  with  causes  steadily  operating.  Thus  that  ill-con- 
structed house  fell  on  the  occasion  of  a storm  arising;  I was 
# ** 

prompted  to  write  a letter  to  a friend  by  my  affection  ; but  the 
occasion  was  his  suffering  a severe  loss;  the  two  actually  called 
forth  the  letter.  Malebranche  was  the  philosopher  who  brought 
the  phrase  “occasional  cause’’  into  general  use.  He  represented 
the  will  of  God  as  the  true  cause  of  all  creative  action,  but  the 
volition  of  man  might  be  the  occasion  of  the  forthputting  of  the 
Divine  Power.  Thus  when  I move  my  arm  the  true  cause  is 
the  Divine  Will,  but  my  purpose  is  the  occasional  cause.  In 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 


373 


such  a case  we  may  allowably  give  a prominence  to  the 
Divine  Power,  but  it  should  be  noticed  that  while  one  of  the 
agents  is  the  important  one,  the  other  or  others,  the  action  of 
the  brain  and  nerves,  are  necessary  to  the  production  of  the  pre- 
cise consequence,  which  will  not  follow  without  the  co-operation. 

We  are  thus  enabled  to  give  a philosophical  explanation  of 
what  is  meant,  or  rather  what  should  be  meant,  by  Condition,  a 
phrase  so  often  used  vaguely  and  illegitimately  in  the  present 
day  in  its  application  to  physical  operation.  In  order  to  be  rid 
of  an  agent  or  to  drive  it  into  a corner  they  say  it  is  simply  a 
condition.  In  order  to  the  production  of  a given  effect  a cer- 
tain agent  is  fixed  on  as  producing  an  end,  the  other  or  others 
are  represented  as  simply  conditions.  As  proving  design  we 
show  that  animals  with  a stomach  for  digesting  flesh  have  also 
claws  and  strong  muscles  to  catch  and  hold  their  prey.  But  an 
attempt  is  made  to  do  away  with  the  force  of  the  argument  by 
urging  that  these  adjuncts  are  merely  the  conditions  of  the  ma- 
chine working.  But  properly  understood  the  argument  lies  in 
the  circumstance  that  the  co-operating  conditions  have  met. 
The  presence  of  strings  in  a harp  is  a condition  of  it  producing 
music,  but  the  evidence  of  design  is  in  the  presence  and  com- 
bination of  the  necessary  strings. 

We  may  legitimately  and  conveniently  use  such  phrases  pro- 
vided we  understand  them  ourselves  and  let  our  readers  or  hear- 
ers understand  what  we  mean  by  them.  But  it  should  be 
distinctly  explained  that  all  the  agents  acting,  whether  circum- 
stances, occasions,  or  conditions,  constitute  the  cause  without 
which  the  effect  would  not  follow. 

It  is  needful  to  make  like  explanations  and  come  to  the  same 
understanding  as  to  the  Effect.  In  all  cases  of  physical  action 
the  effect  is  also  dual  or  plural ; it  consists  of  two  or  more  agents 
changed — I hope  to  show  the  same  agents  as  are  in  the  cause. 
These  constitute  what  has  been,  and  what  will  always  be,  pro- 
duced by  the  cause.  But  it  often  happens  that  a special  end  is 
contemplated  when  we  set  an  agent  or  agencies  aworking ; and 
when  this  is  effected  it  is  regarded  as  the  proper  or  the  only 
effect.  But  there  may  be  other  consequences  which  we  did  not 
consider  or  look  for,  or  which  we  regard  as  minor  or  irrelevant 
ones.  We  wish  for  a shower  to  refresh  the  ground  ; as  it  falls  it 
25 


374 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


accomplishes  that  end,  but  it  may  also  so  swell  a stream  that  it 
works  destruction  as  it  overflows  its  banks.  A new  machine  is 
invented  which  produces  a greater  amount  of  work,  but  it 
throws  a number  of  people,  who  followed  the  old  methods,  out 
of  employment.  It  is  desirable  to  have  a phrase  to  denote  these 
secondary  effects,  as  they  are  regarded;  and  they  may  be  described 
as  Concomitants , or  more  expressly  as  Incidents  or  Incidentals.  Per- 
haps some  would  call  them  Accidents,  and  they  may  be  so  called 
as  they  were  not  intended,  as  when  one  fires  an  overcharged  gun 
and  is  wounded  by  its  striking  backward.  But  these  accidents 
are  quite  as  much  caused  by  the  agents  as  the  others  that  were 
expected.  In  all  cases  the  effect  properly  understood  consists 
of  the  whole  of  the  agents  that  have  been  acting  put  in  a new 
state.  Any  one  who  sets  new  agencies  agoing,  say  starting  a 
new  trade  or  passing  a new  law,  is  bound  to  look  not  merely  to 
one  but  all  the  consequences  that  must  follow. 

Thirdly , there  is  the  grand  doctrine  established  in  our  day  of 
the  Conservation  of  Energy.  It  has  long  been  known  and  ac- 
knowledged that  the  sum  of  matter  in  the  cosmos  is  always  one 
and  the  same.  We  burn  a piece  of  paper  and  it  disappears  from 
our  view,  but  is  not  annihilated;  one  portion  of  the  matter  has 
gone  down  in  ashes,  the  other  has  gone  up  in  smoke,  and  if  we 
could  bring  the  scattered  particles  together  they  would  con- 
stitute the  original  paper.  It  has  been  established  in  our  day 
that  the  same  is  true  of  the  energy  in  matter.  This  doctrine 
was  anticipated  by  Leibnitz  and  established  in  our  day  by 
Meyer,  by  Joule,  Grove,  and  others.  According  to  this  doc- 
trine the  sum  of  energy,  actual  and  potential,  in  exercise  or 
ready  to  be  exercised,  is  always  one  and  the  same.  It  cannot  be 
increased  and  it  cannot  be  diminished  by  any  human,  indeed  by 
any  mundane,  agency.  When  any  portion  of  it  leaves  one  body 
it  enters  into  another.  The  sum  of  energy  in  the  two  balls 
have  in  them  the  same  amount  of  energy  before  they  strike 
and  after  they  strike.  When  the  energy  disappears  in  one  form, 
say  in  mechanical  force  moving  a mass,  it  appears  in  another,  say 
in  heat,  which  is  molecular  motion.  But  the  sum  is  always  one 
and  the  same. 

It  is  an  integrant  part  of  this  doctrine  that  the  physical 
forces  are  all  correlated,  a truth  which  has  been  beautifully  ex- 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 


375 


pounded  by  Grove.  The  energy  may  take  various  forms,  say  the 
purely  mechanical,  the  chemical,  the  electric,  the  magnetic. 
These  forms  are  capable  of  being  transmitted  into  each  other, 
and  this  in  definite  quantity,  so  much  mechanical  force  into  so 
much  chemical  force,  which  chemical  force  may  be  reconverted 
into  the  mechanical.  This  shows  the  whole  physical  forces  of 
our  cosmos  to  be  correlated  and  capable  of  being  transmitted  in- 
to one  another;  the  sum  always  remaining  the  same. 

It  may  be  difficult  to  point  out  the  full  relation  between  these 
three  doctrines  which  I hold  to  be  severally  established.  But 
there  is  no  inconsistency  between  them.  Perhaps  the  full  doc- 
trine may  be  so  stated  as  to  embrace  all  the  three  and  make  them 
aspects  of  one  grand  truth.  Our  cosmos  may,  as  the  Pythagoreans 
supposed,  be  like  a closed  globe  with  an  immensely  large  but 
definite  number  of  bodies  in  it.  Each  of  these  bodies  possesses  a 
certain  measure  of  physical  force  or  forces.  These  act  and  react 
upon  each  other,  producing  all  the  activity,  all  the  movement,  in 
our  world.  The  bodies  act  on  each  other,  forming  a cause.  In 
doing  so  they  modify  each  other,  and  the  result  is  the  effect. 
Meanwhile  the  sum  of  matter  and  the  sum  of  the  forces  in  the 
bodies  continue  one  and  the  same,  and  both  are  incapable  of 
increase  or  diminution.  This  is  at  least  an  intelligible  enough 
doctrine,  and  embraces  the  three  truths  which  have  been  separa- 
tely stated,  and  seems  in  perfect  consistency  with  all  that  has 
been  established  in  regard  both  to  the  persistence  of  matter  and 
the  persistence  of  energy,  as  Herbert  Spencer  calls  it. 

Meanwhile  the  conservation  of  energy  may  be  regarded  as 
an  established  doctrine.  Savans  do  indeed  continue  to  assert 
that  some  of  the  most  eminent  among  themselves  do  not  under- 
stand it,  or  have  not  expressed  it  properly,  or  have  illegitimately 
applied  it.  But  it  is  universally  admitted  that  the  doctrine  is  a 
true  and  an  all-important  one. 

But  let  us  properly  understand  and  explain  it  and  keep  it 
within  its  proper  limits.  It  will  be  admitted  by  all  at  once  that 
we  are  not  entitled  to  affirm  that  the  law  extends  beyond  our 
cosmos  or  knowable  universe.  For  anything  we  know  there 
may  be  other  worlds  beyond  our  world,  and  we  have  no  right  to  , 
say  that  in  these  worlds  there  is  only  a definite  amount  of  en- 
ergy which  cannot  be  increased  or  diminished.  God  may,  or 


376 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


may  not,  be  creating  suns  or  earths  or  living  beings  beyond  our 
ken  and  altogether  beyond  our  science.  The  doctrine  of  the 
conservation  of  energy,  as  I understand,  holds  only  on  the  sup- 
position that  our  cosmos  is  like  a closed  globe.  It  is  conceivable 
that  our  world  may  not  be  so  closed  in  ; that  the  dissipated  heat 
which  is  passing  into  space  may  travel  into  other  worlds  and 
influence  them  without  our  being  able  to  notice  it. 

This  restriction  of  the  doctrine  is  so  obvious  that  it  is  scarce- 
ly worth  noticing  it.  But  there  are  other  limitations  which  it  is 
of  vast  moment  to  bring  into  prominence,  as  they  are  being 
overlooked  by  some  of  our  scientific  men.  There  is  clear  evi- 
dence that  there  are  other  potences  or  powers  in  nature  besides 
the  mechanical  or  physical  forces.  It  is  not  proven  that  the 
doctrine  of  the  conservation  of  energy  applies  to  these. 

Take  Life.  So  far  as  I understand  him,  Herbert  Spencer 
seems  inclined  to  hold  that  the  doctrine  applies  to  all  the  powers 
in  the  world,  even  to  the  vital  and  mental ; indeed,  he  seems  in- 
capable of  distinguishing  between  nerve  force  and  mental  force. 
But  he  brings  no  proof  that  physical  force  and  psychical  force 
can  be  transmuted  into  each  other.  The  language  of  most  of  our 
scientific  speculators  is  hesitating.  Huxley  and  Tyndall  reso- 
lutely maintain  that  there  is  no  proof  that  living  beings  can  pro- 
ceed from  non-living.  Darwin  calls  in  three  or  four  live  germs, 
which  he  ascribes  to  God,  before  he  can  account  for  the  develop- 
ment of  vegetable  and  animal  life.  I have  observed  that  those  who 
reject  a separate  life  or  vital  force  are  obliged  to  bring  it  in  un- 
der another  form.  Thus  Darwin  calls  in  a pangenesis  pervading 
organic  nature,  and  Spencer  has  physiological  units  which  play 
an  important  part  in  generation  and  heredity,  and  these  are  cer- 
tainly vital  forces.  Then  the  arguments  and  experiments  of 
Beale  have  to  be  met,  and  they  have  not  yet  been  met  by  those 
who  would  deny  the  existence  of  a vital  potency  of  some  kind 
different  from  mechanical  force. 

But  there  are  other  agents  in  our  world  more  clearly  distin- 
guished from  the  physical  forces  than  the  vital  powers  ar_e.  I 
refer  to  the  psychical  or  mental ; to  thoset  of  which  we  are  con- 
scious, which  in  fact  we  know  immediately ; such  as  our  sense 
perceptions,  our  memories,  our  judgments,  our  reasonings,  our 
desires,  our  emotions,  our  resolves.  These  we  know  as  directly 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 


377 


and  clearly  as  we  know  the  affections  of  body,  such  as  extension 
and  resistance,  and  we  have  quite  as  good  evidence  of  the  exist- 
ence of  the  one  as  of  the  other.  Are  these  mental  powers  to  be 
included  in  the  physical  forces  which  can  neither  be  increased  nor 
diminished  ? Can  the  physical  forces  be  transmuted  into  the 
mental,  say  mechanical,  or  the  chemical  into  thoughts,  inclina- 
tions, and  volitions?  Nearly  every  scientific  man  in  the  present 
day  admits,  nay,  maintains,  that  there  is  no  proof  of  this.  Many 
affirm  that  they  cannot  even  conceive  it  to  be  so.  Tyndall,  no 
doubt,  in  his  Belfast  address  hastened  on  to  a high  vaporous 
generalization,  and  declared  that  it  looked  as  if  all  things  could 
be  brought  under  the  potency  of  matter  ; in  the  mean  time  declar- 
ing, however,  that  he  could  not  conceive  how  matter  could  pro- 
duce mind,  or  mind  matter.  Mr.  Fiske  talks  of  our  now  needing 
to  assume  only  one  universal  assumption,  “ the  principle  of  con- 
tinuity, the  uniformity  of  nature,  the  persistence  of  force,  or  the 
law  of  causation  but  then  he  is  obliged  to  add  that  “ in  no 
scientific  sense  is  thought  the  product  of  molecular  movement, 
and  that  the  progress  of  modern  discovery  (correlation),  so  far 
from  bridging  over  the  chasm  between  mind  and  matter,  tends 
rather  to  exhibit  the  distinction  between  them  as  absolute.” 
The  contradiction  is  here  evident,  and  has  been  pointed  out  by 
scientific  men  ; but  I need  not  dwell  upon  it,  my  object  being 
simply  to  show  that  thoughts  and  mental  affections  have  not 
yet  been  reduced  to  physical  forces.  No  doubt  mind  and  body 
do  so  far  affect  each  other.  If  a person  is  told  that  his  dearest 
friend  has  died  suddenly,  his  pulse  will  be  apt  to  rise.  Prof. 
Barker  attaches  a great  importance  to  an  experiment  of  a person 
first  reading  easy  English,  when  his  pulse  was  not  affected, 
then  reading  Greek,  when  it  rose  several  degrees.  Such  cases, 
and  they  might  be  multiplied  indefinitely,  show  that  mental 
thoughts  and  feelings  do  affect  the  brain-action,  but  they'do  not 
show  that  they  add  to  or  diminish  the  physical  forces  in  the 
brain,  or  that  the  mental  feeling  or  thought  has  been  transmuted 
into  a movement  of  the  pulse.  A man  standing  by  a stream 
pushes  a big  stone  in  the  water  aside  and  the  stream  flows  a lit- 
tle more  rapidly  for  a minute  or  two ; but  he  has  not  thereby 
added  to  the  quantity  of  water.  Just  as  little  does  mental 


378 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


action,  reasoning  or  feeling,  add  to  or  diminish  the  amount,  of 
physical  force  in  the  cerebro-spinal  mass. 

There  is  no  evidence,  but  the  very  opposite,  that  our  mental 
actions  are  identical  or  correlative  with  bodily  motions  or  activi- 
ties of  any  kind.  Take  as  example,  the  discoveries  of  science, 
the  reasonings  of  mathematicians,  the  visions  of  poets,  the  pene- 
tration of  such  philosophers  as  Aristotle,  the  ardor  of  the  patriot, 
the  beatific  vision  of  the  Christian,  the  sacrifices  made  by  the 
poor  for  honor  and  honesty’s  sake/  What  savant  will  estimate 
for  us  in  quantitative  expressions  of  physics  or  chemistry  the 
depth  of  affection  in  the  mother’s  bosom  when  she  incurs  death 
herself  to  save  her  son,  or  the  height  of  genius  reached  by  Shake- 
speare when  he  conceived  Hamlet  or  Lady  Macbeth  ? There  is 
no  one  proper  quality  of  matter,  such  as  the  occupation  of  space, 
or  resistance,  or  elasticity,  that  can  be  predicated  of  thoughts  or 
affections.  There  is  no  one  quality  of  mind,  such  as  perception, 
thought,  reasoning,  or  love,  that  can  be  applied  to  this  table  or 
that  chair.  The  instrument  has  not  yet  been  invented  that  can 
weigh  or  measure  our  intellectual  or  voluntary  operations. 
When  a tree  dies  it  carries  into  the  ground  not  only  the  parti- 
cles of  matter  which  composed  it,  but  the  forces  in  the  tree  to 
add  to  the  forces  in  the  ground.  It  is  the  same  with  the  body 
of  brute  or  of  man  when  it  is  buried,  it  carries  with  it  into  the 
grave  all  the  physical  forces;  but  were  there  any  new  physical 
forces  added  to  the  earth  when  Plato,  Milton,  Bacon,  or  New- 
ton died  ? 

It  thus  appears  that  in  the  very  midst  of  the  physical  forces 
and  their  correlations  there  may  be  other  operations,  mental  or 
spiritual,  and  against  this  science  has  and  can  have  nothing  to 
say.  I mean  to  refer  to  these  farther  on  in  the  article.  Mean- 
while let  us  look  at  the  physical  forces  acting  according  to  the 
principles  laid  down. 

i.  Without  attempting  to  explain  their  exact  nature,  or  to 
enumerate  them,  let  us  designate  the  physical  agencies  operat- 
ing in  our  world  by  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  and  inquire  how 
they  act.  A ball  at  rest  is  struck  by  a ball  in  motion.  Let  us 
call  the  ball  at  rest  A,  and  the  ball  in  motion  B.  The  two  con- 
stitute the  cause,  which  is 

The  cause  A B. 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 


379 


As  they  act  the  effect  follows : A moves  while  B’s  motion  is 
stayed,  and  as  the  effect  we  have  bodies  changed, 

The  effect  A'  B/. 

But  in  its  motion  A strikes  C,  and  B is  struck  by  D,  and  we  have 
Two  causes  A'C  and  B'D, 

and  the 

Double  effect  A2C'  and  BJD'. 

But  these  agents  come  to  act  on  other  agents,  E,  F,  G,  H,  and 
we  have  a 

Complex  result,  A3E,  C2F,  B3G,  D2H. 

On  the  supposition  that  these  agencies  are  in  a closed  ball 
and  act  on  each  other  and  on  nothing  else,  the  sum  of  energy 
would  be  one  and  the  same,  while  each  body  might  be  gaining 
or  losing  energy,  one  or  both. 

In  the  first  action  of  A B,  A gains  energy  from  B and  moves, 
while  B loses  what  energy  it  gives  and  is  stayed.  But  A going 
through  the  air  and  over  a surface  loses  the  energy  it  gained, 
imparting  it  to  the  air  and  surface,  and  comes  to  rest ; and  B is 
struck  by  D and  gets  the  energy  it  has  lost  and  moves.  There 
is  thus  a continual  action  kept  up  among  the  bodies.  The  en- 
ergy in  each  body  varies,  it  may  be  from  moment  to  moment, 
but  the  amount  among  all  the  bodies  continues  the  same. 

2.  We  see  that  the  effects  come  to  act  as  causes.  Thus  if 
we  represent  the  cause  as  A B and  the  effect  as  A'B',  we  see  that 
each  of  the  agencies  A and  B is  ready  to  act  always  when  com- 
bined with  some  other  agency,  such  as  C and  D.  These  last 
acting  as  causes  become  effects  which  may  again  become  causes 
in  combination  with  other  or  the  same  things.  The  conserva- 
tion of  energy  thus  keeps  the  world  the  same  through  ages, 
while  these  constant  changes  give  it  its  activity:  the  one  as  it 
were  constituting  an  unchanging  ocean,  the  other  the  tides  that 
agitate  it.  It  is  thus,  as  the  Eleatics  held,  that  everything  is  fixed 
and  immutable,  but  equally  true,  as  Heraclitus  and  the  cpiXoao- 
cpoi  psovre?  taught,  that  everything  is  becoming. 

3.  We  see  that  in  physical  nature  (and  I speak  of  no  other) 
.the  effect  consists  of  the  agencies  which  have  been  the  causes 
appearing  in  a new  form.  When  the  cause  is  A B,  the  effect  is 
A'B'.  When  the  cause  is  more  complex,  A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F,  G,  H, 
all  of  these  agencies  are  changed  or  modified  ; and  these  as 


380 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  JV. 


changed  constitute  the  effect  that  will  forever  follow  the  cause. 
This  makes  all  physical  causation  a kind  of  evolution  or  devel- 
opment, a favorite  doctrine  with  certain  theosophists  who  de- 
rived all  mundane  things  from  other  mundane  things,  and  all 
things  from  God.  This  doctrine  was  apprehended  and  expressed 
in  a mystical  way,  but  contains  an  important  truth  which  can  be 
separated  from  the  error  with  which  it  was  associated  and  put 
in  a scientific  form.  It  is  not  that  the  effect  emanates  from  the 
cause ; but  the  effect  consists  in  the  agencies  constituting  the 
cause  being  put  in  a new  state. 

4.  It  is  altogether  wrong  to  represent  with  Hume  the  rela- 
tion of  cause  and  effect  as  being  merely  or  essentially  invariable 
antecedence  and  consequence.  It  is  something  deeper  in  the 
very  nature  of  things.  The  effect  which  is  always  dual  or  plural 
consists  of  the  things  that  constituted  the  cause  in  a new  condi- 
tion. There  is  and  always  must  be  invariable  and  unconditional 
antecedence  and  consequence,  but  prior  to  this  and  producing 
this  there  is  the  conservation  or  persistence  of  force  which 
comes  out  from  the  agents  acting  as  the  causes,  goes  into  the 
effect,  and  thus  necessitates  antecedence  and  consequence. 

5.  We  see  what  is  the  inertia  of  body.  Newton’s  First  Law  of 
Motion  follows  from  the  principles  we  have  laid  down.  A body 
at  rest  will  continue  at  rest  forever  unless  it  is  acted  on  by  some 
other  body ; a body  in  motion  will  continue  in  motion  in  the 
same  straight  line  unless  stayed  or  deflected  by  some  other  body. 
All  this  is  a corollary  from  the  principle  that  causal  action  is  the 
action  of  two  bodies,  and  that  a body  will  not  act  unless  acted 
on  by  some  other  body. 

6.  We  see  the  nature  of  the  law  of  action  and  reaction.  A 
body  will  not  act  unless  there  is  some  other  body  acting  on  it. 
Under  this  view  matter  is  passive.  It  acts  only  so  far  as  it  is 
acted  on.  In  another  sense  it  is  active.  One  body  acts  on 
another  body  ; thus  two  bodies  are  A and  B,  and  A and  B are 
both  changed.  A at  rest  moves  and  B is  stayed.  What  B loses 
in  being  stayed,  A gains  and  moves.  This  gives  us  Newton’s 
Third  Law  of  Motion,  that  Action  is  always  equal  to  and  the 
opposite  of  Reaction.  B gives  what  it  loses  to  A,  but  the  sum 
of  energy  of  the  two  is  the  same  after  action  as  before  action. 
It  follows  that  the  energy  given  to  A is  equal  to  that  lost  by  B. 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT.  381 

7.  It  is  sometimes  stated  that  the  same  effect  may  be  pro- 
duced by  different  causes.  This  is  not  true  or  it  is  true  accord- 
ing as  we  understand  it.  A jar  may  be  broken  by  a picture 
falling  on  it,  but  it  may  also  be  broken  by  a stone  flung  at  it. 
The  breaking  of  the  jar  may  thus  be  produced  by  two  different 
processes.  But  in  both  cases  the  breaking  of  the  jar  is  only  part 
of  the  effect.  The  full  effect  in  the  one  case  was  the  jar  broken 
and  the  picture  stayed ; in  the  other,  the  jar  broken  with  the 
stone  stayed. 

8.  It  is  often  said  that  great  effects  follow  from  small  causes. 
A cow  kicks  a kerosene-lamp,  and  first  the  shed  is  ignited  and 
then  the  half  of  a great  city  is  burned.  The  British  Government 
denies  Colonial  America  a comparatively  small  claim  ; and  a 
revolution  breaks  forth  which  separates  Great  Britain  and  the 
United  States  forever.  But  it  is  not  quite  correct,  it  is  not  the 
full  truth,  to  say  that  one  cause  did  all  this.  In  all  such  cases 
there  is  a co-operation  and  succession  of  various  causes.  The 
fire  is  carried  on  by  there  being  all  around  inflammable  materials 
to  propagate  it,  and  the  separation  of  the  countries  was  really 
produced  by  a widespread  discontent.  In  like  manner  a mighty 
agency  may  often  issue  in  a very  insignificant  effect,  because 
there  are  no  conspiring  powers. 

Finally,  we  see  what  a complexity  there  is  in  the  activities  in 
our  world.  There  are  two  or  commonly  more  agents  in  every 
act  of  causation,  two  or  commonly  more  in  all  effectuation. 
What  a variety  of  powers  at  work  in  the  great  natural  occur- 
rences, say  in  the  seasons,  say  in  the  production  of  spring,  with 
its  increased  heat,  its  buds  and  leaves  and  blossoms ! What  a 
complication  in  the  production  of  the  great  epochs  of  history : 
in  the  spread  of  Christianity ; in  the  revival  of  learning  in 
the  fifteenth  century  ; in  the  great  Reformation;  in  the  English. 
American,  and  French  revolutions!  This  complexity  is  vastly 
increased  by  the  circumstances  that  the  agents  in  combination 
possess  properties  which  they  did  not  exhibit  in  their  separate 
state.  Water  exercises  qualities  which  did  not  appear  in  the 
separate  action  of  the  oxygen  and  hydrogen.  When  combined 
in  living  plants  and  animals  the  elements  exhibit  powers,  such  as 
absorption  and  assimilation,  not  shown  by  the  oxygen,  hydrogen, 
carbon,  and  ammonia.  I feel  that  there  is  need  in  this  compli- 


382 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


cation  of  a regulating  power  to  produce  order  and  beneficence. 
.Without  this  all  these  powers  might  work  capriciously  and  in- 
juriously and  have  formed  only  powers  of  evil,  mosquitoes, 
serpents,  flaming  meteors  and  burning  worlds,  destructive 
machines,  and  pestiferous  creatures  devouring  each  other  and 
arresting  all  forms  of  beauty  and  beneficence,  and  yet  incapable 
of  dying.  We  find  instead  those  millions  of  agencies  combining 
to  accomplish  good  and  benign  ends.  All  this  seems  to  me  to 
show  that  there  has  been  a mind  disposing  and  a wisdom  guid- 
ing them. 

To  prove  this  it  is  not  necessary  that  we  should  settle  what 
are  the  original  constituents  of  the  universe:  some  suppose 
them  to  be  atoms,  some  represent  them  as  centres  of  force, 
some  will  allow  them  to  be  only  centres  of  motion.  Some  of  our 
most  distinguished  physicists,  such  as  Helmholtz  and  William 
Thomson,  are  favoring  the  idea  of  Descartes,  somewhat  modified, 
that  they  are  vortices  in  perpetual  whirl.  Whatever  they  be, 
they  need  a wise  and  good  disposal  to  make  them  perform 
bountiful  ends.  I discover  traces  in  nature  of  various  kinds  of 
design. 

I.  There  are  concurrences  of  agents  to  accomplish  special 
beneficent  ends.  Take  the  eye.  What  a combination  of  inde- 
pendent agencies  before  we  can  see  the  smile  on  that  friend’s 
face ! There  are  vibrations  coming  from  the  sun  ninety  millions 
of  miles  away ; these  have  passed  at  various  rates  through  an 
ether,  they  touch  and  are  reflected  from  the  countenance;  some 
of  them  reach  the  corner  of  an  optical  instrument  called  the  eye; 
they  go  through,  an  aqueous  humor,  thence  through  the  gate- 
way of  iris  into  the  crystalline  lens  ; they  are  there  refracted  and 
pass  through  the  aqueous  humors  to  the  retina,  where  they  im- 
pact on  thousands  of  rods  and  cones,  and  are  sent  on  to  the 
optic-nerve  and  the  brain ; and  we  now  see  the  smiles  on  our 
mother’s  face.  Let  any  one  of  these  be  absent  or  fail,  and  na- 
ture would  remain  forever  in  darkness.  Take  the  ear.  A sister 
utters  a word,  a vibration  is  started,  it  reaches  our  ear,  is  col- 
lected by  the  outer  ear  and  knocks  on  the  tympanum,  is  propa- 
gated into  the  middle-ear,  where  it  sets  in  motion  the  hammer 
and  the  anvil  and  the  stirrup,  thence  it  penetrates  into  the  inner 
ear,  where  it  vibrates  through  a liquid,  affects  the  thousand  and 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT.  383 

more  organs  of  Corti,  is  sent  round  the  semicircular  canals  into 
the  cochlea,  on  through  the  auditory  nerve  into  the  brain ; the 
silence  is  broken,  and  we  are  cheered  by  a voice  of  love. 

II.  We  may  discover  a plan  and  purpose  in  development  as  it  is 
carried  on  in  our  world.  Development  is  evidently  not  a simple 
power  in  nature  like  mechanical  force  or  chemical  affinity  or 
gravitation.  It  is  clear  that  there  is  a vast,  an  incalculable 
number  and  variety  of  agencies  in  the  process,  whether  it  be  the 
development  of  the  plant  from  its  seed,  of  the  bird  from  the 
egg,  of  the  horse  from  its  dam,  of  the  threshing-machine  from 
the  flail,  of  the  reaping-machine  from  the  reaping-hook,  of  our 
present  kitchen  utensils  from  those  used  by  our  grandmother. 

Development  is  essentially  a combination  of  causes  fulfilling 
a purpose.  It  is  an  organized  causation  for  ends,  a corporation 
of  causes  for  mutual  action:  It  has  been  admitted  for  ages  that 

causation  works  through  all  nature  ; not  only  divine  causation, 
the  source  of  the  whole,  but  physical  causation;  that  is, the  or- 
dinary occurrences  of  nature  are  all  produced  by  agents  working 
causally  ; in  other  words,  fire  burns,  light  shines,  and  the  earth 
spins  round  its  axis  and  rotates  round  the  sun,  and  the  conse- 
quence is  that  we  have  heat  and  light  and  the  beneficent  seasons. 
Men  of  enlarged  minds  do  now  see  and  acknowledge  that  in  the 
doctrine  of  causation,  in  the  doctrine  of  God  acting  everywhere 
through  second  causes,  there  is  nothing  irreligious.  On  the  con- 
trary, the  circumstances  that  God  proceeds  according  to  laws  is 
evidently  for  the  benefit  of  man,  who  can  thus  from  the  past 
anticipate  the  future  and  prepare  himself  for  it.  On  the  same 
principle  I hold  that  there  is  nothing  irreligious  in  development, 
which  is  just  a form  of  causation.  It  was  my  privilege  in  my 
earliest  published  work  to  justify  God’s  method  of  procedure  by 
natural  law.  I reckon  it  a like  privilege  in  my  declining  life  to 
defend  God’s  method  of  action  by  development,  by  bringing  the 
present  out  of  the  past. 

There  is  an  arranged  combination  necessary  to  produce  evo- 
lution. The  present  is  evolved  out  of  the  past  and  will  develop 
into  the  future  all  under  an  arrangement.  The  present  is  the 
fruit  of  the  past  and  contains  the  seed  of  the  future.  The  con- 
figuration of  the  earth,  its  hills  and  dales,  its  rivers  and  seas, 
which  determine  the  abodes  and  industries  of  men  and  the 


384 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


bounds  of  their  habitation,  have  been  produced  by  agencies 
which  have  been  working  for  thousands  or  millions  of  years. 
The  plants  now  on  the  earth  are  the  descendants  of  those  crea- 
ted by  God,  and  the  ancestors  of  those  that  are  to  appear  in  the 
coming  ages.  There  is  through  all  times,  as  in  the  year,  a suc- 
cession of  seasons  ; sowing  and  reaping,  sowing  in  order  to  reap, 
and  reaping  what  has  been  sown  in  order  to  its  being  sown 
again.  This  gives  a continuousness,  a consistency,  to  nature 
amidst  all  the  mutations  of  time.  There  is  not  only  a contem- 
poraneous order  in  nature,  there  is  a successive  order.  The 
beginning  leads  to  the  end,  and  the  end  is  the  issue  of  the  begin- 
ning. This  grass  and  grain  and  these  forests  that  cover  the 
ground  have  seed  in  them  which  will  continue  in  undefined  ages 
to  adorn  and  enrich  the  ground.  These  birds  that  sing  among 
the  branches  and  these  cattle  upon  a thousand  hills  will  build 
nests  and  rear  young  to  furnish  nourishment  and  delight  to  our 
children’s  children  in  millennial  ages.  Every  naturalist  has  seen 
a purpose  gained  by  the  nutriment  laid  up  in  the  seed  or  pod  to 
feed  the  young  plant.  I see  a higher  end  accomplished  by  the 
mother  provided  for  the  young  animal.  That  infant  is  not  cast 
forth  into  the  cold  world  unprotected  : it  has  a mother’s  arms  to 
protect  it  and  a mother’s  love  to  fondle  it.  Development  is  not 
an  irreligious  process;  every  one  who  has  been  reared  under  a 
father’s  care  and  a mother’s  love  will  bless  God  for  it. 

“ Evolution,”  says  Herbert  Spencer,  “ is  a change  from  an  in- 
definite, incoherent  homogeneity  to  a definite,  coherent  homo- 
geneity through  continuous  differentiation  and  integration.” 
He  has  sufficient  philosophy  to  refer  all  this  to  a power  supposed 
by  him  to  be  unknown  working  behind  the  known  phenomena. 
A deeper  philosophy  will  discover  a so  far  known  divine  power 
producing  these  effects. 

In  development  there  is  usually  progression.  At  times  there 
is  degeneracy,  chiefly  the  result  of  human  sin,  as  we  see  in  the 
degeneracy  of  the  Indians.  But  as  a whole  there  has  been  an  ad- 
vance in  our  earth  from  age  to  age.  The  tendency  of  animal 
life  is,  upon  the  whole,  upward — from  all-fours  to  the  upright 
position,  in  which  men  can  look  up  to  the  heavens.  Agencies 
have  been  set  agoing  to  produce  these  evidently  intended  ends. 
Causes  that  operated  ages  ago  have  called  in  other  causes  to  co- 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 


385 


operate  with  them,  and  have  thereby  added  to  the  power  and 
riches  of  the  product.  The  geological  changes  have  made  our 
earth  fit  for  the  abode  of  man.  Human  beings  have  taken  the 
places  which  in  earlier  ages  were  handed  over  to  wild  animals. 
There  is  a greater  amount  of  food  produced  on  our  earth  than 
at  any  earlier  stage.  There  has  been,  as  the  ages  rolled  on,  a 
greater  fulness  of  sentient  life  and  a larger  capacity  of  happi- 
ness. The  intellectual  powers  have  been  made  stronger  and 
firmer  like  the  trunk  of  the  tree,  and  the  feelings  like  the  flow- 
ers have  taken  a larger  expansion  and  a richer  color  by  culture. 

I am  inclined  to  see  purposes  in  the  very  forms  of  animals 
and  plants,  and  the  manner  in  which  they  grow  into  their  type; 
while  the  type  ever  advances  as  if  to  realize  an  idea.  Our  roses 
are  all  supposed  to  be  derived  from  the  common  dog-rose,  and  I 
see  a beauty  in  that  rose  as  it  grows  by  the  roadside.  But  I dis- 
cover a higher  manifestation  of  skill  in  the  way  in  which  the 
rose  becomes  more  fully  expanded  in  our  gardens.  God,  who 
rewards  us  for  opening  our  eyes  upon  his  works,  bestows  higher 
gifts  on  those  who  in  love  to  them  bestow  labor  upon  them. 
Dogs,  it  is  said,  have  all  descended  from  some  kind  of  wolf,  and 
I see  a fitness  in  their  primitive  forms  ; but  I discover  a fuller 
development  in  the  shepherd’s  dog  and  the  St.  Bernard  dog 
with  their  wondrous  instincts.  I discover  a fitness  of  parts  in 
the  oldeohippus  which  used  to  tread  with  its  five  toes  on  marshy 
ground ; but  I discover  an  advance  in  the  pleiohippus,  and  still 
higher  perfection  in  the  animal  we  ride  on,  so  useful  and  so 
graceful,  so  agile  and  so  docile. 

III.  I discover  an  end  in  the  manner  in  which  plants  and 
animals  are  produced.  Two  systems  of  development  are  neces- 
sary to  effect  this.  First,  the  tendency  of  every  living  thing  to 
produce  a seed  or  germ.  The  powers  necessary  to  accomplish 
this  are  very  numerous  and  very  complex,  but  all  conspiring  to- 
wards this  one  end,  as  if  it  were  one  of  the  purposes  for  which 
the  plant  was  created.  Secondly,  there  is  the  development  of 
the  plant  and  animal  from  the  seed  or  germ.  This,  too,  implies 
an  immense  combination  of  arranged  elements  and  forces.  It 
looks  excessively  like  an  end  contemplated,  an  idea  to  be  real- 
ized. It  looks  all  the  more  like  this  when  we  notice  that  the 
seed  or  germ  is  after  its  kind  and  produces  a living  being  after 


386 


THE  PRINCE  TON  RE  VIE  IK 


the  same  kind.  There  is  thus  a double  development  in  all  ani- 
mated nature;  we  see  it  in  the  oak  producing  the  acorn,  and  the 
acorn  the  oak.* 

These  are  mainly  operations  of  the  ordinary  physical  forces 
which  are  all  correlated  with  each  other,  needing  only  a dispos- 
ing power.  But  there  are  in  our  cosmos  other  and  higher  pow- 
ers. In  closing  let  us  look  at  these. 

First.  There  is  evidence  of  new  and  these  higher  powers 
appearing  in  the  progress  of  nature.  I have  shown  at  an  earlier 
part  of  this  article  that  in  physical  causation  there  is  merely  a 
changed  state  of  the  agents  acting  as  the  causes.  There  is  no 
power  in  the  effect  which  was  not  in  the  causes.  If  heredity 
has  a gift  committed  to  it,  it  may  transmit  it  from  parent  to  off- 
spring and  from  one  generation  to  another.  But  if  there  be  a 
new  power  appearing,  it  must  be  from  superadded  causes.  But 
there  are  products  in  our  world  which  cannot  be  developed  from 
the  original  elements  or  powers  of  nature. 

Was  there  Life  in  the  original  atom,  or  molecule  formed  of 
the  atoms?  If  not,  how  did  it  come  in  when  the  first  plant  ap- 
peared ? Was  there  sensation  in  the  original  molecule?  If  not, 
what  brought  it  in  when  the  first  animal  had  a feeling  of  pleasure 
or  of  pain  ? Was  there  mind  in  the  first  molecule,  say  a power  of 
perceiving  an  object  out  of  itself  ? Was  there  consciousness  in 
the  first  molecule  or  monad — a consciousness  of  self?  Was 
there  a power  of  comparing  or  judging,  of  discerning  things,  of 
noting  their  agreements  or  differences  ? Had  they  a power 
of  reasoning,  of  inferring  the  unseen  from  the  seen,  of  the  future 
from  the  past?  Were  there  emotions  in  these  first  existences? 
say  a hope  of  continued  life  or  a fear  of  approaching  death? 
Perhaps  they  had  loving  attachments  to  each  other,  perhaps 
they  had  some  morality,  say  a sense  of  justice  in  keeping  their 
own  whirl  and  allowing  to  others  their  rights  and  their  place  in 
this  dance!  Had  they  will  at  the  beginning,  and  a power  of 


I “When  will  apologists  begin  to  perceive  that  the  best  apology  for  the  universe 
would  lie  in  the  belief  that  it  was  not  designed  at  all  ?”  This  is  the  melancholy 
conclusion  reached  by  Mr.  Grant  Allen  in  a review  of  Prof.  Cleeland’s  recent 
work.  Some  are  regretting  that  Mr.  Allen  should  have  become  so  slavish  a fol- 
lower of  Spencer,  and  be  using  his  power  as  a critic  in  the  London  Academy  to 
depreciate  those  who  have  the  courage  to  avow  that  they  see  design  in  nature. 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 


3 »7 


choosing  between  pleasure  and  pain,  between  the  evil  and  the 
good  ? Perhaps  they  had  some  piety,  and  paid  worship  of  the 
silent  sort  to  God  ! 

It  is  needless  to  say  that  there  is  not  even  the  semblance  of 
a proof  of  there  being  any  such  capacities  in  the  original  atoms 
or  force-centres.  If  so,  how  did  they  come  in  ? Take  one  hu- 
man capacity:  how  did  consciousness  come  in?  Herbert 
Spencer,  the  mightiest  of  them,  would  have  us  believe  that  he 
has  answered  the  question,  and  yet  he  has  simply  avoided  it.  In 
his  “ Psychology”  he  is  speaking  of  nerves  for  hundreds  of  pages; 
he  shows  that  in  their  development  there  is  a succession  of  a cer- 
tain kind ; and  adds  simply  that  “ there  must  arise  a conscious- 
ness"! This  is  all  he  condescends  to  say,  bringing  in  no  cause 
or  link  or  connection.  Thus  does  he  slip  over  the  gap— a prac- 
tice not  uncommon  with  this  giant  as  he  marches  on  with  his 
seven-leagued  boots. 

It  is  pertinent  to  ask,  How  did  these  things  come  in?  How 
did  things  without  sensation  come  to  have  sensation?  things 
without  instinct  to  have  instinct?  creatures  without  memory 
to  have  memory?  beings  without  intelligence  to  have  intelli- 
gence? mere  sentient  existence  to  know  the  distinction  between 
good  and  evil?  I 'am  sure  that  when  these  things  appear,  there 
is  something  not  previously  in  the  atom  or  molecule.  All  sober 
thinkers  of  the  day  admit  that  there  is  no  evidence  whatever  in 
experience  or  in  reason  to  show  that  matter  can  produce  mind ; 
that  mechanical  action  can  gender  mental  action ; that  chemi- 
cal action  can  manufacture  consciousness ; that  electric  action 
can  reason,  or  organic  structure  rise  to  the  idea  of  the  good  and 
the  holy.  I argue  according  to  reason  and  experience  that  we 
must  call  in  a power  above  the  original  physical  forces  to  pro- 
duce such  phenomena.  I may  admit  that  a body  may  come  out 
of  another  body  by  the  powers  with  which  the  bodies  are  en- 
dowed ; but  I say  that  a sensitive,  intelligent,  moral  discerning 
soul  cannot  proceed  from  the  elements  of  matter.  New  powers 
have  undoubtedly  come  in  when  consciousness  and  understand- 
ing and  will  begin  to  act.  They  may  come  according  to  laws  not 
yet  discovered,  but  they  are  the  laws  of  the  Supreme  Lawgiver. 

I can  find  no  more  satisfactory  account  of  this  process  than 
that  in  the  opening  of  Genesis,  where  new  manifestations  appear 


388 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


in  successive  days  or  epochs,  the  whole  culminating  in  man  in 
the  image  of  God.  “ Howbeit  that  was  not  first  which  is  spiritual 
\nvtV)jL<xxni6v\, , but  that  which  is  natural  [tpvxiKOv]  ; and  after- 
ward that  which  is  spiritual.”  “And  so  it  is  written,  the  first 
man  was  made  a living  soul;  the  second  Adam  was  made  a 
quickening  spirit”  (i  Cor.  xv.  44-46) — where  we  may  mark  the 
advancement  from  the  merely  living  soul  ( ipvxrjv  Zdotjav)  to  the 
quickening  spirit  ( Ttrsf-ia  <? ooo7toiovv  ). 

Secondly.  There  are  mental  and  spiritual  powers  working  in 
our  world.  Of  the  operations  of  the  mental  powers  we  are  con- 
scious. I am  quite  as  certain  that  I have  thoughts  and  wishes 
as  that  I have  hands  and  feet.  But  not  only  are  there  psychical 
acts,  there  may  be  spiritual  powers.  I am  aware  that  some  of 
our  savans  will  turn  away  from  such  an  idea  not  only  with  un- 
belief, but  with  scorn,  declaring  it  to  be  inconsistent  with  the 
uniformity  of  nature,  with  all  history,  and  with  all  science.  But 
this  arises  not  from  the  comprehension  of  their  views,  but 
from  fixing  their  eyes  so  exclusively  on  their  own  favorite  sub- 
jects that  they  do  not  see  others  lying  alongside  of  them  possi- 
bly higher  and  more  important. 

Earnest  men  in  all  ages  have  been  seeking  after  intercourse 
with  God.  They  have  prayed  in  the  belief  that  there  may  be 
One  to  hear  them,  and  they  have  expected  an  answer.  They  do 
not  allow  to  you  that  God  has  so  shut  himself  out  from  his 
own  world  that  he  cannot  act  on  it.  They  deny  that  there  is 
any  proof  that  our  petitions  are  so  bound  to  the  earth  by  gravity 
that  they  cannot  mount  upward  and  reach  the  ear  of  their  heav- 
enly Father,  who  is  felt  as  pitying  them.  They  believe  that 
their  spirits  can  hold  communion  with  God,  who  is  a Spirit,  quite 
as  certainly  as  our  earth  can  act  on  the  sun  and  the  sun  on  the 
earth.  They  have  faith  that  there  are  wider  and  more  intimate 
unions  than  those  produced  by  the  attraction  which  all  matter 
has  for  other  matter.  They  are  sure  that  all  holy  intelligences 
throughout  the  universe  are  in  union  with  the  Holy  God. 

Christians  believe  that  they  live  under  the  dispensation  of 
the  Spirit.  We  have  seen  that  there  have  been  in  the  history 
of  our  world  times  or  seasons  in  which  new  powers,  apparently 
always  advanced  powers,  appeared.  There  was  a time  in  which 
life  appeared,  in  which  consciousness  appeared,  in  which  intelli- 


ON  CAUSATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT. 


389 


gence  appeared  and  will  appeared,  and  a conscience  discerning 
between  good  and  evil  appeared,  and  the  full  man  in  the  image 
of  God  appeared.  There  has  been  a like  introduction  of  new 
powers,  and  a like  advance  in  the  revelation  which  God  has  been 
pleased  to  make  of  his  will,  first  in  the  shadow  going  before, 
then  in  the  grand  Personage  appearing  in  the  fulness  of  time. 
The  Jewish  dispensation  comes  out  of  the  patriarchal,  and  the 
Christian  out  of  the  Jewish,  in  each  case  something  new  being 
added.  Under  the  old  economy  there  were  promises  of  the 
coming  dispensation,  and  there  were  anticipations  of  it  in  per- 
sons moved  by  the  Holy  Ghost.  It  was  thus  in  the  geological 
ages,;  as  Agassiz  delighted  to  show,  in  lower  creatures  stretching 
up  towards  higher  and  towards  man  himself.  But  the  full  dis- 
pensation of  the  Spirit  was  introduced  when  the  Mediator,  hav- 
ing finished  his  work  on  earth,  went  up  to  heaven : “If  I go 
away,  I will  send  him  unto  you.” 

Christians  believe  that  in  this  dispensation  they  have  access 
to  God.  They  maintain  that  science  has  nothing  to  say  even  in 
appearance  contradictory.  Some  of  the  profoundest  investiga- 
tors of  science  have  believed  all  this  and  avowed  their  convic- 
tions, such  as  Newton  and  Leibnitz,  Brewster  and  Herschel, 
Faraday,  Meyer,  and  our  own  Henry.  They  have  been  quite 
as  sure  of  this  as  of  their  own  great  discoveries  as  to  the  laws  of 
the  universe. 

No  doubt  these  spiritual  operations  are  not  without  law  of 
some  kind.  But  that  law  is  not  the  same  with  the  physical  laws 
operating  around  us.  It  maybe  such  that  we  cannot  by  search- 
ing find  it  out.  The  arc  visible  to  us  is  too  small  to  enable  us  to 
calculate  the  full  circle  or  sphere.  So  we  piously  ascribe  it  all 
to  the  sovereignty  of  God.  “ The  wind  bloweth  where  it  listeth, 
and  thou  hearest  the  sound  thereof,  but  canst  not  tell  whence  it 
cometh,  and  whither  it  goeth : so  is  every  one  that  is  born  of 
the  Spirit.” 


26 


James  McCosh. 


THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART. 


IT  was  a habit  of  Socrates, — who  was  himself  a sculptor,  and 
the  son  of  a sculptor, — when  he  would  inquire  into  the  phi- 
losophy of  any  subject,  to  seek  the  professional  practitioner  or 
teacher  who  claimed  to  be  a representative,  reasonably  inferring 
that  such  an  one  would  be  well  qualified  to  furnish  the  informa- 
tion he  sought.  He  then  applied  his  unrelenting  system  of 
inquiry  with  a keen-scented  persistency  that  was  quick  to  expose 
ignorance  or  fallacy.  This  method  of  inquiry  as  practised  by 
Socrates,  which  confronted  him  at  once  with  the  true  represen- 
tives,  we  cannot  do  better  than  imitate.  To  the  atelier , or  work- 
shop, therefore,  we  will  go,  where,  surrounded  by  the  implements 
of  his  art,  we  shall  find  the  sculptor  engaged  in  the  practice  of 
his  calling.  The  artist  may  not  be  always  able  to  give  a reason 
for  his  practice — as  Socrates  sometimes  found  to  be  the  case — 
but  the  atelier  affords  ample  illustration  even  of  principles  too 
subtle  for  logical  solution.  The  studio  of  the  artist  is  the  amal- 
gamation of  the  study  and  the  workshop.  The  technical  and 
the  intellectual,  practice  and  theory — even  the  mechanical  and 
the  emotional — are  there  blended  harmoniously  as  one  in  the 
service  of  art. 

The  fundamental  element  in  sculpture  is  form.  The  forms 
of  objects  are  principally  recognizable  to  the  eye  by  means  of 
outline  and  shadow;  the  first  gives  the  impression  of  shape,  the 
second  that  of  relief.  Outline  and  shadow,  therefore,  constitute 
the  elements  of  form  as  regards  our  visual  impressions.  Colorless 
objects  that  are  equally  illuminated  from  all  sides,  tho  their  sur- 
face be  roughened  or  irregular,  give  no  impression  of  relief  save 
what  is  suggested  by  their  outlines.  The  landscape  viewed  from 
a height  under  a meridian  sun  has  few  distinctions  of  form; 


THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART. 


391 


but  as  the  day  declines  the  lengthening  shadows  reveal  a varied 
and  broken  panorama:  hills,  valleys,  and  even  the  gentler  undu- 
lations of  surface  greet  the  eye. 

Sculpture  is  the  least  complex  of  the  formative  arts  r but  from 
this  we  are  not  to  infer  that  its  merits  are  of  an  inferior  order. 
Excellence  in  all  the  arts  is  of  equal  merit,  and  if  there  be  any/ 
distinctions  of  this  kind,  we  may  conclude  that  excellence  is  of  a 
higher  order  in  proportion  to  the  simplicity  of  the  means  em- 
ployed. It  is  the  equable  character  of  true  excellence  in  art 
that  places  on  the  same  plane  Homer,  Phidias,  and  Raphael  or 
Michael  Angelo,  as  merely  varied  exponents  of  the  same  crea- 
tive power. 

Again,  with  reference  to  form  as  the  basis  of  sculpture,  there 
are  two  distinctions  that  should  be  borne  in  mind,  viz.,  the 
science  of  form  and  the  sense  of  form ; the  first  relates  to  fact, 
the  second  to  feeling.  The  first  is  a matter  of  systematic 
knowledge;  the  second,  of  aesthetic  perception.  No  artist  is 
properly  qualified  in  art  who  neglects  these  distinctions,  or  who 
fails  to  recognize  their  respective  merits  as  contributing  to  mani- 
festations of  the  beautiful.  No  amount  of  scientific  knowledge 
of  form  will  avail  the  sculptor  in  the  absence  of  that  artistic  or 
emotional  sense  of  it  of  which  sculpture  is  an  expression  or  rep- 
resentative. Nor  will  a fine  artistic  sense  of  form  avail,  in  art, 
in  the  absence  of  a knowledge  of  anatomy.  I once  saw  a 
statue,  representing  an  athlete,  that  had  attracted  some  atten- 
tion from  the  fact  that  it  was  made  by  an  anatomist — one  whose 
knowledge  of  anatomy  was  justly  held  to  be  very  considerable. 
Great  accuracy  of  knowledge  was  displayed  in  the  anatomical 
forms,  while  the  action  chosen  was  well  adapted  for  muscular 
display.  But  for  a work  of  art  this  conspicuous  motive  was  a 
false  one,  the  emotional  character  of  the  action  or  expression 
being  subsidiary  to  the  exhibition  of  knowledge.  It  excited 
curiosity,  but  stimulated  no  higher  emotion,  and  the  effect  was, 
on  the  whole,  repulsive. 

On  the  other  hand,  examples  are  not  rare,  in  sculpture, 
wherein  is  plainly  recognizable  the  absence  of  accurate  anatomi- 
cal knowledge,  the  result  being  inane  and  valueless.  Underlying 
the  higher  truth  there  must  be  a basis  of  natural  fact,  and  the 
studies  of  the  sculptor  are  directed  to  this  end.  But  after  veri- 


392 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


fying  his  anatomical  forms  by  constant  reference  to  nature,  the 
sculptor  makes  all  this  subservient  to  an  emotional  impulse  of  a 
higher  kind.  The  imagination,  regarding  his  work  from  an  ele- 
vated plane,  enables  him  not  merely  to  endow  his  creations  with 
life,  movement,  expression,  but  also  to  make  them  act  in  a noble 
and  grand  way.  He  aims  not  merely  to  represent  the  forms  of 
life,  but  to  express  through  form  a still  finer  sense  of  beauty, 
not  found  in  the  model,  but  seen  through  the  model,  which  is 
nature  in  a more  select  and  permanent  aspect. 

But  without  further  discussion  of  general  ideas,  we  will  go 
at  once  to  the  workshop.  We  will  follow  the  sculptor  in  all  his 
processes,  from  his  rude  first  sketch  to  the  completion  of  his 
statue. 

The  first  step  in  every  formative  art  is  generally  that  of  a 
rude  sketch  on  paper;  but  it  is  not  uncommon  for  sculptors  to 
make  even  the  first  sketch  in  the  clay — generally  a very  diminu- 
tive, hastily  executed  sketch,  designed  merely  to  express  the 
general  idea.  The  rude,  first  blot,  in  whatever  form  it  may  be, 
is  a point  of  departure;  it  is  the  initial  fact  for  the  imagination 
to  rest  and  work  upon.  Then  follows  what  is  termed  a study — 
a larger  sketch,  in  which  the  action  and  forms  are  determined 
with  some  care,  in  accordance  with  the  conception  as  it  exists 
in  the  mind.  Generally  in  this  second  sketch-  reference  is  made 
to  the  living  model,  but  not  always.  Before  referring  to  the 
model,  the  artist  desires  to  assert  his  motive — the  conception  he 
has  himself  formed  in  imagination.  A too  early  reference  to  the 
model  may  substitute  for  this  an  action  or  motive  conceived  on 
a lower  plane — the  plane  of  the  commonplace.  In  this  model, 
either  of  clay  or  wax,  the  sculptor  aims  to  express  the  action, 
the  forms  and  general  proportions,  freely  making  changes  as  the 
sketch  advances.  It  is  not  uncommon  to  make  several  experi- 
mental designs  in  different  attitudes,  exhibiting  various  actions, 
before  he  decides  what  will  best  conform  to  the  leading  idea. 
It  may  be  that  he  studies  this  small  model  with  great  care,  with 
continued  reference  to  nature,  and  thus  matures  his  conception. 

If  the  proposed  statue  is  to  be  of  life  size  or  larger,  fie  pro- 
ceeds to  set  it  up  in  clay  by  proportional  measurements  made 
from  the  small  model.  The  clay  most  commonly  used  is  of  a 
gray  color,  free  from  gritty  substance,  and  moistened  to  a 


t 


THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART.  393 

proper  consistency.  The  figure  is  built  up  about  the  supports 
— termed  the  skeleton — following  the  attitude  and  proportions 
of  the  original  sketch.  The  clay  is  manipulated  with  the  fingers, 
and  the  work,  at  this  stage,  is  advanced  by  simple  addition. 
This  “ setting  up”  of  a statue,  as  it  is  termed,  is  generally  per- 
formed by  the  sculptor’s  assistants,  who  are  guided  by  propor- 
tional measurements.  When  the  material  is  all  placed  and  the 
figure  roughly  shaped,  the  sculptor  then  takes  it  in  hand  and 
brings  to  his  aid  all  the  resources  of  his  art.  Every  part  is  care- 
fully studied  from  the  life.  The  statue  is  first  modelled  nude, 
and  afterward  the  forms  are  clothed.  The  drapery  is  super- 
added  to  the  forms  already  modelled,  by  first  running  over  them 
strips  of  clay  to  represent  the  folds  or  masses  that  are  farthest 
removed ; but  where  drapery  sinks  to  actual  contact  with  the 
body  or  limbs,  the  original  surface  is  carefully  preserved,  tho 
characterized  as  draped  by  distinctions  of  texture  and  other  like 
means.  Textures  and  other  variations  of  surface  are  given  by 
various  tools,  usually  made  of  wood.  The  clay  is  kept  moist, 
and  when  the  day’s  work  is  finished  it  is  wrapped  in  wet  cloths, 
or  covered  with  an  air-tight  screen  to  retard  evaporation. 

It  is  important  for  the  sculptor  to  design  his  statue  so  as  to 
avoid,  as  far  as  possible,  the  extension  of  any  part  of  the  figure 
insecurely.  He  must  also  bear  in  mind  where  the  statue  is  to 
be  placed,  and  in  what  material  it  is  to  be  finally  wrought — 
whether  it  is  to  be  of  marble  or  of  bronze.  If  it  is  to  be  of 
bronze,  he  may  have  certain  liberties  of  which  the  marble  does 
not  admit,  the  brittleness  of  the  marble  necessitating  a more 
compact  mass.  Where  the  design  necessitates  extended  limbs, 
the  ancients  often  resorted  to  artificial  supports;  but  this  has 
been  avoided  in  modern  times,  as  they  interfere  with  the  beauty 
of  the  statue  or  group.  In  bronze-work  there  are  many  difficul- 
ties encountered  in  casting  complex  forms,  but  skilled  founders 
find  ways  of  surmounting  them.  Benvenuto  Cellini,  in  his  auto- 
biography, gives  a very  interesting  account  of  the  casting  of  his 
“ Perseus,”  explaining  these  difficulties  and  the  care  necessary 
to  overcome  them.  One  of  the  most  remarkable  pieces  of 
bronze-casting  is  that  of  the  beautiful  gates  of  the  Baptistery 
at  Florence  by  Lorenzo  Ghiberti,  of  which  Vasari  gives  an 
account. 


394 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


But  this  is  anticipating.  Let  us  dwell  more  particularly  on 
the  clay  model ; for  it  is  here  that  the  sculptor  displays  his  true 
powers,  his  finest  skill.  The  genius  of  the  artist  finds  expression 
in  the  pliant  clay.  With  that  delicacy  of  touch  by  which  the 
skilled  musician  modulates  sound  the  sculptor  gives  expression 
to  the  yielding  clay.  Having  the  living  model  before  him,  he 
seizes  upon  that  which  is  expressive  and  characteristic.  Avoid- 
ing trivial  accidents  and  incongruities,  he  seeks  that  unconscious 
grace,  or  it  may  be  that  virile  action,  that  is  truly  natural  and 
pleasing.  His  great  concern  is  to  conform  the  outward  action 
to  the  inward  impulse,  that  his  work  may  appear  artless  rather 
than  artful ; every  action  being  free  and  unconstrained,  sponta- 
neous in  movement  rather  than  conscious  or  studied.  Few  things 
have  greater  fascination  for  the  observer  than  that  of  witnessing 
the  clay  start  into  life  under  the  skilled  manipulations  of  the 
sculptor.  Slight  modifications  of  form  will  sometimes  make  it 
quickly  assume  the  character  of  life.  The  process  itself,  passing 
from  generals  to  particulars  with  true  logical  sequence,  is  a 
most  suggestive  one,  well  calculated  to  stimulate  thought  in 
many  analogous  ways.  In  composing  his  statue,  the  sculptor 
must  regard  it  from  all  points  of  view.  Unless  designed  to  fill 
a niche,  it  must  be  so  studied  that  it  composes  agreeably  from 
eight  distinct  points  of  view — the  front,  the  rear,  the  sides,  and 
obliquely.  Indeed,  his  work  is  in  itself  a real  object,  while  the 
painter’s  representation  is  but  the  semblance  of  reality — the  imi- 
tation of  the  appearance.  In  contrasting  his  own  art  with  that 
of  painting,  a sculptor  once  said  to  me,  “ There  is  a satisfaction 
in  being  able  to  walk  round  your  work,  to  regard  it  from  all 
points  of  view  as  a real,  palpable  object.”  And  that  indicated 
the  character  of  the  sculptor’s  peculiar  sympathy  for  form, 
heightened  by  the  sense  of  reality  and  substance. 

The  statue,  therefore,  must  present  from  every  point  of  view 
an  agreeable  form  or  outline.  In  process  of  modelling  the  clay 
rests  on  a revolving  base,  that  the  figure  may  be  turned  readily 
when  the  sculptor  desires  to  view  his  work  from  different  sides; 
and  after  every  considerable  addition  it  must  be  so  regarded.  A 
distinct  manipulation  of  the  clay  is  required  to  represent  all  the 
distinctions  of  surface  as  to  .the  character  of  flesh  or  of  drapery. 
Qualities  of  hardness  or  softness,  roughness  or  smoothness,  are 


THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART. 


395 


represented  with  delicacy  or  boldness  as  the  case  may  require. 
It  is  upon  the  clay  that  the  sculptor  bestows  all  his  energies, 
even  to  the  extremest  finish  the  character  of  the  work  demands. 
What  follows  is  mainly  of  a mechanical  nature. 

When  the  statue  is  completed  in  the  clay,  the  formatore  then 
makes  from  it  what  is  termed  a “ waste-mould  ” of  plaster  of  Paris. 
A waste-mould  is  distinguished  from  a piece-mould  in  that  it 
serves  but  for  one  cast,  in  the  forming  of  which  the  mould  is  de- 
stroyed by  being  clipped  off  with  the  chisel.  In  the  forming  of 
a waste-mould  the  clay  model  is  entirely  wrecked.  The  mould  is 
then  washed  and  coated  with  boiled  oil,  and  when  dry  it  is  fitted 
together  and  a perfect  plaster  cast  is  made.  This  the  sculptor 
receives  from  his  workmen  and  proceeds  to  bestow  upon  it 
additional  labor.  In  the  place  of  wooden  tools,  he  now  uses 
those  of  steel — rasps,  chisels,  and  toothed  implements  of  various 
kinds.  In  the  plaster  the  statue  is  brought  to  a point  of  actual 
finish  regarding  every  detail.  The  change  from  the  gray  clay 
to  the  white  plaster  is  a marked  one,  and  often  suggests  changes 
to  be  made,  by  reason  of  fresh  observation  consequent  upon  the 
nature  of  this  newr  material. 

After  its  completion  in  plaster,  the  statue  is  either  repro- 
duced in  marble  or  conveyed  infections  to  the  foundry.  If  the 
statue  is  to  be  of  marble,  the  workmen  cover  the  surface  of  the 
cast  with  innumerable  minute  cross-marks,  and  project  from 
the  raised  parts  a few  points  of  steel,  which  serve  as  guides  for 
the  measurements  for  its  reproduction  in  stone.  With  the  cali- 
pers they  determine  all  the  elevations  and  depressions,  and 
follow  mechanically  every  variation  of  surface  in  the  model. 
Vasari,  in  his  life  of  Michael  Angelo,  thus  describes  this  pro- 
cess: “A  figure  of  wax  or  other  firm  material  being  laid  in  a 
vessel  of  water,  which  of  its  nature  is  level  at  the  surface,  on 
being  gradually  raised  first  displays  the  more  salient  parts,  the 
less  elevated  still  being  hidden,  until,  as  the  form  rises,  the  whole 
by  degrees  comes  into  view.  In  this  manner  are  figures  to  be 
extracted  from  the  marble  with  the  chisel ; the  highest  parts 
being  first  brought  forth,  till  by  degrees  the  lowest  parts 
appear.” 

Of  these  various  materials  in  which  the  statue  is  wrought, 
Michael  Angelo  said:  “The  clay  represents  life;  the  plaster, 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


30 

death ; and  the  marble,  a resurrection.”  The  clay  is  yielding  and 
expressive ; the  plaster,  rigid  and  unqualified ; and  the  marble 
revives  again  the  finer  qualities  and  lends  to  them  a translucency 
of  its  own.  When  the  statue  is  hewn  from  the  marble — a labor 
of  many  months — it  returns  again  to  the  sculptor,  who  gives  to 
it  an  expressive  finish  in  conformity  with  the  spirit  of  his  origi- 
nal conception.  He  obliterates  the  mechanical  execution  of  his 
workmen  and  bestows  upon  it  a facile  grace,  or  delicacy  of  ex- 
pression, that  deceives  one  with  the  belief  that  the  statue  has 
come  forth  from  the  marble  with  the  ease  and  celerity  of  the 
thought  itself  in  its  original  conception. 

But  if  the  statue  is  to  be  of  bronze,  the  last  labors  of  the 
sculptor  are  bestowed  upon  the  plaster  model.  When  this  is 
completed,  it  is  cut  into  sections  and  conveyed  to  the  foundry. 
It  is  there  cast  in  sections,  generally,  and  these  are  afterwards 
joined,  finished,  and  chased  by  skilled  artisans.  The  bronze  is 
then  toned,  or  darkened  with  acids — and  so  the  work  is  done. 
As  the  original  models  are  retained  by  the  sculptor,  his  studio 
becomes  populated  with  his  works,  that  may  be  reduplicated  to 
any  extent;  in  which  respect  he  has  an  advantage  over  the 
painter.  There  is  an  endurance,  also,  about  this  art  that  is  im- 
pressive : the  marble  and  the  bronze  live  forever,  while  the 
masterpieces  of  pictorial  art  perish  with  time,  and  become,  as 
with  the  Greeks,  merely  a vague  tradition.  The  powers  of  the 
orator  and  the  actor  die  with  them ; those  of  the  painter  may 
survive  a thousand  years,  or  by  extraordinary  chance,  as  in  the 
Pompeiian  frescos,  to  twice  this  period ; but  sculpture  endures 
throughout  the  ages.  The  museums  of  Europe  contain  Egyp- 
tian statues  and  reliefs  that  belong  to  the  fourth  dynasty — as 
early  as  t .e  forty-second  century  B.C.  The  endurance,  there- 
fore, no  less  than  the  palpable  reality  of  sculpture  give  to  it  a 
value  peculiarly  its  own. 

The  location  of  statues  governs,  in  a measure,  the  character 
of  their  execution.  Those  which  may  only  be  seen  from  a dis- 
tance should  be  more  rudely  executed  to  give  the  desired  effect ; 
and  yet  the  Greeks  paid  little  heed  to  this.  The  Phidian  statues 
from  the  pediments  of  the  Parthenon  are,  many  of  them,  finished 
with  great  care.  The  “ Theseus,”  the  “ Ilissus,”  and  the  beautiful 
group  of  the  Fates  are  finished  with  extreme  care.  The  Greeks 


397 


¥ 

THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART. 

apparently  followed  the  beautiful  for  its  own  sake.  They  neg- 
lected nothing.  Phidias,  when  asked  why  he  bestowed  such 
care  upon  those  parts  of  his  works  which,  necessarily,  were  shut 
out  from  view,  is  said  to  have  replied,  “ The  gods  see  them,  and 
they  must  be  satisfied.”  A moral  lesson  truly,  whether  applied 
to  art  or  to  life  itself. 

Greek  statues  of  single  figures  not  designed  to  serve  as 
architectural  ornaments — such  as  the  Apollo  or  the  Venus — are 
equally  beautiful  from  every  point  of  view  from  which  they  are 
regarded ; while  a bas-relief,  like  a picture,  is  to  be  viewed  in 
front  alone.  As  compared  with  painting,  the  range  of  subjects 
admissible  in  sculpture  is  limited.  Single  figures  serve  best  to 
express  the  finer  qualities  of  this  art.  Groups,  as  a general 
thing,  belong  to  a subordinate  plane.  Even  the  most  famous 
groups  of  antiquity  bear  a subordinate  relation  to  single  figures. 
Perhaps  the  finest  instance  of  two  figures  thus  grouped  is  that 
of  the  Fates — Ceres  and  Proserpine — belonging  to  the  eastern 
pediment  of  the  Parthenon.  Groups  comprehending  more  than 
two  figures — as  the  “Laocoon,”  or  the  “ Farnese  Bull,”  particu- 
larly the  latter — decidedly  belong  to  a period  of  decadence  in 
sculpture.  The  figures  there  stand  in  a picturesque  rather  than 
plastic  relation  to  one  another,  and  are  necessarily  viewed  sepa- 
rately; thus  are  introduced  conflicting  elements  that  mar  sim- 
plicity. 

Every  work  of  art  interests  us  not  merely  from  its  intrinsic 
merit,  but  as  a manifestation  of  the  character  of  the  creative 
impulse  that  is  behind  it.  Statues  belonging  to  the  best  periods 
of  Greek  art  are  simply  and  nobly  conceived.  There  is  no 
resort  to  novel  or  specious  effects,  or  to  mere  elaboration  for  its 
own  sake.  The  art  is  grand  because  it  is  the  embodiment  of  a 
grand  conception,  and  executed  with  a noble  disdain  for  triviali- 
ties. It  is  beautiful  for  the  reason  that  it  is  simple,  natural, 
economical;  nothing  remains  to  be  added  or  taken  away;  the 
whole  is  composed  of  strictly  essential  parts.  The  perfect  cor- 
respondence of  the  form  and  action  with  the  motive  satisfies  the 
mind.  Every  part,  every  division  of  the  body,  the  limbs,  the 
muscles,  perform  their  functions  naturally  and  economically ; 
nothing  is  strained,  no  action  is  forced ; the  movement  corre- 
sponds with  that  action  of  the  mind  that  is  composed  even 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


398 

in  energetic  and  quick  exertion,  as  in  the  throwing  of  a 
discus. 

Proportion  is  an  element  of  form  that  is  of  supreme  impor- 
tance in  sculpture.  There  is  an  innate  sense  of  proportion  in 
most  minds,  but  under  cultivation  this  is  capable  of  being 
greatly  refined.  Even  an  uneducated  ear  may  easily  detect  dis- 
proportion in  verse  and  discord  in  music.  But  it  requires  accu- 
rate technical  knowledge  to  be  able  to  detect  how  and  why 
certain  works  of  art  fail  in  due  proportions.  But  if  there  were 
no  general  sense  of  these  things  possessed  in  common,  music 
would  alone  address  the  sensibility  of  the  musician,  and  rhythm 
that  of  the  poet ; but  in  a general  way  we  all  share  in  a like 
susceptibility,  but  varied  in  degree,  to  these  influences.  A sense 
of  human  proportion  is  awakened  by  countless  impressions  that 
are  stamped  upon  the  mind  by  the  sense,  and  natural  selection 
evolves  from  these  impressions  an  average,  or  ideal,  underlying 
endless  variations  of  the  real. 

In  order  that  we  may  comprehend  the  school  in  which  the 
ancients  studied  their  athletes  we  should  follow  them  to  the 
arena,  where  they  witnessed  performances  that  called  forth  un- 
studied action  under  circumstances  impossible  now  to  imitate. 
The  ancient  Romans,  especially  the  lower  orders,  including  the 
slaves,  were  fond  of  sketching  upon  the  walls  of  the  ante-rooms 
such  scenes  as  interested  them  most  in  these  spectacles,  and  the 
greater  part  of  them  represent  gladiatorial  combats.  Cardinal 
Wiseman  has  given  an  interesting  description  of  some  of  these 
scratchings  ( graffiti , as  they  are  called).  “ They  present  to  us  a 
class  of  very  rude  but  very  interesting  monuments.  One  of 
them  records  a peculiar  occurrence.  It  is  indeed  only  a battle  in 
the  amphitheatre,  but  it  is  between  two  men  in  very  different 
positions  ; the  names  of  the  combatants  are  given,  as  they  always 
are,  and  numbers  over  their  heads  tell  how  many  victories  each 
one  had  achieved.  This  battle,  then,  is  between  Spiculus,  a tyro — 
that  is,  one  who  had  never  before  fought — and  Aptonetus,  libra- 
rius,  or  holding  a high  office  among  the  gladiators,  a man  who 
had  gained  sixteen  victories,  as  his  number  indicates.  The  first 
has  over  him  the  letter  V — vicit,  he  conquered ; the  other,  P — 
periit,  he  perished.  In  fact,  the  old  gladiator,  with  the  sixteen 
laurels  that  he  had  won,  is  lying  on  the  ground  wounded  to 


THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART. 


399 


* 

death,  or  dead  ; and  the  youth  who  had  dared  to  fight  him  is 
alive,  holding  the  point  of  his  sword  against  the  prostrate 
figure.” 

Such  is  the  rude  sketch  as  it  remains  upon  the  wall  after 
twenty  centuries  have  passed.  But  we  must  imagine  the  emo- 
tions with  which  these  two  men  approached  each  other  in 
deadly  combat,  with  the  eyes  of  fifty  thousand  spectators  intent 
upon  them — the  one  a veteran,  crowned  with  sixteen  victories, 
indignant  that  a stripling  like  that  should  presume  to  cope  with 
him;  the  other  ambitious  of  the  great  glory  that  awaited  his 
victory.  The  sketch  records  the  sequel.  We  may  conceive  with 
what  intentness  the  eye  of  the  spectator — the  Greek  sculptor — 
would  observe  every  display  of  action,  the  tension  of  muscles, 
the  swollen  veins  like  knotted  cords,  the  dilated  nostrils  as 
each  stifles  the  anguish  of  a wound.  “ What  the  Greek  sculptor 
knew  how  to  seize,  and  alone  had  the  opportunity  of  seizing, 
was  the  result  of  such  deep,  such  extraordinary  emotions  as,  act- 
ing outwards  from  the  nobler  organs,  impressed  themselves  in 
that  wonderful  way  we  see  represented  in  their  art.”  They 
were  not  permitted  to  dissect  the  human  body.  Galen  was 
obliged  to  study  the  ape  for  his  approximate  knowledge  of 
human  anatomy.  The  Greek  or  Roman  arrived  at  the  knowl- 
edge of  the  interior  construction  of  the  figure  from  what  he  saw 
without.  But  his  school  was  an  extraordinary  one ; for,  as  we 
have  seen,  he  witnessed  physical  action  under  circumstances  so 
intensified  in  interest,  as  in  mortal  combats,  that  the  faculties  of 
the  artist  were  rendered  acute  and  penetrating. 

The  athletic  sports  of  the  ancients  also  afforded  fine  oppor- 
tunity for  studying  the  physical  form.  Their  five  gymnastic 
exercises  were  boxing,  running,  wrestling,  leaping,  and  throw- 
ing the  discus.  The  physical  form  was  developed  by  careful 
training.  Persons  of  all  ranks  participated  in  these  sports. 
Pericles  had  won  prizes,  and  so  had  Socrates,  and  these  triumphs 
were  always  regarded  with  pride.  In  these  games  the  body  was 
generally  nude;  the  surface  of  the  skin  was  rubbed  with  oil,  to 
toughen  the  fibre.  We  see  in  one  of  the  finest  statues  of  the 
ancients — the  “ Apoxyomenos” — an  athlete  scraping  himself 
with  the  strygil,  after  his  return  from  the  arena. 

Thus  we  may  form  some  idea  of  the  nature  of  the  experience 


400 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


whence  the  Greek  artist  drew  his  inspiration  and  his  sense  of 
fine  action  and  true  proportion.  That  the  ancients  had  certain 
fixed  standards  of  proportion  there  is  no  doubt.  By  some  it  is 
claimed  that  the  Greeks  derived  their  standard  of  proportion 
from  the  Egyptians,  and  a statue  known  as  the“  Water-carrier,” 
or  the  Egyptian  Antinous,  is  adduced  in  evidence  of  this  deriva- 
tion ; but  the  historic  origin  of  their  system  we  will  not  now 
discuss. 

In  Egyptian  sculpture  the  proportions  of  their  statues  were 
rather  more  than  seven  heads  high ; they  were  equally  poised 
upon  both  legs,  often  one  foot  is  advanced,  and  the  arms  hang 
straight  down  on  either  side ; or  if  one  is  raised,  it  is  bent  at 
the  elbow  at  a right  angle  across  the  body.  Their  attitudes  are 
simple  and  rectilinear,  without  lateral  movement.  In  contrast 
with  this,  the  Greeks,  even  in  the  earliest  times,  were  freed  from 
this  rigid  and  constrained  type.  Between  the  Greek  and  the 
Assyrian  there  is  thought  to  be  a resemblance  of  forms  and 
types  that  might  indicate  direct  descent,  if  indeed  the  Greeks 
owed  anything  to  foreign  influence.  Whatever  may  have  been 
borrowed  in  the  earliest  times,  the  Doric  migration  created  a 
new  spirit  which  pervaded  the  Greek  people  and  asserted  their 
independence  in  forms  of  government,  art,  and  life.  Diodorus 
remarks  that  the  Egyptian  artists  wrought  after  an  exact 
measure,  but  that  the  Greeks  were  guided  by  the  accuracy  of 
the  eye.  Winckelmann  refutes  this,  and  indeed  it  is  now  well 
known  that  the  Greeks  employed  in  sculpture,  as  in  their  archi- 
tecture, certain  fixed  ratios  of  proportion,  which,  however,  dif- 
fered at  different  times  and  with  the  change  of  subject.  The 
Egyptian  Antinous,  now  in  the  museum  of  the  Capitol  at 
Rome,  is  thought  to  embody  proportions  that  are  found  applied 
in  the  finest  examples  of  Greek  art.  The  measurements  derived 
from  this  statue  are  found  to  correspond  to  those  of  the 
“ Theseus”  and  the  “ Ilissus,”  by  Phidias,  examples  of  the  best 
period  of  Greek  art.  These  portions  have  a wider  application, 
covering  a larger  number  of  the  best  statues,  than  any  other 
known  standard.  Vitruvius,  tho  writing  on  architecture,  gives 
details  and  statements  respecting  the  proportions  commonly 
employed  by  Greek  sculptors.  He  says,  “The  members  of  the 
body  have  certain  proportions  that  were  always  observed  by 


THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART. 


401 


the  painters  and  sculptors”  of  his  time,  which  was  that  of 
Augustus;  and  he  adds,  “We  must  always  look  for  them  in 
those;  productions  which  have  excited  universal  admiration.” 
He  then  designates  these  proportions  as  follows:  “ The  measure 
of  the  head  from  the  chin  to  the  top  of  the  scalp  is  an  eighth  of 
the  whole  body ; the  face  from  the  top  of  the  forehead  should 
be  one-tenth  part  of  the  whole  stature.”  The  face  he  divides, 
longitudinally,  into  three  equal  parts;  the  foot  is,  in  length, 
equal  to  a sixth  part  of  the  stature.  All  measurements  are 
longitudinal.  “ The  height  of  the  human  frame  is  equal  to  its 
breadth  when  the  arms  are  stretched  out,”  etc.  etc. 

It  is  observable  in  the  works  even  of  inferior  sculptors  of 
Greece  that  the  proportions  of  their  statues  are  generally  fine, 
altho  in  purely  artistic  qualities  they  may  be  poor.  This,  I 
think,  evinces  a knowledge  of  some  system  of  measurement 
that  was  common  to  all  their  artists. 

It  is  well  known  that  in  their  baths,  which  were  places  of 
general  resort  for  intellectual  as  well  as  physical  discipline  and 
recreation,  they  preserved  accurate  records  of  the  measurements 
of  their  most  distinguished  athletes.  If  one  was  distinguished 
for  strength,  agility,  or  grace  of  form,  he  was  measured  accord- 
ingly, and  these  records  doubtless  supplied  the  data  for  deter- 
mining a true  system  of  proportional  measurements.  In  modern 
times  Massaccio,  Leonardo  da  Vinci,  Michael  Angelo,  Raphael, 
Albrecht  Diirer,  and  other  distinguished  representatives  of  the 
arts,  have  left  records  of  their  search  for  accurate  systems  of 
measurement — they  all  sought  to  discover  the  system  of  the 
ancients.  It  is  partly  due  to  the  accuracy  of  the  principles 
taught,  and  to  systematized  knowledge  of  this  kind,  that  is  to  be 
attributed,  in  some  degree,  that  prevalent  excellence  in  art 
manifested  in  Greece  in  the  time  of  Pericles,  and  in  Italy  in  the 
fifteenth  and  sixteenth  centuries.  Diirer,  in  the  preface  to  his 
treatise  on  mensuration,  complains  that  young  painters  were  too 
often  allowed  to  grow  up  in  ignorance  of  the  principles  of  pro- 
portion as  applied  to  the  human  figure.  He  divided  the  height 
of  the  human  figure  into  seven  parts,  each  having  the  same 
length  as  the  head.  Again  he  divided  it  into  eight  parts.  A 
woman,  he  concluded,  should  be  an  eighteenth  part  shorter  than 
a man ; and  in  his  proportional  measurements  of  the  female 


402 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


form  he  follows,  perhaps  unwittingly,  the  celebrated  standard 
of  the  Venus  de  Medici.  He  also  gives  ludicrous  examples 
resulting  from  mathematical  variations  of  proportion,  or  the 
exaggeration  of  one  proportion  at  the  expense  of  another. 

Leonardo  termed  himself  “ the  admirer  of  the  ancients  and 
their  grateful  disciple;  but  one  thing,”  he  adds,  “is  lacking  in 
me,  viz.,  their  science  of  proportion.”  In  his  own  treatise  on 
this  subject  he  thus  writes:  “ In  general,  the  dimensions  of  the 
human  body  are  to  be  considered  in  the  length  and  not  in  the 
breadth,  because  in  nature  we  cannot  in  any  species  find  any 
one  part  in  one  person  precisely  similar  to  the  same  part  in 
another.”  He  “divided  the  form  of  bodies  into  two  parts;  that 
is,  the  proportion  of  the  members  to  each  other,  which  must 
correspond  with  the  whole ; and  the  action,  expressive  of  what 
passes  in  the  mind  of  the  living  figure.”  A man,  he  adds,  has 
the  length  of  two  heads  from  the  extremity  of  one  shoulder  to 
another;  the  same  from  the  shoulder  to  the  elbow;  and  also 
from  the  elbow  to  the  fingers.  He  agrees  with  Vitruvius  that  a 
well-proportioned  man  is  ten  times  the  length  of  his  face. 

Michael  Angelo,  as  the  result  of  a long  life  devoted  to  the 
study  of  the  human  figure,  sixteen  years  of  which  were  given 
to  the  study  of  anatomy,  declared  that  there  was  a harmony 
of  the  proportions  throughout,  and  that  “ these  proportions 
have  a law.” 

The  importance  of  proportional  measurements  to  the  sculp- 
tor is  apparent  in  his  daily  practice.  Every  statue  is  “ set  up” 
by  means  of  such  measurements ; and  if  it  be  of  colossal  size, 
the  symmetry  of  the  whole  cannot  otherwise  be  attained.  An 
ideal  exaggeration  like  that  of  the  Farnese  Hercules  could  not 
well  be  produced  without  it ; for  in  that  statue  the  exaggeration 
of  the  general  proportions  is  not  only  admirably  sustained 
throughout,  but  every  individual  muscle  is  developed  harmoni- 
ously in  accordance  with  that  exaggeration,  and  strictly  parallel 
with  nature,  tho  far  removed  from  nature’s  accustomed  practice. 

Heroic  proportions  with  the  Greeks  generally  included  in 
the  height  of  the  figure  eight  heads;  the  common  standard  for 
minor,  or  portrait,  subjects  was  seven  heads.  Thus  the  smallness 
of  the  heads  of  many  ancient  heroic  statues  was  the  result  of 
deliberate  design  ; as  was  also  the  lengthening  of  the  lower  limbs 


THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART. 


403 


beyond  the  proportions  usually  found  in  nature,  which  lent  dig- 
nity and  elegance  to  the  figure.  Winckelmann  asserts  that  the 
rules  of  proportion  as  adopted  in  art  from  the  human  figure 
were  first  established  by  sculptors,  and  afterwards  became 
canonical  in  architecture  likewise.  He  states  that  among  the 
ancients  the  foot  was  the  standard  of  the  larger  measurements. 
Vitruvius  states  that  the  ancients  gave  their  statues  six  lengths 
of  the  foot.  Modern  sculptors  generally  adopt  the  head  and 
face  as  standards  of  measurement.  In  general,  the  face  may  be 
thus  divided  into  three  equal  parts — the  forehead,  one ; the 
nose,  another ; and  the  mouth  and  chin  included  in  a third. 
The  ear  is  of  the  length  of  the  nose,  and  parallel  with  it.  The 
space  between  the  eyes  is  of  the  width  of  one  eye,  and  the 
base  of  the  nose  is  of  the  same  width ; the  mouth  half  again  as 
wide. 

Every  sculptor  who  is  thoroughly  conversant  with  his  art  has 
these  proportional  measurements  instinctively  in  mind,  and  ap- 
plies them  accordingly  in  modelling  a bust  or  statue.  Of  course 
the  individuality  of  portraiture  necessitates  accidental  deviations 
from  arbitrary  rules. 

A few  suggestions  may  be  made  with  reference  to  action  or 
pose,  as  evinced  in  sculpture.  All  outward  actions  of  the  body 
proceed  from  some  inward  impulse  of  mind,  unconsciously  per- 
haps, but  nevertheless  they  bear  strict  relation  to  character. 
The  ancients  regarded  slow  movements  of  the  body  as  a charac- 
teristic of  dignity  and  the  profounder  movements  of  thought. 
Demosthenes  reproaches  Nicobulus  for  his  quick  mode  of 
walking:  he  connected  impudent  talking  with  quick  walking. 
An  elegant  composure  of  action  is  a marked  characteristic  of 
Greek  art.  There  is  perhaps  no  more  marked  contrast  in  art 
between  the  ancient  and  modern  idea  of  the  manifestation  of 
supreme  power  than  that  afforded  by  the  Jupiter  of  Phidias 
and  the  Christ  of  Michael  Angelo,  as  depicted  in  his  “ Last 
Judgment.”  In  the  first  the  expression,  the  action,  is  one  of 
repose — power  at  rest,  unexercised,  undefined,  consequently  un- 
measurable. But  the  Christ  of  Michael  Angelo,  putting  forth 
his  denunciation  of  the  damned,  evinces  a power  that  must 
exert  itself  for  a special  object,  and  with  a vehemence  that  is 
disproportioned  to  a just  conception  of  that  power.  The  up- 


404 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


lifted  arm  and  the  lowering  features,  therefore,  suggest  finite 
limitations  less  grand  than  the  idea  of  supreme  power  conceived 
by  the  ancients. 

As  refined  taste,  no  less  than  great  elegance,  was  displayed 
by  the  ancients  in  their  draped  statues,  drapery  is  by  ho  means 
an  unimportant  element  of  beauty  in  sculpture.  As  more  draped 
than  nude  figures  were  executed  in  the  early  periods  of  Greek 
art — and  this  continued  to  be  the  case  in  regard  to  female  figures 
even  in  the  most  brilliant  epochs,  “ so  that  fifty  draped  statues 
may  be  counted  for  every  nude  one” — it  was,  of  course,  the  aim 
of  the  sculptor  at  all  times  “ to  attain  not  less  to  elegance  in 
drapery  than  to  beauty  in  the  nude  figure.” 

The  statues  of  goddesses  and  heroines  are  always  draped, 
with  the  exception  of  Venus  and  the  graces.  The  dress  con- 
sisted of  an  upper  and  an  under  garment,  the  pallium  and  the 
tunic — the  pallium  of  the  Greeks  corresponded  with  the  Roman 
toga;  the  tunic  was  of  linen;  both  garments  were  usually 
white.  The  women  frequently  wore  three  garments — the  man- 
tle, the  tunic,  and  an  undergarment  of  some  light  fabric,  with- 
out sleeves,  which  was  fastened  together  at  the  shoulder  with  a 
button.  The  usual  manner  of  wearing  the  toga,  as  seen  in 
ancient  statues,  was  to  draw  it  under  the  right  arm  and  cast  it 
over  the  left  shoulder.  Elegance  was  not  considered  by  the 
ancients  a property  of  the  dress  itself,  but  as  imparted  to  it  by 
the  wearer  in  the  arrangement  of  its  folds.  The  earliest  Romans 
are  said  merely  to  have  worn  the  toga;  the  tunic  was  a later 
addition.  Augustus  was  reproached  for  the  weakness  of  wear- 
ing nether-garments  in  cold  weather.  The  Greek  statues  of 
Demosthenes  and  Sophocles  are  clothed  simply  with  the  pal- 
lium, or  toga.  The  ancients  were  never  dazzled  with  the  merely 
ornamental. 

The  following  selection  from  the  “ Charmides”  of  Plato  may  _ 
serve  to  suggest  something  of  the  Greek  susceptibility  to  the 
beauty  of  physical  form:  “ ‘ I will  question  them,’  said  Socrates, 

‘ whether  among  the  youths  of  the  time  there  were  any  that  were 
distinguished  for  wisdom  or  for  beauty,  or  for  both.'  On  this, 
Critias,  looking  towards  the  door,  where  he  saw  some  youths 
coming  in  wrangling  with  one  another,  and  a crowd  of  others 
following,  said:  ‘As  for  beauty,  Socrates,  you  may  judge  for 


THE  SCULPTOR  AND  HIS  ART. 


405 


yourself;  for  those  who  have  just  entered  are  the  admirers  of 
him  who  is  reckoned  the  handsomest  young  man  now  going;  no 
doubt  they  are  his  precursors,  and  he  himself  will  soon  be  here.’ 
‘And  who,  and  whose  son,  is  he?’  said  Socrates.  ‘You  know 
him,’  answered  Critias,  ‘ tho  he  was  a child  when  you  went  away. 
It  is  Charmides,  the  son  of  our  uncle  Glaucon,  and  my  cousin.’ 
‘ By  Zeus ! I knew  him,’  said  Socrates ; ‘ even  then  he  was  not 
ill-favored  as  a boy;  but  he  must  be  now  quite  a young  man.’ 
‘You  will  soon  know,’  replied  Critias,  ‘how  big  he  is,  and  how 
well-favored.’  And  as  he  spoke,  Charmides  entered.  He  did 
seem  to  me  wonderfully  tall  and  beautiful,  and  all  his  com- 
panions appeared  to  be  in  love  with  him,  such  an  impression 
and  commotion  did  he  make  when  he  came  into  the  room. 
Other  admirers  followed  him.  That  we  men  looked  at  him  with 
pleasure  was  natural  enough;  but  I remarked  that  the  boys, 
even  the  smallest,  never  took  their  eyes  off  him,  but  all  looked 
at  him  like  persons  admiring  a statue.” 

27 


John  F.  Weir. 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


IN  attempting  to  define  the  limits  of  legislative  control  of 
railroads,  whether  de  jure  or  de  facto , the  first  requisite  is  to 
find  with  whom,  and  subject  to  what  conditions,  the  ownership 
of  them  lies.  Mankind  in  their  simplicity  have  believed,  and 
wrought  their  faith  into  their  fixed  and  not  easily  changed 
modes  of  speech  and  action,  that  those  whose  funds  build  the 
roads  own  them.  If  the  State  builds  a railroad,  it  owns  it, 
as  the  State  of  New  York  owns  the  Erie  Canal.  If  private  indi- 
viduals, under  a charter  of  incorporation  from  the  State,  build  a 
railroad  or  canal,  paying  all  charges  for  land,  construction,  and 
equipment  out  of  their  own  pockets,  as  they  have  built  the  New 
York  Central  alongside  of  the  Erie  Canal,  they  own  it.  But  no. 
According  to  that  master  of  bright  legal  paradox,  Judge  Black, 
in  his  recent  letter,  it  seems  that  the  common-sense  of  mankind, 
asserting  itself  in  its  habits  of  speech  and  action,  has  been  all 
astray  on  this  subject.  He  tells  us,  “The  corporations  who 
have  got  into  the  habit  of  calling  themselves  the  owners  of  the 
railroads  have  no  proprietary  right,  title,  or  claim  to  the  roads 
themselves,  but  a mere  franchise  annexed  to  and  exercisable 
thereon.”  A little  farther  on,  he  likens  the  proprietorship  of 
the  stockholders  of  a railroad  to  that  of  a collector  of  a port  in 
the  custom-house  he  occupies  in  the  discharge  of  his  office. 
That  is,  they  are  not  owners  at  all.  The  $ 5, 000, 000,000  expended 
by  our  own  and  foreign  investors  in  our  railroads  give  them  no 
ownership  whatever.  They  belong  to  the  State.  On  whatever 
theory  such  a doctrine  may  be  defended,  those  who  advance  it 
need  not  shrink  from  being  called  communists.  If  this  is  not 
communism  as  respects  this  immense  mass  of  property,  we  look 
in  vain  for  it.  Farmers  and  all  other  property-holders  may  as 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


407 


well  understand,  withal,  that  no  private  property  can  long  sur- 
vive the  grasping  of  railways  by  the  State.  Some  indeed,  as 
Mr.  Henry  George  in  his  “ Progress  and  Poverty”  (p.  364),  who 
favor  the  latter,  are  already  pressing  the  confiscation  of  land  by 
confiscating  its  rents. 

But  it  is  said  that  the  State  owns  these  properties  because  a 
part  of  the  land  they  occupy  has  been  obtained,  by  the  exercise 
of  the  State’s  power  of  eminent  domain,  from  such  proprietors 
as  would  otherwise  refuse  to  part  with  it,  if  not  utterly,  yet  at 
any  fair  rates.  But  this  is  only  the  power  to  get  it  by  paying  a 
fair  price,  judicially  ascertained.  To  whom  does  it  belong  if 
not  to  him  that  pays  for  it,  and  so  obtains  a deed  for  it?  Of 
course  the  State  aims  in  granting  this  high  power,  to  secure  a 
public  benefit  otherwise  unattainable,  by  enabling  parties  willing 
to  incur  the  expense  and  risk,  to  provide  means  of  transporta- 
tion so  indispensable  to  the  people  as  railways.  But  could  pri- 
vate capital  be  found  to  build  and  run  them  if  it  were  under- 
stood that  those  who  pay  for  them  do  not  own  them?  Never. 
With  such  an  understanding  there  would  not  be  one  mile  of 
railway  where  now  we  have  ten,  and  this  only  of  the  poorest 
kind.  Besides,  what  are  railway  mortgages  or  debentures  worth 
if  given  by  those  who  are  not  owners  of  the  property? 

However  the  title  to  the  railway  is  acquired  by  its  proprietors, 
in  all  circumstances  it  is  subject  to  State  taxation  unless  ex- 
pressly relieved  by  its  charter,  and  also  to  what  is  known  as  the 
police  law  of  the  State,  which  applies  to  all  property  according 
to  its  kind.  This  is  simply  the  means  by  which  the  body-politic 
protects  itself  from  harm.  It  aims  to  enforce  the  principle,  sic 
ntcre  tuo,  ut  alienum  non  Icedas.  All  laws  designed  to  protect 
from  injury  or  destruction  the  persons  or  property  of  those 
having  to  do  with  railroads,  whether  in  moving  upon  or  about 
them,  such  as  requiring  proper  brakes,  gates,  cattle-guards, 
fences,  switching  safely,  etc.,  fall  under  this  head. 

Railroads  also  fall  under  the  provisions  of  the  statute 
and  common  law  respecting  common  carriers.  This  be- 
' cause  they  are  such.  And  this  law  applies  to  them  in  a man- 
ner corresponding  to  their  nature  and  peculiarities,  holding 
them  to  reasonable  precautions  to  insure  safety;  responsibility 
for  losses  and  injuries  to  persons  and  property  transported 


408 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


by  them  arising  from  want  of  due  care ; also  to  impartiality  in  their 
dealings  with,  and  treatment  of,  all  parties  applying  for  trans- 
portation by  them.  Further,  like  all  other  common  carriers,  the 
common  law  requires  that  they  shall  be  “ reasonable”  in  their 
charges  and  accommodations,  all  circumstances  considered.  All 
this  may  be  assumed,  for  the  purposes  of  this  discussion,  to  be 
enforceable  before  our  courts  at  common  law,  without  special 
enactments,  however  these  may  sometimes  be  adopted  by  leg- 
islatures ex  abundanti  cautela.  But  it  is  not  so  much  the  prbi- 
ciples  of  impartiality  and  reasonableness  in  fares  and  accom- 
modations that  are  in  debate,  as  the  proper  interpretation  of 
and  mode  of  applying  them  in  relation  to  the  peculiar  and 
immensely  complicated  circumstances  of  railroads.  The  con- 
sideration of  these  will  bring  into  its  sweep  the  vexed  question 
of  discrimination  in  rates  in  all  its  aspects. 

Reasonings  based  on  supposed  analogies  between  railway 
and  other  modes  of  transportation  are  very  apt  to  mislead. 
English  railroad  legislation  long  proceeded  on  the  theory 
that  they  were  part  of  the  “ king’s  highway.”  It  tried  to  fix 
tolls  of  particular  articles  or  classes  of  articles,  till  they  were 
found  to  be  beyond  enumeration  or  feasible  classification,  and 
the  whole  attempt,  like  many  other  forms  of  legislative  inter- 
ference, has  been  gradually  abandoned  as  beyond  even  the 
“ omnipotence  of  Parliament.”  With  the  advantage  of  unity 
of  government  and  smallness  of  territory,  regulation  of  railroads 
by  Parliament  has  been  getting  more  and  more  minimized,  till 
some  of  the  pet  schemes  of  our  own  reformers  have  been  dis- 
carded, because  outgrown  or  proved  mischievous  by  experience. 
The  railway  is  a thing  sui  generis.  It  is  a highway,  resembling  a 
turnpike  or  canal  only  in  this  respect : that  it  is  for  purposes 
of  travel  or  transportation'  by  all  who  desire  to  use  it,  according 
to  the  conditions  peculiar  to  it.  If  built  by  private  capital,  it  is 
privileged  to  obtain  a fair  remuneration  for  this,  provided  the 
public  use  of  it  is  sufficient  for  the  purpose. 

The  fixing  of  the  rate  of  highway  tolls  by  the  charter,  or  by 
the  legislature,  is  confined  to  a few  simple  things,  for  which  just 
and  plain  rates  can  be  made  with  comparative  ease.  Neither  are 
such  roads  common  carriers.  Those  who  use  them  may  become 
common  carriers,  as  they  may  use  any  roadway  or  water-way, 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


409 


natural  or  artificial,  in  conformity  to  its  nature,  for  this  purpose. 
But  railroads,  while  possessing  immense  capacity  for  trans- 
portation, can  only  be  used  by  their  owners  or  lessees.  Not 
only  must  the  road-bed  and  track  be  theirs,  but  all  the  cars, 
engines,  rolling-stock,  machinery,  and  conveniences  for  trans- 
portation must  be  so,  and  worked  wholly  by  them.  Theirs 
alone  is  the  power  and  responsibility.  Otherwise  these  road- 
ways could  not  be  worked  a single  week  without  numerous  col- 
lisions and  wreckings.  They  can  transport  for  others,  but  they 
cannot  allow  others  to  put  their  own  cars  and  engines  on  their 
road  at  pleasure.  Their  charges  must  be  for  transporting  per- 
sons and  freight  in  vehicles,  and  by  motors  and  employes  wholly 
their  own,  or  wholly  subject  to  their  control.  Now  this  involves 
an  enormous  expense  for  repairs  of  road,  track,  bridges,  loco- 
motives, cars,  motive  power,  the  vast  pay-roll  of  employes,  etc., 
which  must  be  reimbursed  from  receipts  for  what  they  transport ; if 
possible,  too,  with  due  remuneration  to  the  capital  invested.  Here 
is  a vast  complexity  of  expenses,  also,  in  the  kinds  and  amounts  of 
the  articles  transported,  and  of  the  conditions  and  circumstances 
which  affect  the  relative  cost  of  such  transportation.  It  is  not 
within  the  capacity  of  any  legislature,  or  commission  thereof,  to 
adjust  a tariff  with  reference  to  each  article,  or  classification  of 
articles,  that  shall  be  always  and  everywhere  reasonable.  The 
problem  is  so  intricate  as  to  prevent  more  than  an  approximate 
adjustment  of  it,  even  after  the  longest  experience,  by  railroad 
experts  and  officials  themselves.  It  is  ever  growing  upon  them 
with  new  elements  of  intricacy,  and  tasking  their  ingenuity  for 
solution.  The  past  twenty  years  have  shown  that  fluctuations 
in  the  price  of  labor  and  the  purchasing  power  of  legal-tender 
money,  not  less  than  other  causes,  render  any  just  fixing  of  rates 
by  law  impossible. 

Meanwhile,  nothing  in  the  premises  impairs  the  obligation 
of  impartiality  on  the  part  of  railroads  towards  their  patrons ; 
that  is,  of  affording  all,  equal  accommodations  at  precisely  equal 
rates,  under  precisely  like  circumstances.  If  A and  B,  at  the 
same  time  and  place,  ask  like  rates  for  precisely  like  ser- 
vice, impartiality  requires  that  they  both  be  treated  alike.  That 
there  have  been  some  rather  gross  violations  of  this  is  prima 
facie  established  by  the  testimony  taken  before  the  Investigat- 


4io 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


ing  Committee  of  the  New  York  Legislature ; pre-eminently  in 
the  case  of  the  Standard  Oil  Company  and  its  accessories.  If  the 
railroads  made  any  contract,  as  is  alleged  and  we  have  not  seen  dis- 
proved, with  this  company  or  its  accessories  which  were  refused 
to  others  in  like  circumstances,  and  especially  a covenant  to  pro- 
tect any  of  these  corporations  from  “ competition,”  all  this  is  be- 
yond their  legitimate  province,  and  contrary  to  public  policy  and 
morality.  No  denial  nor  adequate  justification  of  having  made 
considerably  lower  charges  for  grain  transportation  to  some 
great  houses  in  New  York  than  to  others  has  been  brought  to 
our  knowledge.  Probably  a sufficiently  keen  experience  of  the 
effect  of  such  real  or  apparent  partiality  has  been  had  to  prevent 
its  repetition.  Probably,  too,  without  the  veil  of  secrecy  these 
transactions  would  not  have  occurred. 

On  the  other  hand,  we  see  no  sufficient  reason  for  anti- 
' discrimination  statutes  based  on  the  assumption  that,  in  order 
to  be  reasonable  and  impartial,  rates  must  vary  just  in  propor- 
tion to  the  amount,  distance,  or  speed  of  transportation.  In 
order  to  partiality,  unequal  favor  must  be  shown  to  different 
persons  in  like  circumstances.  Now  this  does  not  apply  where 
a greater  proportionate  charge  is  made  for  a shorter  than  a 
longer  haul  of  the  same  goods,  when  the  expense  of  terminal 
handling  is  the  same  for  each.  A high  authority,  speaking  from 
experience,  says  that  the  terminal  expenses  in  New  York,  inter- 
est of  capital  and  all  else  considered,  are  equal  to  one  hundred 
miles  of  haulage.  Consequently  the  cost  of  freight-carriage 
from  New  York  to  Newark,  nine  miles,  is  more  than  half  that 
to  Philadelphia,  ninety  miles.  It  varies,  too,  with  severity  of 
grades,  cost  of  construction,  fuel,  etc.  Nor  does  a failure  to  vary 
charges  as  the  amount  carried,  cctcris  paribus , necessarily  infer 
partiality.  It  is  so  evident  that  larger  amounts  can  be  carried 
proportionably  cheaper  than  smaller  ones,  that  this  has  generally 
been  conceded  by  the  most  extravagant  adversaries.  It  is  per- 
fectly evident  that  one  thousand  car-loads  could  be  profitably 
taken  from  Chicago  to  New  York  at  proportionably  lower  rates 
than  twenty.  Nay,  more : it  is  demonstrable  that  it  sometimes 
costs  more  to  carry  a single  or  few  parcels,  parts  of  car-loads,  car- 
load, or  car-loads,  a shorter  distance  than  a longer,  over  which 
trains  loaded  to  the  full  capacity  of  the  engine  can  be  carried  to 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


41  I 

adequate  terminal  facilities.  A full  train  of  anthracite  coal  can 
be  taken  from  Easton  to  Trenton  at  fifty  cents  per  ton.  To  drop 
a single  car-load  of  six  or  eight  tons  at  a way-station  on  the  road 
would,  we  learn,  cost  four  dollars, 'besides  the  cost  of  the  haul 
there.  It  can  hardly  be  questioned  that  a full  freight-train  from 
Chicago  to  New  York  can  take  on  its  full  maximum  there  at  a 
cheaper  rate  per  car  than  it  can  switch  off  and  otherwise  handle 
from  one  to  half  a dozen  cars  at  Fonda,  Deposit,  Cresson,  or 
Martinsburg. 

Anti-discrimination  statutes,  hardening  into  inflexible  laws, 
may  cause  more  real  partiality  than  impartiality.  Mathematical 
ratios  seem  very  conclusive  in  the  abstract,  until,  in  their  con- 
crete application,  they  are  often  antagonized  by  forces  as  inevi- 
table as  those  which  thwart  the  finest  contrivance  for  perpetual 
motion.  The  law  of  impartiality  is  right.  Any  fixing  of  rates 
by  law  to  enforce,  is  pretty  sure  to  defeat  it,  as  much  so  as  a 
law  that  street-cars  and  omnibuses  should  charge  in  exact  pro- 
portion to  the  mileage,  or  hotels  in  proportion  to  the  stay  of 
guests,  irrespective  of  other  considerations.  What  cannot  be 
accomplished  by  competition,  the  desire  of  patronage,  public 
opinion,  and  the  like,  in  these  respects,  never  can  be  effected  by 
mathematical  legislation.  Imperfections  and  grievances  will 
doubtless  remain,  at  the  best,  here  and  everywhere.  But  all  these 
things  in  railroads,  and  other  matters  innumerable,  whether,  as 
Lord  Coke  said,  “affected  with  a public  interest”  or  not,  might 
be  immeasurably  worse.  In  our  opinion  legislative  interference 
of  the  kind  invoked  would  be  sure  to  make  them  so.  Such  has 
been  the  effect  of  it  in  the  Granger  States,  in  Colorado,  in  Great 
Britain,  where,  of  one  kind  and  another,  it  has  been  annulled  or 
minimized  after  experience  of  its  unhappy  effects.1  The  courts 
can  now  enforce  impartiality  as  binding  at  common  law  on  the 
common  carrier.  It  is  for  them  to  determine  in  each  concrete 
case  brought  before  them,  whether  and  how  far  parties  differ- 
ently charged  or  otherwise  treated  were  in  such  “like  circum- 
stances” as  to  constitute  the  action  complained  of  a breach  of 
impartiality.  But  legislatures  can  rarely  frame  laws  to  deter- 
mine this  that  would  not  encounter  as  many  exceptions  as  a 


1 See  “Railroads:  their  Origin  and  Progress,”  by  C.  F.  Adams,  Jr.,  pp.  80-90. 


* 


412 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


revival  of  the  obsolete  laws  fixing  the  price  of  bread  and  meat, 
or  a law  that  merchants  should  show  impartiality  by  charging 
at  the  same  rate  for  a piece,  a bale,  or  a hundred  bales  of  the 
same  kinds  of  goods,  and  not  higher  than  a certain  maximum 
profit  of  ten  per  cent  in  any  case.  As  to  any  secret  rates,  draw- 
backs, rebates,  contracts  inconsistent  with  this  impartiality,  they 
are  not  to  be  defended.  Yet  we  find  that  Belgium,  in  work- 
ing her  own  state  railroads,  fell  into  the  system  of  “ special 
rates.”1  Abuses  of  this  sort  have  grown  up  which  due  publicity 
will  rapidly  reduce  to  a minimum. 

But  it  will  not  do  to  say  that  a railroad  may  not  regulate 
its  rates  to  a reasonable  extent  for  the  purpose  of  develop- 
ing business  on  its  line,  because  the  power  is  liable  to  abuse. 
All  power  has  this  liability.  Denied  this  privilege,  many  of 
them  would  never  be  built,  especially  those  depending  on  land- 
grants  or  running  through  new  and  sparsely  settled  countries. 
No  doubt  special  rates  may  be  made  in  order  to  plant  or  de- 
velop or  keep  alive  a business  that  will  directly  or  indirectly 
bring  valuable  patronage  to  the  railroad.  Still  this  must  be 
subject  to  the  law  of  impartiality;  i.e.,  it  must  be  done  alike 
for  all  and  each  in  like  circumstances.  “ Reasonable”  is  the 
standard  established  bv  the  common  law  in  regard  to  all  de- 
mands  by  and  upon  railroads,  whether  relating  to  the  police 
regulations  for  the  safety  of  all  persons  and  property  dependent 
on  their  care  and  vigilance,  or  to  the  requisites  to  impartiality. 
The  courts  are  to  ascertain  and  judge  of  this  “reasonableness” 
in  actual  cases  brought  before  them.  No  cast-iron  statute  in- 
flexible to  circumstances  can  do  it.  And  this  reasonableness 
may  vary  with  the  circumstances  of  different  roads.  It  might 
seem  a good  law  that  no  cars  shall  be  run  without  Westing- 
house  air-brakes.  How  soon  may  a cheaper  and  better  brake  be 
invented  ? Or  how  many  roads  are  unable  without  bankruptcy 
to  come  up  to  this  grade  of  high  equipment?  A decision  in  a 
recent  case  by  a Kentucky  court  shows  how  exquisitely  such  a 
tribunal  may  ascertain  the  “ reasonable”  in  an  actual  case,  when 
an  unbending  statute  would  be  a signal  instance  of  sumtna  lex , 
summa  injuria.  It  was  a question  of  damages  for  the  death  of 


1 “Railroads:  their  Origin  and  Progress,’’  p.  oo. 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


413 


a person  caused  by  the  wrecking  of  a train  running  into  a herd 
of  cattle  on  the  track,  where  there  was  no  negligence  on  the  part 
of  the  employes  of  the  road,  or  failure  to  use  all  available  means 
to  prevent  the  disaster.  But  it  was  proved  that,  with  West- 
inghouse  air-brakes,  it  might  have  been  averted.  Hence  it  was 
claimed  and  adjudged  that  the  company  was  able  to  provide 
them,  and  therefore  liable  for  lack  of  due  care  and  diligence  in 
not  providing  them. 

We  have  seen  how  utterly  inapt  legislation  is,  which  attempts 
to  proportion  charges  to  distance  or  amount  of  transportation 
in  all  circumstances.  Moreover,  the  value  of  the  service  of  the 
railroads  at  different  places  must  or  certainly  ought  to  weigh  in 
determining  charges.  The  value  of  any  service,  when  rendered 
to  others  for  compensation,  is  what  they  can  pay  with  advantage, 
and  will  pay,  rather  than  not  have  it.  Now,  in  the  case  of  rail- 
way transportation,  that  value  varies  greatly  for  a like  amount 
of  service  at  different  places  and  times.  Where  there  is  a com- 
peting water  or  railway  communication,  exactly  the  same  service 
may  be  worth  far  less  than  where  there  is  none,  and  more  at 
some  of  these  latter  places  than  at  others.  The  number  of  rail- 
roads is  large  which  cannot  pay  expenses,  unless  they  can  charge 
all  along  the  line  in  some  proportion  to  the  value  of  the  service 
rendered.  The  number  is  much  larger  in  which  no  proper  re- 
muneration of  capital  can  be  made  without  this  liberty.  They 
cannot  fairly  live  without  adding  to  the  higher  rates  which  they 
can  command  where  there  is  no  competition,  the  lower  which  is 
the  most  they  can  get  where  there  is  competition.  Without  this 
they  may  be  unable  to  maintain  the  expenses  of  the  trains  that 
carry  all  they  can  get,  but  not  to  half  their  capacity,  at  the  higher 
rates.  If  they  were  shut  up  to  either  class  alone,  or  if  they  were 
obliged  to  carry  all  at  the  lowest  rates  of  competitive  points, 
they  could  not  live,  much  less  thrive,  or  get  beyond  that  starve- 
ling standard  which  necessitates  the  highest  rates  for  the  poor- 
est service,  and  adds  to  a famishing  railroad  a famishing  popula- 
tion alongside  of  it. 

All  this  is  conclusively  demonstrated  by  M.  de  la  Gournerie,. 
Inspector-General  of  the  French  Corps  of  Bridges  and  Highways, 
to  be  true  not  only  of  railway  but  other  modes  of  transportation, 
in  an  article  published  in  the  “ Bulletin  of  the  Society  for  the 


4*4 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  FIE  IV. 


Encouragement  of  National  Industry  in  France,”  and  repub- 
lished in  the  Appendix  to  the  volume  of  “Testimony  of  George 
R.  Blanchard  before  the  Investigating  Committee  of  New  York 
State.”  (pp.  682-3.) 

This  brings  us  to  the  “ pooling”  now  so  largely  adopted  by 
the  railroads  at  their  great  competitive  centres,  especially  in  the 
interior,  for  carriage  to  the  seaboard.1  There  have  no  doubt 
been  just  causes  for  grievance  to  shippers  and  merchants  in  the 
sudden  fluctuations  of  rates  of  transportation  from  these  great 
centres,  thus  adding  another  element  to  the  capriciojjs  uncer- 
tainties so  baneful  to  sound  business.  It  was  the  shock  of  com- 
petition between  these  colossal  carrying  agents — a shock  as  in- 
evitable as  the  collisions  of  trains  which  made  such  havoc  with 
life,  limb,  and  goods  in  the  early  days  of  railroads,  and  which,  after, 
all  the  securities  devised  to  prevent  them,  will  occasionally  recur. 
Desperate  unregulated  competition  tends  sooner  or  later  to  the 
ruin  of  the  roads  and  the  injury  of  the  people.  Now  there  are 
only  three  ways  of  ending  it : 1.  Governmental  prohibition,  which 
means  forbidding  any  railroad  to  carry  between  competitive 
points  below  a certain  minimum  rate.  And  what  legislature, 
State  or  national,  will  undertake  to  forbid  a railroad  from  carry- 
ing as  cheaply  as  it  pleases?  Or  2.  By  the  stronger  crushing 
out  the  weaker,  resulting  in  a survival  of  the  strongest  only,  if 
not  the  fittest.  Is  this  the  issue  coveted  ? Or  3.  What,  in  slang 
phrase,  is  called  “ pooling,”  and  is  advocated  by  such  competent 
observers  and  long  students  of  the  subject  as  C.  F.  Adams,  Jr., 
under  the  more  dignified  title  of  the  “ Federation  of  Railroads.” 
The  essence  of  this  is  an  agreement  among  them  for  each  to 
accept  as  its  share  of  the  competitive  business,  at  a moder- 
ately remunerative  rate  common  to  all,  what  shall  be  judged  to  be 
its  just  proportion  by  an  umpire  or  board  selected  by  them  all  to 
make  the  apportionment.  This  is  vehemently  attacked  by  some. 
It  is  said  to  deprive  the  public  of  the  benefits  of  competition. 
It  has,  however,  only  ended  an  extreme  competition  ruinous  to  all 
parties.  Mr.  Simon  Sterne,  in  his  great  argument  before  the 
Special  Assembly  Committee  versus  the  railroads,  admits  that  it 

1 On  this  subject  the  writer  advances  no  opinions  not  to  be  found  in  his  article 
on  the  “ Great  Railroad  Strike,”  in  the  Presbyterian  Quarterly  and  Princeton  Re- 
view, for  October,  1877. 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


415 


“ has  brought  about  a change  for  the  better  from  that  which  pre- 
vailed immediately  before  the  pooling  arrangements  were  made” 
(p.  97).  He  insists  that  it  “ has  been  discovered  in  this  country  and 
England  that  competition  was  not  the  proper  regulator  of  rail- 
way charges”  (p.  104). 

The  several  doctrines  on  this  subject  insisted  on  by  the  as- 
sailants of  the  proper  autonomy  of  railroads,  would  either  de- 
stroy them  or  greatly  aggravate  the  evils  of  which  they  com- 
plain. Suppose  that,  first,  there  could  be  no  stop  or  check  to 
the  internecine  competition  at  Chicago,  St.  Louis,  and  elsewhere, 
and,  next,  that  railroads  must  charge  the  same  proportionate 
rates  from  all  other  points  as  from  these.  If  they  should  con- 
tinue the  competitive  through  business,  and  do  all  other  busi- 
ness at  these  ruinous  rates,  this  would  soon  bankrupt  and  wreck 
them.  If  they  discontinued  the  through  competitive  business, 
they  would  be  obliged  to  charge  higher  local  rates  from  non-com- 
petitive places  than  ever.  Or,  if  this  were  impracticable,  the  road 
would  sink  in  its  condition,  equipments,  capacity  for  speed,  safety, 
and  accommodation  far  below  what  it  is  when  great  through 
trains  help  sustain  and  make  profitable  a more  perfect  road,  and 
increased  accommodations  in  every  department.  All  places  gain 
on  the  whole,  even  if  any  lose  in  some  particulars,  from  the  re- 
inforcement of  local  with  through  business.  They  commonly 
have  better  roads,  better  tracks,  better  trains,  and  more  of  them. 

In  connection  with  the  proportioning  of  railroad  charges 
to  the  value  of  their  services,  the  question  of  charging  for  carry- 
ing articles  “what  they  will  bear”  comes  in.  This  vague  and 
elastic  phrase  has  figured  very  odiously,  and  played  an  impor- 
tant part  in  late  railroad  controversies.  It  was  employed  in  a 
joint  answer  of  the  presidents  of  the  two  great  New  York  trunk- 
roads  to  the  inquiries  of  the  legislative  committee  as  follows: 

“The  managers  of  a railway  company  desire  to  make  all  the  money 
they  can  for  their  clients,  and  to  do  this  they  have  before  them  the  ques- 
tion, What  rate,  within  their  chartered  limits,  will  an  article  bear  that  will 
yield  the  largest  profit,  and  at  the  same  time  stimulate  its  production.” 

We  have  not  struck  upon  the  origin  of  a different  twist  of 
this  phrase  put  in  quotation-marks  in  the  question  of  the  New 
York  Chamber  of  Commerce  Committee,  which  professes  to  give 


416 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


the  true  meaning  of  the  doctrine  on  this  subject  of  late  sanc- 
tioned by  authoritative  railroad  managers: 

“ 7.  Do  you  think  it  is  safe  to  allow  railroad  managers  to  disregard  the 
old  theory  upon  which  charges  for  transportation  were  based ; namely, 
that  they  should  be  ‘ reasonable  ’ and  based  upon  ‘ cost  of  service,'  and 
adopt  the  new  theory  which  they  have  annunciated  of  charging  'all  the 
traffic  will  bear,'  themselves  being  sole  judges  of  this  question  ?” 

Yet  the  principle  involved  is  so  obvious  that  the  framers  of  the 
question  are  constrained  to  admit  it  in  the  very  document  con- 
taining it.  A page  or  two  farther  on  in  their  Report  they  say : 

“ Of  course  the  consideration  of  what  the  traffic  will  bear  is  one  of  the 
elements  entering  into  the  fixing  of  all  rates  for  transportation,  but  to  for- 
mally recognize  the  abrogation  of  a principle  as  great  as  competition  is  a 
step  your  Committee  believe  the  American  people  are  not  ready  to  take.” 

Why,  then,  object  to  railroads  considering  “what  the  traffic 
will  bear”  in  adjusting  their  tariff,  if  in  the  nature  of  things  it 
must  come  in?  It  is  impossible  to  exclude  the  value  element 
of  railroad  service  from  the  estimation  of  its  proper  price.  To 
put  it  as  the  seventh  question  above  quoted  puts  it,  as  if  this 
were  a new  standard,  excluding  “ reasonableness,”  consideration 
of  “cost  of  service”  and  competition,  is  absurd.  By  their  own 
showing  it  must  be  a great  element  in  determining  “reasona- 
bleness” of  charges,  and  the  necessity  of  it  grows  out  of  com- 
petition at  least  as  often  as  anything  else. 

As  to  “abrogating  competition”  in  transportation,  it  is  im- 
possible and  undesirable.  It  needs  regulation,  not  destruction. 
Like  so  many  other  things,  within  bounds  it  is  an  inestimable 
good ; beyond  these  it  becomes  an  agent  of  devastation  and 
ruin,  like  an  uncontrolled  locomotive,  or  a fire  let  loose.  Abro- 
gate competition  ! As  soon  abrogate  gravitation  or  the  tides ! 
There  are  forces  that  will  and  must  prevent  transportation 
charges  from  competitive  points  rising  for  any  length  of  time 
above,  if  they  cannot  prevent  their  falling  below,  a reasonable 
standard.  One  is  the  great  navigable  water-courses  from  the  in- 
terior, west,  south,  north,  and  south-west  to  the  ocean.  Another 
is  the  steady  multiplication  of  new  lines  from  the  great  interior 
railroad  centres  where  agricultural  products  accumulate  for 
transportation  to  the  Atlantic  and  gulf  ports.  Now  if  from 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


417 


great  competitive  points,  which  these  new  lines  are  con- 
stantly reaching,  profits  can  be  made  at  much  lower  rates  than 
those  now  established  by  mutual  agreement  of  existing  lines,  the 
new  lines  will  immediately  “cut  under”  them,  in  order  to  grasp 
a larger  share  of  the  business  than  they  could  be  allowed  in  the 
pool.  Here  is  competition.  Not  only  so;  but  rates  *must  be 
limited  by  the  very  nature  of  things  unless  the  managers  would 
limit  and  minimize  their  business.  If  their  rates  rise  above  cer- 
tain limits,  they  raise  the  price  of  our  products  in  foreign  mar- 
kets too  high  for  export,  and  consequently  cut  off  transportation 
for  this  purpose.  This  of  such  great  entrepots  for  distribution  and 
transportation  at  home  and  abroad  as  Chicago,  St.  Louis,  and 
Kansas  City.  But  there  is  hardly  a local  town  of  importance  on 
our  great  trunk-lines  which  is  not  pierced  by  competing  lines, 
direct  or  indirect,  to  all  important  points,  in  addition  to  navigable 
waters  in  close  proximity.  Moreover,  an  undue  tariff  from  any 
place  of  importance  is  sure  sooner  or  later  to  bring  competition, 
and  to  impair  the  business  and  patronage  that  would  otherwise 
arise.  If  all  these  were  abolished,  the  competition  between  cities 
would  still  operate.  There  are  forces  more  certain  and  mighty 
than  legislation  that  will  keep  alive  all  that  is  healthy  in  com- 
petition, especially  so  long  as  a general  railroad  law,  now  almost 
universally  prevalent,  confronts  special  charters  and  monopoly 
privileges. 

The  report  from  which  we  have  just  quoted  proposes  what  is 
so  often  and  loudly  urged,  that  the  people  should  “take  every 
constitutional  means  to  prohibit  combinations  and  enforce  com- 
petition as  if  the  two  were  incompatible.  We  do  not  see  how. 
Combinations  are  of  two  kinds;  either  of  those  which  form  parts 
of  a continuous  line,  as  the  several  roads  between  New  York, 
Albany,  and  Buffalo,  which  were  combined  in  one  corporation, 
the  New  York  Central  and  Hudson;  or  of  those  which  go  from 
one  point  to  another  by  different  routes,  as  the  New  York  Cen- 
tral and  Hudson,  and  the  Pennsylvania,  from  Chicago  to  New 
York  City.  The  former  sort  of  consolidation  it  is  about  as  easy, 
sensible,  and  advantageous  to  prevent,  as  it  would  be  to  turn  the 
Hudson  River  into  a series  of  separate  levels  by  dam  and  lock 
for  slack-water  navigation.  The  vast  gain  in  economy,  speed, 
safety,  profit  of  transportation  to  the  railroads  and  the  public, 


418 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


from  placing  long  stretches  of  railroad  under  one  direction  is  too 
plain  to  be  disputed.  The  progress  of  such  unification  can  no  more 
be  arrested  than  the  westward  march  of  empire.  Probably,  how- 
ever, it  is  the  other  form  of  “ combination”  that  legislation  is  to  be 
invoked  to  prevent ; viz.,  an  understanding  between  roads  run- 
ning from  one  competing  point  to  another  by  different  routes. 
It  will  take  something  more  than  legislation  to  prevent  forward- 
ers from  the  same  place  to  the  same  place  charging  the  same 
rates,  and  from  having  a mutual  understanding  what  this  rate 
shall  be.  Adversaries  themselves  being  judges,  this  is  far  better 
for  all  parties  than  desperate  and  reckless  competition. 

But  railroads  are  corporations,  and  corporations  are  the  por- 
tents of  the  time,  mightier  than  the  people,  and  swaying  an  iron 
sceptre  over  them.  Surely  human  depravity  worms  itself  into  cor- 
porations as  well  as  elsewhere,  and  in  all  places  in  some  propor- 
tion to  the  scope  offered  it.  The  question  is  not  whether  it 
shall,  but  how  it  shall  least,  infest  all  things  human.  But  do 
those  who  are  declaiming  and  raving  against  corporations  really 
think  themselves  through  to  the  logical  outcome  of  such 
assaults?  It  is  utterly  impossible  to  harness  the  gigantic 
forces  of  nature  to  serve  man,  as  steam  is  now  made  to  do, 
without  employing  immense  masses  of  capital  for  this  pur- 
pose. Small  capitalists  are  debarred  from  all  possible  partici- 
pation in  this  kind  of  property,  unless  it  is  divided  into  shares 
capable  of  distribution  and  ownership  in  larger  or  smaller  par- 
cels, held  and  managed  by  a corporation.  Otherwise  these 
vast  properties  so  necessary  to  the  convenience,  commerce,  and 
productiveness  of  the  country,  must  be  exclusively  the  private 
property  of  single  or  few  individuals.  Is  that  the  alternative  so 
much  coveted  ? Probably  not.  The  outcry  against  corpora- 
tions is  an  outcry  not  only  against  a few  railroad  magnates,  but 
against  the  vast  multitude  of  small  owners,  including  widows 
and  orphans  and  the  prudent  laborer  whose  savings  are  invested 
in  them,  whether  they  be  railroads,  canals,  banks,  mines,  manufac- 
tories, steamboat  companies,  or  whatever  else.  To  hurl  these  cata- 
pults at  corporations  is  but  saying,  either  that  the  productive 
properties  they  hold  shall  be  annihilated  ; or  that  they  shall  be 
owned  by  individuals,  single -or  in  partnership  ; or  that  they  shall 
be  owned  by  the  State — from  which  latter  condition  we  might 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


419 


expect  utter  political  demoralization  and  national  bankruptcy. 
What  are  all  the  present  “spoils  of  victory”  in  elections  in 
comparison  with  a prize  of  $5,000,000,000,  now  rapidly  expand- 
ing to  $10,000,000,000?  Where  the  carcass  is,  there  are  the 
vultures.  Are  not  our  river  arid  harbor  bills  proof  enough  of 
this  ? And  as  surely  as  every  Stony  Brook  or  Buttermilk  Falls 
now  demands  its  appropriation  as  a condition  of  voting  for  ap- 
propriations for  improving  real  harbors,  will  not  every  cross- 
road demand  its  railroad  station  as  a condition  of  authorizing 
really  national  lines?  Is  it  not  pretty  certain,  too,  that  when 
other  revenues  for  the  purpose  fail  from  exhaustion,  the  vacuum 
will  be  supplied  by  the  indefinite  issue  of  irredeemable  legal- 
tender  paper  money — from  all  which  may  God  deliver  us ! 
Demagogues  are  already  proposing,  as  the  watchward  of  future 
political  campaigns,  that  “ all  privileges  conferred  upon  corpora- 
tions are  rights  taken  from  the  great  body  of  the  people,” 
and  to  “ assail  corporations  and  the  officials  who  act  in  their 
interests,”  and  “ on  this  line  to  establish  an  aggressive  cam- 
paign.” Such  people  may  light  a fire.  Any  incendiary  can  do 
this.  It  does  not  follow  that  they  can  so  easily  put  it  out  be- 
fore it  burns  them  out.  Let  this  raid  on  corporations  succeed 
in  destroying  them,  and  they  may  contend  for  other  property 
tenures  who  will.  They  will  doubtless  get  their  labor  for  their 
pains.  The  great  landholders  will  come  next,  and  the  smaller 
ones  will  quickly  be  drawn  into  their  wake.  Agrarianism  and 
communism  will  luxuriate  in  the  ashes  of  their  own  fires. 

We  may  not  ignore  the  fierce  outcry  against  railroads  as 
monopolies  and  extortioners.  Judge  Cooley  says  : “ The  word 
monopoly  has  an  ominous  sound  to  American  ears,  and  when- 
ever the  appellation  fairly  attaches  itself  to  anything,  it  is  already 
condemned  in  the  public  mind”  (PRINCETON  REVIEW,  .March 
l878,p.  257).  Hence  the  eagerness  with  which  the  assailants  of 
any  kind  of  business,  privilege,  or  property  try  to  make  it  odious 
by  hurling  at  it  the  epithets  of  monopoly  or  extortion.  But  in  no 
proper  sense  are  the  railroads  of  the  country  monopolies.  They 
are  all  exposed  to  the  construction  of  competing  lines,  and  it  is 
only  the  fewest  that  have  wholly  escaped,  and  fewer  still  that  will 
hereafter  wholly  escape  competition.  Most  of  the  States  allow 
the  construction  of  railroads  ad  libitum , under  general  laws.  In 


420 


THE  PRINCE  TO. V REVIEW. 


others,  special  charters  are  freely  granted  when  asked  by  peti- 
tioners able  and  willing  to  build  roads.  No  vestige  of  railroad 
monopoly  exists.  To  say  that  because  people  have  only  a sin- 
gle railroad  near  them,  therefore  this  road  has  monopoly  privi- 
leges, is  like  saying  that  cases  of  being  near  a single  store,  or 
craftsman,  or  hotel,  turns  them  into  monopolies. 

Never  was  a truer  sentence  uttered  than  that  of  the  late  Dr. 
Chapin  at  some  festivity  in  New  York  : “The  LOCOMOTIVE  IS 
A GREAT  DEMOCRAT.”  Nowhere,  not  even  at  the  polls,  are  all 
more  completely  on  a level  than  in  the  American  railway-car, 
and  that,  too,  in  the  enjoyment  of  advantages  and  comforts 
unknown  half  a century  ago  to  the  proudest  monarchs,  with 
thousands  of  chariots  and  horses  at  their  command.  But  the 
steam-chariot  cannot  thus  be  a great  democrat  without  being 
also,  within  due  limits,  a great  autocrat.  On  his  own  road  he 
must  be  sovereign.  All  else  must  give  way  and  clear  the  track. 
Nothing  must  or  can  stand  before  him.  One  master-mind,  too, 
must  rule  the  whole  road  and  its  motors,  or  confusion  and  deso- 
lation come  in  place  of  those  blessings  which,  rightly  guided, 
with  colossal  might,  he  bestows  on  all.  And  yet,  as  with  man 
himself,  his  unmatched  strength  is  close  to  the  greatest  weak- 
ness. The  endowments  whereby  man  is  a but  little  lower  than 
an  angel,  in  the  very  image  of  his  God,  make  him  capable  of 
becoming  a very  worm,  a brute,  a fiend,  “ crushed  before  the 
moth.”  So,  if  the  locomotive  can  move  man  and  his  products 
with  a resistless  energy  and  speed,  a rotten  tie,  a loose  spike,  an 
unseen  flaw,  a mischievous  boy,  or  senseless  animal  may  get  in 
its  way,  and,  even  if  destroyed  itself,  precipitate  it  and  its  train 
to  utter  destruction. 

We  have  uttered  no  uncertain  sound  in  favor  of  regulated,  and 
against  reckless,  competition.  Not  less  than  for  other  reasons 
we  favor  the  “ federation  of  railroads  ” in  order  to  fix  steady 
and  fair  prices  for  transportation,  and  prevent  such  evils,  so 
far  as  they  are  due  to  this  cause.  Nor  have  we  yet  heard  of 
any  other  mode  of  preventing  these  that  would  not  bring  in 
tenfold  greater  ones.  But,  as  it  is  not  possible  that  all  evil  can 
be  utterly  eliminated  from  competition,  or  anything  else  earthly 
and  human,  however  beneficial  on  the  whole,  let  us  none  the  less 
do  our  best  to  minimize  it.  It  is  also  worth  while  to  remember 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


421 


that  fluctuation  of  railroad  rates  is,  even  at  its  worst,  but  one  of 
many  more  formidable,  yet  unjustifiable,  causes  of  such  fluctua- 
tions, which  are  quite  beyond  the  reach  of  legislation.  We  speak 
not  now  of  those  which  arise  from  fluctuations  of  supply  and 
demand,  issuing  from  providential  causes,  such  as  the  state,  of 
the  crops,  markets,  belligerent  or  peaceful  relations  at  home 
and  abroad,  but  rather  of  what  is  due  to  the  voluntary  inter- 
ference of  mischievous  human  agencies.  Prices  of  the  chief 
articles  of  railroad  transportation  are  constantly  forced  up 
and  down,  not  only  to  the  prodigious  risk  and  frequent  ruin 
of  dealers  in  these  articles,  but  even  to  the  taking  of  the 
bread  out  of  the  mouths,  the  life-blood  out  of  the  veins,  of 
the  poor  and  needy,  and  the  stinting  of  the  comforts  and  neces- 
saries of  life  for  the  average  laborer.  What  are  all  the  variations 
of  railroad  charges  in  their  effects  on  merchants,  shopkeepers, 
and  the  cost  of  subsistence  to  the  people,  compared  with  the 
“ corners”  produced  by  the  great  speculators  and  Napoleonic 
gamblers  in  wheat,  pork,  cotton,  coffee,  and  the  like,  who  seek 
to  control  the  market,  and,  by  monopoly  prices,  to  enrich  them- 
selves through  a forced  levy  on  every  consumer  in  the  land?  To 
wrench  these  out  of  the  people  by  a turn  of  their  speculative 
crank  is  to  such  men  as  light  a matter  as  a snap  of  the  finger. 
We  notice  names  connected  with  this  onset  upon  railroads  for 
causing  fluctuations  of  prices,  of  men  who  have  alternately 
grasped  millions  and  got  mired  in  bankruptcy  by  such  foolhardy 
tossing  of  the  dice,  to  gain  or  lose  all,  in  trying  to  monopo- 
lize and  force  up  the  prices  of  indispensable  necessaries  or  com- 
forts of  life.  What  then  ? Can  legislation  stop  it?  It  has  not 
been  yet  found  how,  without  interfering  with  that  freedom  of 
contract  which  is  one  of  the  highest  prerogatives  of  man,  to 
surrender  which  is  a degradation,  to  possess  which  is  to  possess 
what  is  capable  of  immense  abuses  as  well  as  noblest  uses. 

Men  are  about  Wall  Street  not  only  dealing  legitimately  in 
money  and  securities,  but  wielding  money  by  the  million,  and 
tens  of  millions,  for  the  sole  purpose  of  so  raising  or  depressing 
prices  as  may  further  their  speculative  movements.  Nothing  is 
more  common  than  to  loan  millions  one  day  upon  call  to  tempt 
smaller  speculators  for  a rising  market,  and  to  call  it  in  the  next 
day,  or  when  it  suits  their  purpose,  so  as  to  strangle  the  simple- 
28 


422 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


tons  they  have  lured  into  their  toils.  This  not  only  makes  or 
ruins,  helps  or  hurts,  the  neophytes  who  are  scenting  the  Stock 
Exchange  for  the  chance  of  finding  a bonanza  in  the  wake  of  the 
“ great  operators,”  but  it  tightens  money  and  causes  injury  in 
every  department  of  business,  and  nowhere  more  than  in  pro- 
duce, groceries,  and  dry-goods.  Can  any  legislation  be  devised 
to  stop  this  which  will  not  do  far  more  harm  than  good?  Even 
in  the  church,  tares  will  get  mixed  with  the  wheat,  often  so  that 
they  cannot  be  rooted  out  without  destroying  the  wheat. 

Much  is  said  of  railroads  revolutionizing  the  seats  of  trade 
and  of  special  industries.  There  is  no  doubt  of  it  and  no  help 
for  it,  nor  is  this  any  just  ground  of  complaint,  unless  it  be 
caused  by  what,  all  things  considered,  is  partiality  towards  par- 
ticular persons  and  places.  It  has  been  the  effect  of  improved 
methods  and  routes  of  transportation  and  travel  in  all  ages  and 
countries.  The  Erie  Canal  pushed  the  great  sources  of  wheat 
and  lumber  supply  to  the  west  of  where  it  had  been.  The  rail- 
roads have  driven  them  still  farther  and  yet  farther  west.  This 
is  inevitable.  As  surely  as  man  will  seek  the  maximum  of  utili- 
ties with  the  minimum  of  effort,  he  will  use  the  railroads  and 
steamships  to  this  end  when  he  can.  What  then?  Has  this 
destroyed  or  impaired  agriculture  in  the  Eastern  or  Middle 
States?  Never.  It  has  changed  the  form  of  it  somewhat..  But 
statistics  show  a great  increase  in  Massachusetts  and  New  York 
of  the  number  of  farms,  the  quantity,  variety,  and  value  of 
their  products,  nay,  even  a considerable  advance  in  the  amount 
of  wheat  raised  in  the  Empire  State.  That  some  thin  and  ex- 
hausted farms  should  be  abandoned  or  pass  into  the  hands  of 
foreign-born  laborers  now  become  capitalists  is  a matter  of 
course,  railroads  or  no  railroads.  To  complain,  as  some  do,  that 
one  cannot  be  sure  that  the  business-place  he  buys  in  New  York 
now  may  not  be  less  suitable  and  valuable  five  years  hence,  and 
lay  it  to  the  charge  of  the  railroads,  is  puerile.  It  is  hardly  forty 
years  since  the  average  New  York  merchant  felt  that  he  had 
made  the  surest  provision  for  his  family  if  he  left  them  stores 
in  Pearl  Street,  then  the  centre  of  dry-goods  jobbing.  This  has 
since  crept  up  Broadway  and  cross-streets,  till  it  centres  around 
Franklin  Street,  while  Pearl  Street  property  is  relatively  second 
or  third  class.  Scarcely  a generation  has  passed  since  the  Astor 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS.  423 

House  was  the  leading  hotel,  without  a rival  above  City  Hall 
Park,  and  considerably  less  than  half  a century  since  it  was 
built.  The  railroads  are  responsible  for  this  only  as  they  are 
responsible  for  the  growth  of  the  metropolis. 

The  question  of  limiting  the  earnings  or  dividends  of  rail- 
roads has  comednto  some  prominence  in  connection  with  these 
discussions.  This  cannot  be  of  great  moment  as  long  as  the 
average  dividends  of  the  railroads  of  the  country  are  about 
two,  and  in  the  most  favored  States  ordinarily  only  three,  per 
cent  on  their  capital.1 *  Of  the  great  trunk-lines,  the  Erie  with 
its  enormous  earnings  is,  and-  always  has  been,  saying  nothing 
of  the  future,  far  enough  from  any  dividends  from  earnings. 
The  Pennsylvania  had  to  suspend  them  for  years,  and  the 
Baltimore  and  Ohio  at  various  times.  Mr.  Hepburn,  Bank 
Superintendent  of  the  State  of  New  York,  says,  in  his  recent 
report,  that  in  the  State  of  New  York,  “excluding  leased 
lines,  there  are  only  two  railroads,  the  New  York  Central  and 
Hudson,  and  Boston  and  Albany,  that  for  five  years  past 
have  paid  consecutive  annual  dividends  amounting  to  five  per 
cent  each.”  3 As  to  the  leased  lines,  the  lessees,  with  a single  excep- 
tion, to  the  best  of  our  knowledge,  altho  ranking  as  wealthy 
corporations,  have  paid  no,  or  next  to  no,  dividends  for  nearly  the 
same  period.  Now  as  to  profits,  New  York  railroads  stand  high, 
on  the  average,  in  competition  with  those  of  the  entire  United 
States.  The  risks,  therefore,  of  railroad  investment  are  some- 
thing tremendous,  arising  from  various  sources  : the  frequent 
lack  of  remunerative  business  ; the  liability  to  lose  it  through  the 
construction  of  competing  lines  ; the  exposure  to  all  sorts  of  de- 
structive casualties  from  fire,  flood,  tempest,  collisions,  flaws 
in  rolling-stock  or  rails ; the  neglect  or  forgetfulness  of  servants, 
in  all  of  which  the  railway  company,  i.e.  stockholders,  must 
indemnify  for  losses  and  injuries,  sometimes  of  prodigious  magni- 
tude, consuming  profits,  and  even  bankrupting  roads.  At  best 
there  is  the  constant  exposure  to  new  and  competing  roads  which 
may  render  a property,  before  valuable,  utterly  or  comparatively 
valueless.  The  risks  are  therefore  immense.  All  losses  must  be 


1 See  “Railroads  of  the  U.  S.,”  by  Edward  Atkinson,  p.  29. 

s Supplement  to  Com.  and  Financial  Chronicle,  Feb.  1881,  pp.  1,  2. 


424 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


borne  by  the  stockholders  first  and  creditors  next.  Must  the 
shareholders  be  cut  off  from  all  chances  not  only  of  fair  interest 
upon  the  capital  invested,  but  even  of  generous  profits  in  the 
very  exceptional  instances  in  which  rare  opportunities  and 
management  may  honestly  yield  them  ? If  so,  this  is  unlike  any 
business.  Capital  will  instinctively  be  shy  of  it  if  it  must  bear 
the  most  unlimited  losses,  with  no  chance  for  the  gains  when 
they  are  handsome.  In  point  of  fact  the  cases  are  few  in  which 
railroads  have  averaged  six  per  cent  from  the  first ; fewer  still 
that  have  averaged  eight.  Most  roads  now  solid  and  paying  hand- 
some dividends  for  years  paid  none.  On  the  other  hand,  many 
roads  once  dividing  ten  per  cent  have  come  to  divide  nothing. 
As  to  stock  dividends,  in  slang  phrase  called  “stock-watering,”  if 
they  represent  earnings  applied  to  the  improvement  of  the  road 
rather  than  to  dividends  when  earned,  what  can  be  more  just? 
If  made  on  no  such  basis,  they  are  only  the  company’s  choice  as 
to  number  or  form  of  shares. 

As  a general  principle,  we  doubt  the  policy  of  restricting  the 
earnings  of  railroads  by  legislation.  We  think  prosperous  rail- 
roads a far  greater  blessing  to  the  community  than  bankrupt, 
starving,  or  poorly  paid  ones.  They  are  more  likely  to  keep  up 
and  advance  their  roads  to  the  highest  state  of  speed,  safety, 
commodiousness,  in  order  to  keep  and  increase  their  business, 
by  cheapening  its  cost  to  themselves  and  the  public,  while  they 
increase  its  quantity.  Thus  only  can  they  withstand  competi- 
tion. Thus  only  can  come  the  substitution  of  steel  for  iron  rails ; 
of  heavy  rails  for  lighter  ones  ; of  heavy  for  slender  ties  ; of  broken 
stone  for  ground  ballasting;  of  a double  for  single  track ; of  a 
triple  or  quadruple  for  a double  track;  of  stone  or  iron  for 
wooden  bridges  ; of  crossings  above  or  below  other  roads  instead 
of  at  grade,  or,  where  this  is  impracticable,  the  substitution  for  it 
of  gates  and  flagmen  ; the  increase  of  terminal  facilities  so  neces- 
sary and  yet  so  costly  in  our  great  marts  of  trade.  A railroad  is 
never  completed,  and  the  further  it  is  perfected  in  such  a way 
as  to  lessen  its  risks  and  the  danger  to  those  who  use  it,  to 
cheapen  and  expedite  its  service,  while  this  is  responded  to  by 
an  increase  of  business  that  warrants  and  takes  advantage  of  it, 
the  better  for  the  public. and  the  road. 

So  statistical  tables  show  on  the  great-trunk  lines  a constant 


THE  REGULATION  OF  RAILROADS. 


425 


growth  of  business,  at  constantly  decreasing  rates  and  charges, 
and  a gradual  increase  of  profits,  until  their  charges  have  fallen 
a great  deal  below  a cent  a ton  per  mile.  Yet  they  are  able,  by 
means  of  their  economies  and  improvements,  to  make  money 
now  at  rates  that  would  have  bankrupted  them  a few  years  ago, 
and  would  now  bankrupt  them  upon  a small  business.  Who 
believes  that  any  such  result  could  have  been  reached  under  any 
conceivable  system  of  State  management ; i.e.,  management  at 
the  behest  of  politicians  dependent  on  universal  suffrage  for  their 
places  and  opportunities  of  emolument?  For,  after  all,  it  will 
turn  out  that  those  who  control  the  votes  which  lift  political 
parties  to  the  ascendency  will  for  the  most  part  have  the  places 
at  their  command.  And  it  is  one  thing  to  regulate  railroads  or 
any  other  business  by  selecting  for  service  persons  because  they 
can  command  votes,  and  another  by  selecting  them  on  account 
of  their  pre-eminent  fitness  for  the  position  they  fill.  Gen.  J. 
H.  Devereaux  has  been  recently  reported  as  saying: 

“Tonnage  is  so  heavy  that  the  difference  of  the  small  sum  of  one  mill 
per  ton  makes  the  difference  of  a dividend  or  bankruptcy.  On  my  road  it 
makes  something  like  $400,000  difference,  while  on  the  New  York  Central, 
I do  not  hesitate  to  say,  I think  it  makes  a difference  of  $2,000,000.” 

Think  of  that,  and  think  of  the  legislature  attempting  to  fix 
a tariff.  It  were  better  occupied  splitting  hairs,  or  seeking  Cap- 
tain Kidd’s  treasure.  The  fact  is,  had  it  undertaken  any  such 
function  in  the  past,  the  economy  of  railroad  transportation  never 
would  have  reached  this  “ fine  point.”  If  the  New  York  Legisla- 
ture prohibits  “ discrimination  ” charges  on  the  railroads  no  more 
than  it  does  on  the  canals  it  owns,  they  have  not  much  to  fear 
in  this  way.  It  is  stated  that  the  Canal  Board  has  abolished  all 
tolls  on  west-bound  traffic — but  that  it  discriminates  against  all 
salt  made  out  of  the  State ; doubtless  in  the  interests  of  the 
farmers  and  butter-makers  on  its  line  and  beyond,  who  could 
well  afford  to  quadruple  railroad  freights  if  they  could  thus  expel 
counterfeit  butter  from  the  market. 

The  railroads  have  received  their  charters  from  the  States. 
They  are  subject  to  the  police  regulations  of  States ; to  State 
taxation  ; to  the  principles  of  common  law  applicable  to  them  as 
common  carriers  or  otherwise ; to  such  statute  laws  of  States 


426 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


adapted  to  their  special  peculiarities,  with  respect  to  these  mat- 
ters, as  may  be  found  necessary  and  involve  no  violation  of  their 
charters.  But  they  are  entitled  to  the  unimpeded  use  of  the 
privileges  granted  in  their  charters,  short  of  manifest  abuse.  This 
cannot  be  interfered  with  without  violation  of  that  clause  of  the 
national  constitution  which  forbids  any  action  by  State  authori- 
ties impairing  the  obligation  of  contracts.  And  for  reasons  al- 
ready adduced,  we  do  not  think  the  exercise  of  the  State  power 
to  interfere  by  statute  with  railroad  tariffs  ordinarily  expedient, 
even  if  its  existence  were  unquestioned.  No  clear  judgment  in 
respect  to  this  power,  so  far  as  we  knew,  has  yet  been  given  by. 
the  U.  S.  Supreme  Court.  That  given  in  the  granger  cases 
related  to  roads  in  which  the  States  reserved  in  the  charters 
given  the  power  to  change  them  at  pleasure.  It  has  no  reference 
to  charters  not  thus  conditioned.  But  the  experience  of  the 
effects  of  this  granger  legislation  and  its  like  everywhere  has 
led  to  its  substantial  abandonment,  as  hurting  not  only  the  rail- 
roads, but  still  more  the  people.1 

What  is  known  as  t*he  Reagan  bill  in  Congress  reported  from 
the  same  committee  as  the  River  and  Harbor  bill,  by  Mr.  Reagan 
as  chairman,  would  be  vastly  more  mischievous  than  the  granger 
legislation  of  the  North-west.  Several  features  of  it  are  obnox- 
ious ; such  as  making  a “ car-load  the  unit,”  prohibiting  pooling, 
enforcing  the  same  proportional  rate  for  one  as  any  number  of 
such  loads,  and  applying  criminal  penalties  for  charging  more 
than  reasonable  rates  without  clearly  defining  what  is  a reasona- 
ble rate.  This  is  a very  different  thing  from  a railroad  being 
answerable  in  damages  for  charging  unreasonable  rates,  the 

1 “ Wherever  State  control  or  ownership  has  been  attempted,  it  has  failed  to  pro- 
mote cheap  railway  service.  The  history  of  the  Tunnel  and  the  Hartford  and 
Erie  legislation,  when  fully  written,  will  be  marked  not  only  by  their  utter  failure 
in  securing  the  objects  aimed  at,  but  by  corruption  and  fraud,  by  the  subornation 
of  legislators,  by  the  prostitution  of  the  powers  entrusted  to  the  senators  and  rep- 
resentatives for  private  ends,  and  even  in  the  very  last  session  by  the  open  sur- 
render of  the  interests  of  the  State  to  the  supposed  requirements  of  the  private 
clients  of  legislators.”  (Atkinson,  p.  28.)  See  also  that  bright  book,  “Chapters 
in  Erie,”  by  C.  F.  Adams,  Jr.,  for  still  more  terrible  legislative  and  judicial  pros- 
titution in  lending  support  to  plunderings  of  stockholders  of  railroads,  on  a scale 
of  enormity  to  which  civilization  furnishes  scarcely  a parallel.  Let  the  eight- 
hour  laws  of  Congress,  the  New  York  capitol,  the  New  York  City  court-house, 
the  canal  rings,  the  street-cleaning  of  the  city,  the  pilot  monopolies,  convey  their 
own  lesson  on  the  management  of  railroads  by  politicians. 


THE  REGULA  TION  OF  RAILROADS.  427 

courts  being  judges  of  all  the  circumstances  in  each  case  which 
make  them  reasonable  or  unreasonable.  But  our  objection  to 
this  national  interference  lies  deeper.  The  general  question  of 
trenching  on  the  prerogatives  of  the  States  aside,  we  believe  this 
whole  pretension  is  ultra  vires , beyond  the  scope  of  national 
power  over  interstate  commerce.  So  far  as  we  know,  this  power 
has  never  been  exercised,  even  if  it  has  been  invoked,  to  deter- 
mine the  prices  of  interstate  transportation.  It  was,  we  believe, 
never  conveyed  for  any  such  purpose  in  our  national  Constitu- 
tion. It  has  been  exercised  chiefly,  if  not  wholly,  to  remove  ob- 
stacles interposed  or  permitted  by  the  States  to  free  commer- 
cial interchange  between  them,  or  between  this  and  foreign  coun- 
tries. Can  the  national  government,  under  pretext  of  regulating 
interstate  or  foreign  commerce,  say  what  carrying  vessels  and 
steamers  on  the  Ohio,  Missouri,  Mississippi,  the  Delaware,  the 
Atlantic  coast,  across  the  ocean,  shall  charge  for  passengers  and 
freight?  If  they  can,  the  power  is  merely  theoretical,  which 
may  as  wisely  be  exercised  as  the  power  to  secure  the  importa- 
tion of  wheat  into  the  United  States,  if  such  power  exists.  We 
have  a still  deeper  aversion  to  this  from  the  practical  side,  for 
reasons  so  well  stated  in  the  answer  of  the  Massachusetts  Com- 
missioners to  the  Chamber  of  Commerce  committee,  which  our 
limits  prevent  us  from  quoting.  It  proves  that  all  present  evils 
connected  with  railroad  management  compare  with  what  would 
grow  out  of  congressional  supervision,  as  ant-hills  with  moun- 
tains. 

There  is,  however,  one  danger  to  our  channels  of  interstate 
communication  by  railroad  with  which  the  power  of  the  national 
government  is  alone  adequate  to  cope,  and  which  it  ought  effectu- 
ally and  promptly  to  prepare  itself  to  meet.  We  refer  to  the 
violent  stoppage  of  these  arteries  of  the  national  life  by  strikes, 
mobs,  and  riots,  of  which  the  great  railroad  strike  of  1877  gave 
us  dire  experience  and  ample  premonition.  The  days  and  weeks 
in  which  violent  men  stopped  the  interflow  of  commodities 
between  the  interior  and  the  seaboard  amounted  to  a reign  of 
terror,  and  showed  us  how  quickly  it  could  not  only  arrest 
foreign  and  domestic  commerce,  but  precipitate  a famine.  We 
know  not  how  soon  this  may  occur  again.  The  last  two  com- 
mercial panics  (in  1857  and  1873)  were  precipitated  by  sinking 
immense  amounts  of  capital  in  unproductive  railroad-building. 


428 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


This  process  has  commenced  already.  Brokers  are,  as  we 
now  write,  offering  6-per-cent  gold  railroad  bonds  at  about 
90.  General  Devereaux  predicts  a speedy  crash.  We  trust  it  is 
not  near.  But  come  in  due  time  it  will  and  must,  necessitating 
that  lowering  of  wages  which  is  sure  to  be  resented  by  strikes. 
These  might  be  borne  if  other  workmen  were  allowed  to  take  the 
strikers’  places.  But  that  is  resisted  by  violence,  else  the  strikers 
are  baffled.  Now  here  is  the  time  and  place  for  the  national 
government  to  intervene  with  its  fullest  power ; to  insist  that 
these  arteries  of  interstate  commerce  shall  not  be  cut,  and  to 
protect  the  liberty  of  all  to  work  the  railroads  without  molesta- 
tion, by  grapeshot  and  cannon-ball  if  need  be.  Was  it  not  hu- 
miliating, in  1873  that  this  great  nation  was  disabled  by  mobs 
and  ruffians  from  carrying  its  own  mails  with  punctuality  and 
regularity  ? And  are  any  wire-drawn  theories  about  overriding 
State  rights  again  to  fetter  and  disable  the  nation  from  defend- 
ing its  own  life  and  property  in  mob-beleagured  States? 

We  will  only  add  that  laws  are  needed  to  prevent  fraud  on  the 
part  of  projectors  and  managers  of  railroads,  by  which  they  dis- 
honestly tempt  the  ignorant  and  unwary  to  sink  their  savings  in 
mere  speculative  enterprises,  or  by  which  the  stockholders  in  good 
railroads  are  unwittingly  stripped  of  their  property  for  the  special 
behoof  of  the  managers.  Railroads  ought  seldom,  in  our  judg- 
ment, to  be  allowed  to  create  a bonded  debt  or  advertise  bonds 
for  sale  not  backed  by  something  like  an  equal  amount  already 
expended  on  the  road,  or  its  equivalent  in  lands  as  security. 
Rarely,  if  ever,  should  railroad  managers  be  allowed  to  buy, 
lease,  or  otherwise  get  control  of  a connecting  or  parallel  road 
with  the  funds  or  on  the  responsibility  of  the  original  road,  with- 
out sanction  of  the  stockholders  first  obtained  after  due  notice. 
Many  roads  have  been  weighed  down  by  onerous  leases  of  this 
kind  which  have  inured  to  the  benefit  of  managing  rings  at  the 
cost  of  the  stock-  and  bond-holders.  We  believe  that  due 
publicity  here  as  in  regard  to  rates  of  transportation,  and  all  the 
rebates  and  drawbacks  heretofore  too  often  kept  secret,  would 
prove  the  sure  and  adequate  remedy  for  the  evils  that  have 
furnished  any  serious  ground  of  complaint. 


Lyman  H.  Atwater. 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION. 


HE  comparative  study  of  the  non-Christian  religions  has, 


as  every  one  knows,  become  in  recent  time  a prominent 
subject  of  public  attention,  and  is  likely  so  to  continue.  It  has 
even  been  ticketed  with  the  name  of  a “ science,”  in  accordance 
with  the  fashion  of  the  day — or,  it  may  be  said,  with  the  intent 
of  claiming  for  this  department  of  investigation  a breadth  of 
basis,  a strictness  of  method,  and  a certainty  of  attained  results 
analogous  with  those  of  other  departments  commonly  called  by 
the  same  name.  As  to  whether  the  claim  is  well  founded 
opinions  will,  and  with  good  reason,  differ;  yet  many  who  now 
regard  the  title  as  at  the  best  prematurely  assumed  will  allow 
that  the  study  may,  if  successfully  conducted,  grow  into  the 
proportions  and  solidity  of  a science.  In  any  event,  it  is  desira- 
ble to  see  what  are  the  fundamental  views  held,  rightly  or 
wrongly,  by  those  who  are  devoting  themselves  to  the  science ; 
and  to  set  these  forth,  as  looked  at  from  its  own  point  of  view, 
is  the  object  of  the  present  paper. 

The  new  “ science”  is  an  inseparable  part  of  the  study  of  pre- 
historic man,  of  the  origin  and  development  of  his  culture,  his 
knowledge,  his  institutions,  and  his  arts.  Its  nearest  affinity  is 
with  the  modern  science  of  language.  The  analogy  between  the 
two  is  so  close  that  the  one  is  constantly  called  in  to  illustrate 
the  other.  Almost  every  student  of  general  language  is  drawn 
over  perforce  to  investigate  the  history  of  religions  also  ; and  in 
popular  opinion  (especially  among  English-speaking  peoples)  the 
same  authority  is  even  credited  with  the  establishment  of  both, 
and  with  just  about  as  much  and  as  little  reason  in  the  one  case 
as  in  the  other.  Beliefs  and  practices  such  as  we  call  religious 
are  as  widely  found  among  men  as  any  of  the  other  ordinary 


430 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


constituents  of  human  culture  (whether  they  are  to  be  deemed 
universal  is  a point  considered  further  on) ; and  the  method  of 
their  fruitful  study  must  plainly  be,  like  that  of  all  the  rest,  a 
comparative  one : the  widest  possible  collection  and  co-ordina- 
tion of  facts,  with  careful  deduction  of  general  principles  and 
determination  of  causes.  There  can  be  no  successful  investiga- 
tion of  any  part  of  man’s  historical  development  in  any  other 
way;  we  are  too  much  the  creatures  of  habit  and  of  the  preju- 
dice engendered  by  habit  to  comprehend  the  character  of  what 
we  ourselves  possess,  or  to  see  how  we  should  have  come  into 
possession  of  it,  save  as  we  set  it  beside  the  kindred  possessions 
of  our  fellow-men. 

It  has  been  till  recently,  and  is  still  to  a considerable  extent, 
the  prevalent  assumption  that  the  universality  of  religious  phe- 
nomena among  men  could  have  no  other  ground  than  a primi- 
tive revelation  of  some  sort,  a miraculous  communication  to  the 
ancestors  of  our  race  of  a certain  amount  of  absolute  truth 
respecting  the  unseen  world  and  man’s  relations  to  that  world, 
which  truth  has  been  variously  lost  and  disguised  and  corrupted, 
till  in  place  of  it  have  come  the  systems,  ranging  through  every 
conceivable  degree  of  falsity  and  degrading  absurdity,  which  we 
find  to  have  actually  existed  in  the  earth  since  the  first  begin- 
ning of  historical  record.  If  this  were  true,  the  task  of  a science 
of  religion  would  be  to  determine  the  amount  and  character  of 
that  primitive  revelation,  and  to  demonstrate  in  human  nature 
and  human  circumstances  the  reasons  of  so  signal  a disappoint- 
ment of  the  purposes  of  the  revealer  in  making  it.  This  would 
furnish  sphere  and  occupation  enough  for  the  scientific  student. 

But  it  hardly  needs  to  be  pointed  out  that  the  whole  ten- 
dency of  modern  scientific  thought  is  opposed  to  the  passing  of 
such  an  assumption  unchallenged.  It  seems  a part  of  the  old 
free-and-easy  system  of  accounting  by  a miracle  for  anything 
that  seems  difficult  of  explanation ; and  that  system  has  long 
been  tumbling  to  pieces,  undermined  by  historical  research. 
Until  within  a comparatively  short  time,  it  was  questioned  by 
no  one  that  the  earth  was  turned  out  of  hand  a few  thousand 
years  ago,  called  up  out  of  nothing  as  a ready-furnished  abode 
for  men,  with  a firmament  of  heavenly  bodies  revolving  about  it 
for  his  convenience  and  pleasure.  At  present  no  cultivated 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION. 


431 


person  holds  any  such  view ; we  recognize  the  action  of  second- 
ary causes,  operating  through  immense  periods  of  time,  as  finally 
bringing  about  the  state  of  things  with  which  we  are  familiar — 
the  last  (so  far)  of  a series  of  states  which  were  very  different 
from  it  and  from  one  another.  An  example  of  closer  applica- 
tion is  presented  by  language  : the  doctrine  was  formerly  current 
that  a ready-made  vocabulary  and  grammar  had  been  put  into 
the  minds  and  mouths  of  the  first  human  beings  by  a super- 
human agency ; and  that  variation,  not  unaided  by  miraculous 
intervention,  of  that  original  tongue  had  resulted  in  the  infinity 
of  dialects  now  existing.  But  the  students  of  language  have 
come  to  see  clearly  that  men  as  they  are,  with  the  natures 
implanted  in  them  and  in  the  circumstances  by  which  they  are 
surrounded,  not  only  might,  but  certainly  would,  work  out  by 
the  normal  exercise  of  their  powers  means  of  expression  and 
communication  such  as  we  now  see  them  possessed  of ; and  that 
the  origin  and  history  of  speech  are  thus  completely  accounted 
for  by  causes  which  we  are  accustomed  to  call  natural.  This 
explanation  is  not  yet  so  universally  accepted  as  is  that  of  the 
geological  history  of  the  earth ; but  only  because  it  is  newer, 
and  deals  with  considerations  of  a less  palpable,  physical  order: 
no  well-informed  and  candid  man  will  question  that  the  evidence 
in  its  favor  is  capable  of  rising  to  a degree  of  force  that  shall  be 
practically  irresistible.  Nor  is  the  case  far  different  with  the 
other  institutions  of  our  race.  Every  people  that  has  risen  high 
enough  in  intellectual  curiosity  to  speculate  on  the  beginnings 
of  its  culture  has  attributed  them  to  the  direct  agency  of  its 
gods,  unable  to  understand  how  they  could  otherwise  have  come 
into  being  at  all;  unable  to  conceive  of  primitive  man  as  set 
down  in  the  earth  naked  and  weaponless  and  destitute,  and  yet 
endowed  with  powers  by  whose  gradual  training  and  exercise 
he  should  win  the  forces  of  nature  to  his  service,  and  gain  com- 
mand of  a wealth  and  knowledge  whereof  we  do  not  yet  see  the 
limit. 

Now  it  seems  evident  to  the  modern  students  of  man’s  his- 
tory that  the  same  question  has  to  be  raised  respecting  his 
religious  institutions  that  has  been  already  raised,  and  in  good 
measure  answered  respecting  his  languages,  his  organizations  of 
society,  his  arts,  and  the  rest.  We  must  at  any  rate  look  to  see 


432 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


whether  there  is  anything  in  ordinary  and  universal  human 
nature  that  should  necessarily  lead  men  to  the  discovery  of 
religious  truth,  or  of  what  they  take  for  such,  to  the  formation 
of  a body  of  beliefs  and  of  practices  incorporating  those  beliefs. 
That  is  to  say : men  being  such  as  we  perceive  them  to  be,  and 
their  circumstances  such  as  we  know  them,  are  the  great  mass 
of  the  religions  of  the  world  to  be  accounted  for  as  results  of 
the  normal  exercise  of  men’s  faculties  under  government  of  the 
usual  motives  to  their  exercise?  If  such  is  found  to  be  the 
case,  the  scientific  study  of  religions  wins  a very  different  basis; 
indeed,  we  may  even  claim  that  it  for  the  first  time  finds  a solid 
basis  at  all.  For  the  miraculous  is  no  proper  matter  of  scientific 
investigation.  This  can  be  carried  on  only  in  the  way  of  observa- 
tion and  comparison ; and  a miraculous  intervention  neither 
comes  at  present  under  the  ken  of  the  student,  nor  is  admitted 
by  him  in  the  past  for  any  department  of  man’s  development 
save  the  religious.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  we  have  within  our 
reach  the  whole  material  of  study,  with  all  the  forces  whose 
action  is  to  be  allowed  for,  in  human  circumstances  and  human 
nature  respectively,  the  problem  is  a truly  scientific  one,  like 
that  of  the  origin  of  language  or  of  the  solar  system,  and  capable 
of  such  solution,  more  or  less  complete  and  detailed  according 
to  their  inherent  difficulty  and  our  command  of  the  necessary 
data,  as  scientific  problems  in  general  admit.  The  use,  then,  of 
the  name  “ science”  of  religion,  or  of  anything  equivalent  to  it, 
implies  that  there  is  believed  to  exist  in  observable  human 
nature  something  which  regularly  and  inevitably  leads  to  the 
formation  of  religions.  And  such  is  the  firm  belief  of  those 
whose  views  we  have  undertaken  to  set  forth.  As  things  now 
are,  a religion  of  some  kind  constitutes  a part  of  every  existing 
form  of  culture,  and  is  handed  down  to  each  inheritor  of  that 
culture — like,  for  example,  his  language ; but  if  we  could  sup- 
pose them  all  torn  up  to  the  last  rootlet  and  flung  away,  some- 
thing like  them  would  (we  cannot  tell  in  how  long  a time)  spring 
up  to  take  their  place,  and  that  without  any  superhuman  aid. 
How  much  of  absolute  truth  would  be  in  any  or  in  all  of  them 
is  another  question.  The  Christian  believes  that  only  by  an 
auxiliary  revelation  could  the  rooted  errors  of  every  heathen 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION. 


433 


belief  be  destroyed,  the  actual  origin  and  destiny  of  man  made 
known,  and  the  successful  practice  of  righteousness  assured; 
and  it  involves  no  relinquishment  of  this  belief  to  admit  the 
natural  and  necessary  growth  of  such  reachings-out  after  the 
truth  as  religions  of  the  origin  just  assumed  would  be,  or  as 
those  are  which  are  now  seen  in  existence  outside  the  pale  of 
Christianity. 

But  what  is  the  faculty  or  tendency  in  human  nature  work- 
ing toward  such  an  end?  To  call  it  a “ religious  instinct”  will 
not  help  us  much : any  more,  in  fact,  than  the  assumption  of  a 
linguistic  instinct  to  explain  the  formation  and  use  of  language, 
or  of  an  architectural  instinct  to  explain  the  building  of  shelters, 
from  the  ice-hut  of  the  Eskimo  to  the  palace  of  the  European 
noble.  The  application  of  the  word  instinctive  at  all  to  the  produc- 
tions of  human  intelligence  amounts  to  a confession  of  inability 
to  say  anything  in  explanation  of  them.  We  recognize  instinct 
in  the  song  of  the  solitary  cage-reared  bird,  precisely  agreeing 
with  that  of  his  kindred  in  field  or  forest ; or  in  the  dam-building 
of  the  tame  beaver  in  his  waterless  hutch ; but  man’s  way  of 
working  is  by  the  slow  process  of  observing  and  comparing  and 
deducing  and  applying  means  to  ends — a process  of  which,  when 
his  powers  of  reflection  are  developed  by  culture,  he  can  give  a 
reasonable  account  to  himself.  Beavers’  dams  are  practically 
alike,  wherever  set  up;  but  religions  are  as  unlike  as  buildings; 
and  an  instinct  or  special  faculty  producing  them  all  would  cer- 
tainly admit  of  an  analysis  that  should  leave  only  a minimal 
residuum  for  the  pure  unalloyed  product  of  the  faculty  itself : 
the  differences  between  religions  are  many  times  greater  than 
the  difference  between  certain  religions  and  nothing  at  all.  Of 
still  less  use,  if  possible,  is  it  to  trace  religion  to  a desire  to 
“ apprehend  the  Infinite;”  nor  is  it  easy  to  see  how  one  should 
imagine  that  by  such  a dictum  is  contributed  any  aid  either  to 
the  theoretical  comprehension  of  religion  or  to  the  explanation 
of  its  origin.  It  reminds  one  of  nothing  so  much  as  of  the  wis- 
dom of  the  Sunday-school  orator  who,  having  let  fall  the  word 
“ abstract,”  immediately  added,  “ You  will  understand  that  by 
an  ‘abstract  ’ I mean  an  ‘epitome.’  ” Or  it  is  as  if  one  were  to 
ascribe  language  to  a yearning  to  incorporate  the  incorporeal,  or 


434 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


instruments  to  a tendency  to  enslave  the  energies  of  matter. 
Such  indefinite  and  high-sounding  phrases  are  only  a cloak  to 
hide  poverty  and  indistinctness  of  thought. 

No  one  will  deny  that  the  object  of  religious  inquiry,  in  all 
ages  and  stages,  is  to  learn  something  about  the  Maker  and 
Governor  of  the  world,  and  our  relations  to  him : the  question 
for  us  to  solve  is,  What  should  lead  even  unenlightened  men  to 
enter  upon  such  a far-reaching  and  difficult  inquiry,  and  what 
should  put  into  their  minds  the  answers  with  which  they  strive 
to  satisfy  themselves?  The  solution  lies  so  near  at  hand  as  not 
to  have  been  missed  except  by  those  to  whom  a simple  solution 
is  no  worthy  one.  Before  and  around  all  men  alike  are  spread 
out  the  works  and  ways  of  the  creation,  in  which,  if  anywhere, 
the  nature  of  its  creator  is  to  be  read.  If  we  take  any  other  than 
the  transcendental  view,  asserting  that  we  know  only  our  own 
existence  and  states  of  mind,  if  even  those,  we  must  hold  that 
man  is  in  his  most  essential  character  an  intelligent  being,  capa- 
ble of  being  impressed  by  those  processes  of  the  external  world 
which  communicate  themselves  to  him,  of  apprehending  them, 
studying  them,  reasoning  upon  them,  and  adapting  himself, 
actively  and  passively,  to  them.  If  there  is  a Creator,  it  is  the 
simplest  thing  in  the  world  that  men  should  gain  from  his  works 
some  knowledge  of  him,  and  ever  more  and  better.  But,  also, 
if  there  be  none,  or  none  of  whom  we  can  have  any  real  knowl- 
edge, men,  on  their  way  to  the  recognition  of  the  fact,  will 
postulate  one,  and  give  him  form  and  attributes,  in  a series  of 
successively  amended  incorporations,  until  the  error  of  even  the 
last  and  best  of  these  shall  be  finally  discovered. 

The  intellectual  agency  at  the  bottom  of  the  process,  efficient 
equally  in  the  unenlightened  and  in  the  enlightened  stages  of 
human  development,  is  the  simple  faith  in  the  connection  of 
cause  and  effect,  the  belief  that  behind  every  effect  lies  a cause, 
which  is  to  be  sought  and  may  perhaps  be  discovered  there. 
That  such  a belief  is  firmly  established  in  the  mind  of  every 
human  being  is  universally  allowed,  tho  as  to  how  it  came  there 
there  is  plenty  of  dispute,  some  regarding  it  as  an  intuition,  a 
part  of  the  very  structure  of  the  mind  itself,  while  in  the  view 
of  others  it  is  rather  an  article  of  mental  furniture,  an  immovable 
fixture,  a deduction  from  experience,  which  shows  so  widely  and 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION. 


435 


constantly  that  one  thing  proceeds  necessarily  from  another,  and 
that  a thing  is  because  something  else  has  preceded  and  led  to 
it,  that  we  generalize  it  into  a universal  rule,  of  which  the  sway 
grows  firmer  with  every  new  experience  of  necessary  sequence. 
On  such  points  opinions  will  probably  always  be  at  variance,  ac- 
cording to  the  character  and  training  of  those  who  form  them  (a 
certain  American  metaphysician  of  no  mean  repute  holds  even 
that  the  law  of  gravitation  is  an  intuition) ; but  so  far  as  our 
present  purpose  is  concerned  the  variance  is  of  no  account.  The 
truth  that  we  need  is  one  conceded  by  all ; namely,  that  men, 
even  the  lowest,  will  look  for  a cause  or  causes  behind  those  events 
of  external  nature  which  concern  them,  and  will  find  or  imagine 
one  ; will  frame  a theory  to  explain  whatever  they  regard  with 
interest.  Every  race  that  has  risen  above  the  very  lowest  cares 
of  provision  for  continued  existence  has  some  sort  of  a philoso- 
phy, or  theory  of  the  universe ; and,  as  a part  or  aspect  of  this, 
a religion.  The  philosophy  is  the  more  comprehensive  thing, 
including  the  religion  ; but  the  latter  is  the  more  practical  and 
urgent,  and  apt  to  outgrow  and  overshadow  the  other.  The 
philosophy  is  a matter  of  curious  inquiry;  the  religion,  one  of 
absorbing  personal  interest.  How  it  comes  to  be  superadded 
we  have  now  to  go  on  and  ask. 

In  the  first  place,  as  the  problem  of  explanation  of  the  phe- 
nomena outside  himself  must  inevitably  arise  in  the  mind  of 
man,  however  primitive  and  untutored,  so  the  solutions  he 
devises  will  as  inevitably  be  anthropomorphic,  and  for  the  sim- 
ple reason  that  he  can  form  no  distinct  conception  of  anything 
of  a different  character.  To  him,  he  himself  and  his  kind  are 
the  active  and  efficient  agents  whom  he  knows  and  knows  best — 
agents  that  can  devise  and  make,  that  can  form  a plan  and  carry 
it  out.  Accordingly,  behind  the  effects  of  nature  he  conceives 
a set  of  more  or  less  manlike  effecters — beings  endowed  with 
will  and  the  ability  to  execute  it;  of  superhuman  power,  because 
their  works  are  on  a scale  of  grandeur  far  beyond  the  measure 
of  man’s  abilities  ; undying,  because  they  act  on  and  on  without 
cessation ; invisible,  because  they  are  only  perceived  in  what 
they  do ; but  endowed,  if  the  vivid  fancy  of  their  believer  gives 
him  sometimes  glimpses  of  them,  with  a form  resembling  his 
own:  in  short,  magnified  and  intensified  human  beings,  with 


436 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


only  such  variations  and  additions  as  the  imagination  working 
on  a human  basis  may  suggest.  All  the  occurrences  of  nature 
are  paralleled  with  human  proceedings:  the  wind  is  blown 
breath ; the  thunder-storm  is  a battle ; the  sky  looks  down  at 
night  with  innumerable  eyes  ; the  earth  is  a mother,  bringing 
plants  and  animals  to  birth  when  fertilized  with  showers  of  rain 
by  the  heaven-father;  the  sun  rides  up  the  sky;  he  shoots 
burning  arrows  at  the  earth;  or  he  is  born  in  the  morning  out  of 
the  bosom  of  the  night  and  dies  again  at  evening — and  so  on  in 
endless  variety,  which  it  is  needless  to  attempt  here  to  illustrate. 

There  follows  from  this  a corollary,  which  may  well  enough 
be  at  once  noticed  : No  religion  having  a natural  origin  can  be 
otherwise  than  polytheistic.  The  variety  of  effects  to  be  ac- 
counted for  leads  without  fail  to  the  assumption  of  a variety  of 
causes.  The  power  to  penetrate  this  variety  and  discover 
beneath  it  an  essential  unity  belongs  to  a later  and  higher  stage 
of  development.  A theory  of  primitive  monotheism  suits  well 
enough  with  one  of  primitive  revelation,  but  with  nothing  else. 
This  seems  so  clear  as  to  call  for  no  labored  argument  to  sustain 
it.  And  the  facts  of  religious  history  are  wholly  in  its  favor. 
No  trace  of  monotheism  is  to  be  found  anywhere  in  the  world 
except  with  a polytheism  behind  it : witness  the  Semitic  poly- 
theism out  of  which  issues  the  Hebrew,  and  later  the  Mohamme- 
dan, belief  in  one  god,  or  the  Aryan  polytheism  underlying 
both  the  dualism  (if  it  is  fairly  to  be  so  called)  of  Zoroaster  and 
such  philosophic  unity  of  creator  as  Hindu  sages  of  the  later 
time  have  sporadically  come  to  hold.  Where  the  contrary  of 
this  is  sought  to  be  discovered — as,  for  instance,  by  some 
authorities,  in  the  Vedic  hymns — it  is  only  by  an  inversion  of 
the  true  and  obvious  relations  of  things,  and  by  other  fruitless 
straining  of  facts  to  sustain  an  untenable  theory.1 

1 That  there  is  room,  beside  these  two  fundamental  varieties  of  religion,  to 
set  up  a third,  a “ henotheistic,”  as  has  lately  been  done  by  Muller  and  some  of 
his  imitators,  is  by  no  means  to  be  conceded  : the  so-called  henotheism  is  a 
purely  individual  phenomenon,  of  the  most  subordinate  consequence.  A heno- 
theist  is  one  who,  while  fully  and  constantly  believing  in  a variety  of  gods,  yet 
cannot  refrain  from  ascribing  to  the  one  whom  he  is  at  the  moment  worshipping 
more  than  the  strictly  due  share  of  power  and  prominence  in  the  system.  Any 
one  who  keeps  a fetich  or  carries  an  amulet  is  as  much  a henotheist  as  is  a Vedic 
poet ; or,  for  that  matter,  whoever  acknowledges  a patron-saint. 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION.  437 

So  far  we  have  noticed  only  the  philosophic  factor  of  belief : 
the  mere  recognition  of  extrahuman  and  superhuman  powers 
under  anthropomorphic  forms  is  not  yet  a religion.  But  the 
other  factor  follows  this  by  a necessity.  Anthropomorphism  is 
internal  as  well  as  external ; it  extends  to  character  and  motive 
not  less  than  to  shape  and  mode  of  action.  The  manlike  beings 
who  wield  the  forces  of  nature  have  also  the  feelings  and  pas- 
sions of  men,  the  disposition  to  do  good  and  to  do  harm,  and 
the  capacity  of  being  propitiated.  If  men  could  hold  on  their 
own  independent  way  in  the  midst  of  nature,  careless  of  what 
happened  about  them,  their  philosophy  would  never  grow 
into  a religion.  But  that  is  far  enough  from  being  the  case: 
the  supernatural  powers  are  all  the  time  interfering  for  good  or 
ill  with  the  concerns  of  man ; his  whole  happiness  is  at  their 
mercy;  they  send  down  upon  him  alternately  blessings  and 
calamities ; causes  outside  both  of  himself  and  of  his  fellows  are 
either  frustrating  his  best  plans  or  furthering  them  to  a success- 
ful issue ; and  this  he  must  attribute  to  the  favor  or  disfavor  of 
those  whose  will  he  regards  as  expressed  in  such  influences. 
Propitiation  must  be  attempted ; if  possible,  one  must  ingratiate 
himself  with  the  unseen  beings  whose  benevolence  is  so  impor- 
tant to  him  ; or  he  must  deprecate  the  malevolence  they  show. 
Hence  follow  two  results  of  the  highest  consequence.  In  the 
first  place,  the  practice  of  sacrifice  and  offering,  which  is  a 
feature  of  every  known  religion : offering  of  property,  deemed 
valuable  to  the  divinity  because  it  is  valued  by  the  offerer,  and 
in  every  kind,  from  insignificant  trifles  up  to  animal  life,  and 
even  that  most  precious  article,  human  life  ; offering  of  what- 
ever may  be  in  other  ways  costly  to  the  worshipper,  as  labor 
and  penance,  fasting  and  vigil,  mutilation  and  self-torture ; and, 
where  the  religion  rises  to  a higher  and  more  spiritual  strain, 
offering  of  homage,  of  praise  and  of  prayer.  In  the  second  place, 
the  practice  also  of  such  conduct  as  will  be  pleasing  to  the  super- 
human powers.  And  what  that  is  the  anthropomorphic  rule, 
of  course,  determines.  Whatever  is  held  by  the  man  himself  to 
be  good  and  desirable  he  cannot  but  regard  as  acceptable  also 
to  the  divinity.  Religion  thus  re-enforces  conscience,  and  adds 
a new  sanction  to  the  feeling  of  duty.  The  thing  which  should 

be  done  wins  a greatly  enhanced  authority,  as  being  demanded 
29 


438 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


by  those  under  whose  direction  is  the  government  of  creation. 
Man  makes  himself  and  his  conduct  in  this  way  a part  of  the 
general  order  of  things : with  what  important  effect  is  too  obvi- 
ous to  need  to  be  pointed  out.  This  is  the  highest  and  the 
most  elevating  aspect  of  religions.  They  gain  a moral  element, 
and  become  furtherers  of  righteousness.  The  ideal  of  morality 
set  up  by  different  religions  is,  to  be  sure,  a very  various  one, 
and  often  low  enough ; it  cannot,  in  fact,  but  correspond  to  the 
grade  of  enlightenment  of  the  moral  sense  reached  by  the  vota- 
ries of  each  faith  ; but  it  is  never  altogether  wanting,  and  it  acts 
everywhere  as  a quickening  and  purifying  influence  ; in  devotion 
to  religion  is  found  in  general  the  highest  virtue  and  the  fullest 
self-abnegation  of  which  individuals  in  a given  community  are 
capable. 

We  are  prepared  now  to  lay  down  what  may  be  called  a his- 
torical definition  of  a religion,  one  representing  its  character  as 
a historical  development,  taking  due  account  of  the  elements 
that  go  to  make  it  up,  and  applicable  to  any  and  all,  whether 
the  amount  of  truth  contained  in  them  be  greater  or  less.  A 
religion  is  the  belief  in  a superhuman  being  or  beings  whose 
actions  are  seen  in  the  works  of  creation,  and  in  such  relations 
on  the  part  of  man  toward  this  being  or  beings  as  prompt  the 
believer  to  acts  of  propitiation  and  worship,  and  to  the  regula- 
tion of  conduct.  It  is  a philosophy  with  the  application  to 
human  interests  added  ; and  not  only  added,  but,  as  could  not 
well  be  otherwise,  made  the  prominent  consideration : for  man 
is  everywhere  ready  enough  to  regard  himself  as  the  highest  of 
nature’s  works,  and  to  believe  everything  else  made  for  his  use 
and  behoof ; and,  even  if  this  were  not  so,  his  own  destiny  and 
what  bears  upon  it  is  to  him  the  thing  of  most  consequence. 

It  will  be  clear  from  this  why  the  question  as  to  the  univer- 
sality of  religion  is  a real  one,  and  liable  to  different  answers 
even  from  those  who  have  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same,  facts 
before  them  on  which  to  found  an  opinion.  For  there  is  nothing 
absolute  about  the  presence  or  absence  of  religion  in  a certain 
culture,  as  there  is,  for  example,  about  that  of  oxygen  in  a cer- 
tain compound.  It  is  a matter  of  degree  ; and  hence  the  ques- 
tion of  fact  is  in  part  also  a verbal  question  : Are  we  justified  in 
giving  the  name  of  religion  to  what  is  so  little,  or  to  what  is  so 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION. 


439 


low  ? As  regards  the  quantity,  it  seems  certain  that,  whatever  we 
may  deem  possible  in  the  very  initial  stages  of  cultural  develop- 
ment, no  race  of  men  has  ever  been  actually  met  with  which 
had  not  arrived  at  some  body  of  views,  tho  of  only  the  most 
indefinite  and  shadowy  character,  respecting  the  forces — that  is 
to  say,  the  beings : for  in  such  a mental  condition  the  one  is  the 
necessary  form  of  the  other — expressing  themselves  in  the  phe- 
nomena of  nature  ; the  germs  of  a world-philosophy  are  every- 
where to  be  met  with.  That  might  be,  however,  without 
excluding  the  possibility  that  the  feeling  of  relation  between 
the  extra-human  forces  and  human  beings  which  leads  to  acts  of 
propitiation  should  be  nearly  or  altogether  wanting.  Such  a 
deficiency  we  call  a lack  of  religiosity,  or  of  the  religious  sense ; 
and  we  see  that  it  can  be  traced  to  absence  of  imaginativeness 
or  of  fervor  of  disposition  on  the  part  of  certain  communities,  as 
on  the  part  of  individuals  in  any  community.  But  that  it  is 
ever  so  complete  in  a whole  race  as  to  occasion  a total  absence 
of  practices  that  may  be  denominated  religious  is  not  generally 
believed.  Religious  institutions  are  held  with  probability  to 
form  some  part,  if  only  a minimal  one,  in  every  scheme  of  cul- 
ture, however  elementary,  that  has  yet  been  brought  to  light. 

A much  more  serious  question  is  this:  How  broad  and  deep 
are  we  to  draw  the  line  between  religion  and  superstition  ? 
That  in  their  origin  and  essential  nature  they  are  alike  is  not  to 
be  denied.  Both  include  a recognition  of  the  supernatural,  and 
a desire  and  attempt  to  win  it  over  to  the  furtherance  of  human 
welfare.  The  distinction  between  them  appears  to  be  one  of 
degree,  and  yet  the  difference  in  their  tone  and  spirit  is  so  great, 
as  also  in  their  effect  on  the  human  mind  and  on  human  culture, 
that  we  are  naturally  loath  to  give  the  nobler  name  to  the  more 
ignoble  and  degrading  thing.  We  may  also  fairly  say  that  the 
modern  agnostic  philosophy  is  bound  on  the  same  general 
errand  ; it,  too,  is  searching  after  the  hidden  forces  of  universal 
nature,  and  striving  to  make  them  subservient  to  man’s  interests, 
as  well  as  to  his  craving  after  knowledge ; and  it  is  of  high  im- 
portance to  note  this  pervading  analogy  in  men’s  dealings  with 
the  extra-human,  from  the  very  beginning  through  to  the  end. 
But,  as  the  last  of  the  three  has  succeeded  in  eliminating  the 
element  of  a religion  altogether  from  its  belief,  must  we  say  also 


440 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


that  the  first  has  not  reached  the  height  of  a religious  belief? 
The  surface  distinction  between  religion  and  superstition  is 
obvious  enough  : the  former  looks  up,  the  latter  looks  down.  A 
religion  has  gods,  whose  worship  does  at  least  something  to 
idealize  and  exalt  the  worshipper.  A superstition  is  rather  the 
incorporation  of  cringing  terror;  its  gods  are  omnipresent  evil 
influences,  its  rites  are  magic,  and  its  priests  are  sorcerers.  The 
lowest  and  most  synthetic  form  of  recognition  of  the  super- 
natural is  fear  of  the  dark;  it  is  almost  to  be  called  an  instinct, 
and  is  universal  among  those  who  are  childish,  in  years  or  in 
development.  It  is  not  the  mere  feeling  of  helplessness  when  all 
that  capacity  of  defence  that  depends  upon  sight  is  taken  away ; 
there  is  in  it  the  element  of  the  uncanny,  an  overmastering 
dread  of  unseen  hostile  powers.  That  which  in  the  lowest  races 
takes  the  place  of  religion  is  hardly  more  than  an  expansion  of 
this  feeling  into  an  infinity  of  details,  and  an  attempt  by  magical 
devices  to  establish  such  relations  with  the  hostile  powers  as 
shall  enable  one  to  ward  off  their  malevolence  from  one’s  self 
and  turn  it  in  the  direction  of  others.  An  anthropomorphic 
conception  of  the  forces  of  nature  is  as  clearly  traceable  here, 
and  as  much  the  fundamental  and  determining  element,  as  in 
the  religions  of  a higher  stage.  But  another  anthropomorphic 
element  is  also  very  widely  found  in  such  beliefs;  namely,  the 
interference  of  disembodied  human  souls.  It  is  astonishing  how 
generally,  in  every  stage  of  culture,  men  have  been  unable  to 
believe  that  death  is  the  last  of  a man.  Races  are  the  rare 
exceptions  who  do  not  hold,  with  greater  or  less  distinctness, 
that  those  who  have  left  this  life  are  transferred  to  some  other 
condition  or  place  of  being,  and  retain,  at  least  some  of  them 
and  at  least  for  a time,  their  identity  and  the  interests  and  dis- 
positions that  belonged  to  them  in  life.  The  more  conspicuous 
illustrations  of  this  are  in  everyone’s  mind — the  happy  hunting- 
grounds  of  our  Indian  tribes;  the  Valhalla  of  the  Norse  warrior; 
the  Hades  of  the  Greeks ; the  resort  to  Y ama,  first  semi-divine  pro- 
genitor of  the  race,  by  his  descendants  and  followers, which  was  the 
simple  old  Vedic  belief,  afterward  altered  into  a series  of  heavens 
and  hells,  and  still  more  into  a system  of  universal  transmigration, 
for  the  later  Hindus;  the  ancestor-worship  of  the  Chinese,  strik- 
ingly akin  with  the  Vedic;  and  the  belief,  obviously  underlying 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCLENCE  OF  RELICLON.  44J 

the  funeral  rites  of  the  ancient  Egyptians,  that  death  is  a transi- 
tion state,  paralleled  with  the  underground  nightly  course  of  the 
sun;  and  that,  if  the  right  means  are  used,  the  personal  identity 
may  be  indefinitely  maintained,  until  the  time  of  awakening 
shall  arrive.  The  impressions  under  government  of  which,  with- 
out the  aid  of  any  revelation  respecting  another  world,  this  doc- 
trine of  existence  after  death  grows  up,  assuming  such  variety 
of  form,  have  been  often  set  forth  : inability  to  credit  the  com- 
plete stoppage,  often  suddenly  and  in  mid-career,  of  so  high  an 
activity;  the  analogy  of  the  deathlike,  but  only  temporary,  con- 
dition of  sleep;  dreams  and  visions,  in  which  the  dead  are  seen 
as  if  still  living,  or  in  which  distant  and  strange  scenes  are  visited 
by  the  sleeper;  and  other  the  like.  The  lowest  and  most  super- 
stitious form  of  the  doctrine  is  the  simple  belief  that  the  dead 
come  back  again  and  mix  themselves  in  the  affairs  of  the  living, 
for  good  or  for  evil,  but,  in  accordance  with  the  cringing  charac- 
ter of  this  stage  of  faith,  especially  for  evil ; accompanied,  of 
course,  by  the  further  belief  that  they  can  be  called  up  and 
their  action  controlled  and  directed.  And  this  mixture  of  the 
post-human  with  the  extra-human  is  capable  of  being  carried  so 
far  that  the  distinction  of  the  two  becomes  evanescent,  and  the 
spirits  of  the  departed  and  the  hostile  spirits  that  are  threaten- 
ing harm  to  men  from  behind  every  natural  phenomenon  are 
well-nigh  or  quite  identified.  The  whole  class  of  doctrines 
belonging  in  this  lowest  stratum,  and  in  which  this  peculiar  kind 
of  anthropomorphism  has  blurred  the  line  between  the  human 
and  extra-human,  has  for  some  time  past  gone  by  the  name  of 
“ animism" — a successfully  descriptive  and  useful  designation, 
provided  we  do  not  suppose  ourselves  to  have  explained  by  it 
the  nature  of  the  system,  or  fail  to  resolve  its  varieties  into  the 
action  of  their  determining  causes  in  human  nature,  and  of  the 
same  causes  which  have  given  birth  also  to  the  religions  of 
higher  class. 

Since  low  superstitions  of  the  kind  we  have  been  noticing 
seem  to  be  characteristic  of  a stage  of  intellectual  development, 
the  inclination  is  strong  among  students  of  religions  to  regard 
them  as  historically  the  antecedent  and  foundation  of  whatever 
is  higher;  or,  rather,  to  assume  as  underlying  the  polytheistic 
religions  a condition  of  belief  in  which  there  was  nothing  better, 


442 


THE  PRINCETON  RE  VIE  IV. 


nothing  more  definitized  and  clear,  than  in  the  forms  of  animism  ; 
for  some  of  these  have  worked  themselves  out  into  such  a com- 
plex of  degrading  and  disgusting  practices  that  the  possibility 
of  their  development  by  internal  forces  into  anything  more 
elevated  seems  excluded  ; the  ground  they  occupy  is  barren  of 
good  until  cleared  of  them  by  some  destructive  process.  But 
no  religion  is  free  from  admixture  of  superstitious  and  magical 
elements ; not  even  professed  acceptance  of  the  very  highest 
can  banish  from  men’s  souls  all  allegiance  to  practices  that 
belong  to  the  lowest.  Devils  and  demons  continue  through  all 
changes  of  faith  to  be  the  anthropomorphic  solution  of  the 
problem  of  evil ; the  practice  of  witchcraft  was  forbidden,  not 
its  possibility  denied,  in  the  most  enlightened  communities  of 
the  world  down  to  almost  our  own  time;  and  lucky  and  unlucky 
times  and  acts,  and  the  evil  eye,  and  amulets  and  consecrated 
rosaries,  and  so  on,  attest  even  now  the  almost  insuperable  diffi- 
culty of  rooting  out  of  the  mind  those  persuasions  which  have 
been  from  the  beginning  of  time  the  source  of  false  religions. 
Religion  alone  is  not  equal  to  the  task ; only  under  the  added 
influence  of  physical  science,  which  draws  with  sure  hand  the 
boundary-line  between  the  human  and  extra-human,  and  substi- 
tutes a philosophic  for  a magic  control  of  the  forces  of  nature, 
does  witchcraft  lose  all  its  power  and  disappear,  simply  because 
it  no  longer  finds  any  credit. 

Our  general  conclusion,  then,  must  be  that  the  question 
where,  in  the  continuous  development  of  men’s  inferences  from 
the  phenomena  of  nature  respecting  the  forces  that  move 
nature — that  is  to  say,  of  their  philosophies — the  element  to  be 
distinctly  called  religious  comes  in,  as  well  as  where  it  goes  out 
again,  is  mainly  a question  of  the  division  of  things  that  pass 
into  one  another  by  insensible  gradations  and  are  mixed  together 
in  varying  proportions;  and  so  that  it  is  a matter  for  reasonable 
difference  of  opinion,  and  of  only  subordinate  consequence  in 
comparison  with  our  recognition  of  the  unity  of  those  tenden- 
cies in  human  nature,  acting  under  the  impulse  of  human  cir- 
cumstances, which  produce  the  whole  course  of  the  development. 
The  number  and  variety  of  beliefs  and  practices  in  the  sphere  of 
religion  is  infinite,  and  in  their  details  a subject  of  extreme  diffi- 
culty to  deal  with ; even  as  the  number  and  variety  of  men’s 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION.  443 

languages,  and  of  the  formations  and  combinations  which  these 
contain.  In  them  are  incorporated  all  the  differences  of  men’s 
capacities  and  dispositions,  working  themselves  out  under  all 
the  differences  of  external  conditions  mixed  with  conditions  of 
historical  sequence.  They  may  be  found  set  forth  more  or  less 
fully  in  the  many  descriptive  works  on  the  heathen  religions 
which  have  appeared  in  recent  time ; we  have  no  room  here  to 
exemplify  them,  even  briefly  and  in  the  way  of  illustration. 

It  follows  from  the  views  here  taken  that  there  would  of 
necessity  grow  up,  in  every  primitive  community  that  was 
homogeneous  and  held  together  long  enough,  a certain  body  of 
common  views  of  the  system  of  nature,  with  the  consequent 
admixture  of  a religious  element,  or  of  what  did  duty  as  such, 
finding  expression  in  words  and  acts  and  institutions ; and  that 
these  would  be  handed  down  by  tradition,  changing  as  they 
went,  like  other  practices  and  institutions.  Now,  of  all  tradi- 
tional institutions,  the  language  of  a community  is  found  to  be, 
on  the  whole,  the  one  that  cleaves  closest,  leaves  its  traces 
longest,  and  yields  the  most  accessible  and  the  most  trustworthy 
evidence.  There  is  nothing  else  which  discloses  so  much  respect- 
ing the  existence  and  fates  of  those  early  communities  which  were 
in  great  part  races  also,  and  apart  from  which,  at  any  rate,  we 
shall  never  know  much  about  the  ancient  divisions  of  humanity. 
If,  then,  we  discover  in  language  evidence  of  the  former  exist- 
ence of  a unitary  community  which  has  spread  and  branched 
and  scattered  until  its  dialects  have  come  to  occupy  a consider- 
able part  of  the  earth’s  surface,  we  shall  have  no  doubt  that  it 
possessed  before  its  dispersal  a common  religion,  of  which  traces 
may  be  expected  to  be  found  in  the  various  beliefs  of  those 
among  the  now  separated  branches  which  have  not  in  the  mean 
time  undergone  a religious  revolution.  Every  one  knows  what 
is  the  most  conspicuous  and  important  illustration  of  this  truth 
that  has  yet  come  to  light : the  establishment  on  the  evidence  of 
language  of  a primitive  Indo-European  mother-tribe,  from  whose 
tongue  have  descended  those  of  all  the  enlightened  communities 
in  Europe  and  of  a part  of  those  in  Asia,  at  once  challenged  a 
search  after  relics  of  the  faith  that  must  have  been  held  by  that 
mother-tribe.  And  every  one  knows  how  well  the  search  has 
been  rewarded  : how  that  the  records  of  the  old  Vedic  mythoh 


444 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


ogy,  chancing  to  exhibit  something  of  the  same  exceptional 
primitiveness  which  belonged  to  Vedic  language,  were  applied 
successfully  to  explain  the  mythologies  of  the  pre-Christian 
periods  of  the  other  branches,  Greek,  Latin,  Germanic,  and  the 
rest ; nay,  that  even  beneath  an  upper  crust  of  Christianity  have 
been  found  all  over  Europe  in  popular  festivals  and  superstitions 
and  legends — in  short,  in  the  whole  department  of  folk-lore — 
abundant  traces  of  the  original  Indo-European  beliefs.  This 
discovery  laid,  in  fact,  the  practical  foundation  of  the  whole  his- 
torical and  comparative  study  of  religions ; since  it  was  seen 
that  what  had  been  found  true  in  this  instance  might,  with  due 
allowance  for  the  difference  of  circumstances,  be  found  true 
elsewhere.  The  idea  of  ethnic  religions,  and  of  their  divarica- 
tion by  traditional  growth,  was  clearly  grasped,  and  the  method 
of  their  historical  investigation  was  established,  and  then  faith- 
fully extended  and  followed  out.  Another  natural  result  was 
the  linking  of  the  comparative  study  of  religions  to  that  of  lan- 
guages, which  had  been  and  continues  to  be  its  most  efficient 
aid ; the  striking  analogies  of  material  and  mode  of  treatment 
between  the  two  have  been  already  referred  to  above. 

An  ethnic  philosophy  with  its  accompanying  religion  has  its 
normal  growth  by  gradual  modifications  and  additions  and 
losses,  just  like  a language.  Each  successive  phase  of  it  con- 
tains nearly  the  whole  of  the  next  preceding  phase,  and  more  or 
less  of  yet  earlier  phases,  in  proportion  to  their  distance.  In 
spite  of  all  the  changes  passed  upon  it,  the  traditional  basis  long 
continues  traceable,  altho,  after  a lapse  of  time  greater  or  less 
according  to  the  rate  of  alteration,  it  is  capable  of  disappearing 
beyond  recovery ; even  as  the  original  structure  and  material 
of  a language  may  be  wholly  hidden  from  sight  by  the  disguising 
growths  of  a later  time.  Hence  it  follows  that  the  first  shapings 
of  the  hitherto  indefinite  views  of  a race,  their  first  crystalliza- 
tions into  the  form  of  doctrines,  or  myths,  or  individualized 
divinities,  must  have  an  influence  out  of  proportion  to  their 
intrinsic  importance  upon  the  views  of  after-generations  and  the 
history  of  development  of  those  views : even,  again,  as  the  first 
beginnings  of  structure  in  a developing  language  go  far  to  deter- 
mine the  lines  of  later  growth.  But  the  growth  of  a religion  is 
by  no  means  wont  to  be  informed  throughout  by  the  full  intel- 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION. 


445 


ligence  of  those  who  hold  it,  and  to  change  only  in  adaptation 
to  the  changes  of  their  religious  sense  and  of  their  comprehen- 
sion of  the  world  about  them.  On  the  contrary,  it  always  tends 
to  outgrow  the  understanding  of  its  votaries,  and  to  become  a 
traditional  system  of  names  and  forms,  taken  upon  trust  and 
believed  in  because  hitherto  believed  in,  its  fundamental  doc- 
trines obscured,  its  practices  only  half  comprehended,  and  their 
origin  wholly  forgotten.  What  in  the  history  of  language  is 
analogous  to  this  is  the  oblivion  of  the  imitative  and  interjec- 
tional  basis  on  which  its  first  spoken  signs  rested,  and  its  reduc- 
tion to  a purely  conventional  and  traditional  character;  and 
then,  further,  the  constant  virtual  repetition  of  this  process  in 
the  neglect  of  the  etymological  meaning  of  individual  words, 
and  their  transfer  to  offices  which  that  meaning  would  never 
justify.  But  language  is  an  instrumentality  of  which  practical 
availability  is  the  highest  quality ; and  since  this  is  only  fur- 
thered by  the  complete  conventionalizing  of  its  constituent 
words  and  forms,  the  conversion  is  to  be  regarded  as  a normal 
and  healthful  one ; while  the  traditionalizing  and  formalizing  of 
a religion  is  of  quite  a contrary  tendency.  The  rationale  of  the 
process  is  simple  enough.  As  a rule,  all  over  the  world,  a child 
grows  up  believing  and  worshipping  as  those  about  it,  especially 
its  parents,  do;  following  the  same  religion  with  them,  and  the 
same  sect  of  a religion,  if  there  be  such,  down  to  its  minutest 
subdivision,  by  the  mere  force  of  imitation  and  instruction. 
Then,  when  he  grows  older,  and  should  have  a judgment  of  his 
own  to  exercise  in  the  matter,  his  habits  and  prejudices  are 
already  so  formed  as  to  render  him  incapable  of  a real  judg- 
ment, and  he  goes  on  to  the  end  as  he  had  begun,  accepting  and 
in  his  turn  propagating  such  doctrines  and  rites  as  he  is  used 
to,  with  a comprehension  of  them  far  less  than  would  have  been 
needed  to  compel  his  free  and  independent  adhesion  to  them, 
making  his  religion  a matter  of  faith  with  every  degree  of 
insufficiency  of  knowledge  down  to  its  total  absence.  A doc- 
trine at  its  inception  is  strongly  felt ; it  is  the  direct  expression 
of  the  religious  sense  of  its  founders;  but  their  actual  vision 
becomes  transmuted  into  the  blindness  of  imitation  on  the  part 
of  their  successors.  A divinity  is  inferred  from  a certain  class 
of  effects  in  nature,  and  receives  a name  and  is  invested  with 


446 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


certain  offices  and  attributes ; then  he  becomes  more  and  more 
an  object  of  imitative  worship  and  echoed  description,  and  all 
that  was  at  first  characteristic  of  him  is  blurred  into  indistinct- 
ness. The  history  of  rites  is  the  same.  The  religious  practices 
of  a community  come  to  be  an  established  institution,  having  an 
independent  propagative  power  of  its  own,  its  general  purpose 
well  enough  understood,  but  all  its  details  lacking  the  living  force 
that  once  belonged  to  them.  The  stated  performance  of  a fixed 
ceremonial,  public  or  private,  gets  to  be  viewed  as  the  highest 
religious  act.  It  is  by  no  means  only  in  the  department  of 
religion  that  human  institutions  have  the  tendency  thus  to 
swing  off  their  natural  basis  and  acquire  an  independent  value 
and  sanctity : look,  for  example,  at  the  way  in  which  the  senti- 
ment of  loyalty  has  exalted  into  something  almost  divine  the 
simple  administrative  device  that,  for  the  greater  stability  of 
organized  society,  the  eldest  son  of  a chief  ruler  shall  succeed  to 
his  parent’s  prerogatives.  To  hear  some  of  the  extollers  of 
royal  legitimacy,  one  might  suppose  the  world  created  chiefly 
for  the  purpose  of  incorporating  the  great  principle  that  a 
hereditary  sovereign  is  master  of  the  fates  of  his  subjects. 

Of  the  formalizing  of  religion  by  tradition  there  are  certain 
special  classes  of  results  which  call  for  brief  notice. 

In  the  first  place  (as  already  intimated  above),  the  original 
significance  of  the  names  of  gods,  and  their  original  spheres  of 
action,  are  dimmed  and  forgotten.  As  regards  the  former,  their 
fate  is  like  that  of  proper  names  in  general,  which,  beginning 
always  with  being  significant,  end  in  pure  conventionality ; and 
the  individual  office,  tho  the  distinct  recognition  of  it  lasts 
for  a time,  is  equally  liable  to  fade  out  of  knowledge.  In  the 
stage,  for  example,  which  the  old  Indo-European  religion  had' 
reached  in  Greece,  name  and  office  of  even  the  chief  divinities 
have  in  general  become  so  disguised  as  not  to  be  traceable  with- 
out the  most  careful  investigation,  and  the  help  of  comparison, 
especially  with  a less  metamorphosed  stage,  like  the  Vedic; 
while  even  in  the  latter  there  are  a plenty  of  doubtful  problems. 
Sometimes  the  still  discoverable  etymology  of  a name  furnishes 
a valuable  intimation  of  the  primary  office,  as  when  we  find  the 
words  dyu,  “ heaven,”  and  dyu  pitar , “ heaven-father,”  in  Zeus 
and  Jupiter,  or  interpret  the  Vedic  Varuna  as  the  “ enveloping” 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCLENCE  OF  RELLGION. 


447 


firmament;  and  it  is  in  this  way  that  language-study  furnishes 
much  of  its  aid  to  mythology.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
office  may  be  more  distinct  than  the  name,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
Greek  ocean-god  Poseidon , or  the  Hindu  god  of  the  thunder- 
storm, Indra,  at  the  significance  of  whose  titles  only  dubious 
guesses  can  be  given.  Characters  and  offices  undergo  redistribu- 
tion, and  a gradation  of  rank  springs  up  which  is  foreign  to  the 
primitive  character  of  a nature-religion. 

Again,  a mythology  is  liable  to  undergo  a similar  metamor- 
phosis. A mythology  forms  a part  of  every  nature-religion,  and 
is  more  or  less  full  and  rich  according  to  the  liveliness  of  poetic 
fancy  of  its  makers,  and  the  distinctness  of  anthropomorphic 
personification  with  which  they  have  invested  the  objects  of 
their  worship.  A myth  is  by  origin  the  statement  of  a natural 
phenomenon,  cast  in  terms  of  a personal  action  : thus,  Thor  the 
thunderer  hurls  his  hammer  at  the  giants;  it  is  stolen  from  him 
by  the  powers  of  winter,  but  recovered  again  after  a season  ; his 
Indian  counterpart  Indra  drives  his  noisy  chariot  across  the 
sky,  and  transfixes  the  demon  Vritra  with  his  sharp  weapon; 
the  Dawn,  a beautiful  maiden,  opens  the  gates  of  morning  to 
the  sun;  Night  spreads  her  sable  mantle  out  over  the  world; 
and  so  on.  In  the  beginning  these  statements  have  just  as 
much  distinctness  and  universal  intelligibility  as  belongs  to  the 
beings  to  which  they  attach  themselves  ; but  they  too  share  in 
the  dimming  and  transforming  to  which  these  are  subject.  They 
are  told  over  and  over,  passed  from  mouth  to  mouth,  each  time 
with  some'  loss  of  comprehension  of  what  they  really  signify, 
and  with  additions  and  alterations,  always  in  the  direction  of  a 
completer  anthropomorphism ; till  they  become  mere  stories, 
bits  of  biography  of  the  divinities  active  in  them — or  of  the 
heroes  into  which,  by  their  aid  and  by  the  exaggeration  of  the 
anthropomorphic  process,  those  divinities  are  converted.  For, 
tho  we  need  not  deny  that,  in  the  growth  of  religions,  mor- 
tals are  sometimes  raised  to  the  rank  of  gods,  we  see  clearly 
enough  that  the  transfer  is  usually  in  the  opposite  direction  ; 
legend  is  in  great  part  mere  metamorphic  myth,  and  legendary 
heroes  are  nature-gods  humanized  into  the  semblance  of  flesh- 
and-blood  men : it  is  another  way  in  which  the  boundary-line 
between  the  human  and  extra-human  becomes  effaced  in  the 


448 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


naive  apprehensions  of  a primitive  people.  There  is  nothing 
more  obscure  in  this  than  in  the  other  parts  of  the  formalizing 
transformation  of  religions  under  the  careless  keeping  of  tradi- 
tion ; but  because  tradition  implies  the  instrumentality  of  lan- 
guage, it  has  seemed  to  certain  scholars  that  they  account  for 
the  whole  process  by  defining  mythology  as  “ a disease  of  lan- 
guagea definition  in  which,  if  we  are  to  take  it  as  seriously 
meant,  and  not  as  a mere  piece  of  mythologic  pleasantry,  we 
hardly  know  whether  to  wonder  most  at  its  utter  misrepresenta- 
tion of  language,  or  at  the  ignoring  of  the  real  forces  concerned 
which  it  implies. 

Yet  again,  it  is  still  more  obvious  that  the  forms  and  cere- 
monies of  a religion  tend  to  become  stereotyped,  to  be  practised 
by  those  to  whom  their  original  sense  is  unknown,  and  would  if 
realized  be  unacceptable,  and  to  have  a growth  of  its  own,  as 
ceremonial,  without  reference  to  its  underlying  meaning.  Thus, 
for  example,  the  infinitely  complicated  Vedic  ritual  maintained 
itself  throughout  the  whole  series  of  revolutions  of  religious  his- 
tory in  India,  and  is  even  yet  practised  by  the  Brahmanic  priest- 
hood, tho  its  significance  has  long  since  completely  died  out. 
Or — since  there  is  almost  nothing  in  heathen  religions  which  has 
not  its  analogue  in  the  aberrations  of  one  or  another  form  of 
Christianity — we  may  take  as  an  example  of  a different  kind  the 
growth  and  propagation  of  the  Romish  ceremonial,  involving 
the  metamorphosis  of  the  simple  commemorative  Lord’s  supper 
into  a miraculous  sacrifice,  patterned  after  the  sacrifices  of  the 
religions  which  Christianity  displaced. 

Once  more,  it  may  be  fairly  claimed  that  idolatry,  wherever 
found,  is  a product  of  the  degradation  of  a religion.  There 
seems  no  good  reason  to  believe  that  the  actual  worship  of  indi- 
vidual objects,  whether  images  or  anything  else,  is  an  original 
feature  in  any  religious  system,  lower  or  higher.  At  the  outset, 
the  use  of  such  objects  was  only  an  aid  to  devotion,  or  help  to 
the  worshipper  in  his  effort  to  concentrate  his  thought  upon 
what  is  invisible  and  ineffable;  or  else,  by  some  means  or  other, 
the  particular  object  has  acquired  a special  portion  of  the  uni- 
versal energy,  something  of  the  sanctity  which  is  capable  of 
being  attributed  also  to  particular  times  and  particular  places. 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCIENCE  OF  RELIGION. 


449 


The  most  enlightened  worshippers  continue  fully  aware  of  the 
merely  representative  character  of  the  object : only,  of  course, 
the  ignorant  multitude  as  good  as  deify  the  symbol,  and  that  in 
the  highest  religion  as  well  as  in  the  lowest.  It  is  but  a 
descending  series  from  the  holy  water  and  relics  and  miraculous 
images  of  Catholicism,  down  through  the  effigies  and  holy  places 
of  the  nations  in  general,  and  the  almost  universal  use  of  amu- 
lets, to  the  rude  stone  or  clod  of  the  fetish-worshipper.  Fetish- 
ism is  the  lowest  form  of  idol-worship,  yet  essentially  akin  with 
all  the  rest,  and,  like  the  rest,  a blundering  and  degraded  version 
of  something  better  that  preceded  or  accompanies  it.  And  the 
very  spirit  of  fetishism  is  seen  in  the  insistence  on  the  details  of 
ceremony,  and  the  worship  of  utensils  and  postures  and  dresses, 
which  are  not  unknown  even  within  the  limits  of  Protestant 
Christianity. 

It  is  to  be  added  that  a most  important  item  in  the  history 
of  development  of  a religion,  giving  enhanced  efficiency  to  all 
its  bad  tendencies,  is  the  uprisal  of  a priestly  caste  or  guild, 
regarded  as  supernaturally  endowed  with  peculiar  wisdom  and 
sanctity,  which  takes  into  its  special  keeping  the  doctrines  as 
well  as  the  practices  of  the  national  faith,  and  authoritatively 
expounds  the  one  and  performs  the  other.  Not  only  does  this 
widen  the  distinction  that  must  always  exist  between  the  in- 
structed and  the  uninstructed  worshippers,  but  it  introduces  an 
element  of  selfish  interest  that  tends  to  spread  corruption  every- 
where. We  have  no  room  to  dwell  upon  the  priestly  factor  in 
religious  history,  but  it  plainly  does  much  to  complicate  the 
already  intricate  combination  of  causes  that  enter  into  and 
determine  the  course  of  that  history. 

Under  all  these  influences,  it  may  fairly  be  claimed  that  the 
normal  tendency  of  a religion,  when  once  formulated  and  estab- 
lished, is  toward  decay : it  is  not  maintained  at  its  .original 
height,  but  sinks  on  the  one  hand  into  priestly  formalism,  and 
on  the  other  into  popular  superstition.  To  a gradual  and  pene- 
trating reform,  which  should  keep  it  up  to  the  level  of  the  best 
and  truest  thought  in  the  community  that  professes  it,  it  offers 
in  general  a successful  resistance.  The  case  cannot  in  the  nature 
of  things  be  otherwise.  A religion  is,  as  we  have  seen,  the  out- 


450 


THE  PRINCE  TON  REVIEW. 


growth  in  a certain  direction  of  a philosophy.  It  is  founded  on 
and  includes  in  its  own  structure  a certain  solution  of  the  prob- 
lem of  the  universe,  investing  that  solution  with  all  the  inviolable 
sanctity  which  it  is  able  to  bestow.  Its  attitude  is  not  that  of 
one  offering  the  best  light  that  is  thus  far  to  be  had,  and  craving 
more ; it  is  that  of  one  who  knows  absolutely,  and  can  speak 
with  supernatural  authority.  It  says,  the  gods  are  so  and  so, 
and  their  government  of  men  is  after  this  fashion,  and  they  are 
to  be  thus  propitiated  and  worshipped ; and  he  who  says  other- 
wise is  an  impious  blasphemer.  And  this,  partly  with  all  the 
fervor  of  sincere  faith,  partly  with  the  obstinacy  of  unreasoning 
conservatism,  and  partly  with  the  selfish  fury  of  a guild  that 
sees  its  craft  endangered.  No  religion  that  does  not  itself  con- 
tain and  teach  the  absolute  truth  can  look  without  fear  on  those 
who,  unsubmissive  to  its  authority,  are  searching  after  more  and 
truer  truth.  This  is  the  ground  of  the  so-called  antithesis 
between  science  and  religion.  Even  the  Greek  faith,  hollow  and 
weak  as  it  was,  and  nearing  its  downfall,  had  vigor  enough  left 
to  persecute  the  philosophers,  and  put  the  best  of  them  to 
death.  The  sometimes-vaunted  toleration  of  Mohammedanism 
lasted  for  but  a moment  of  perplexed  ignorance,  until  the  faith- 
ful realized  what  was  the  nature  and  tendency  of  the  scientific 
movement ; when  they  stamped  it  out  so  thoroughly  that  nothing 
more  was  ever  seen  of  it.  Even  Christianity,  three  centuries 
and  a half  ago,  had  to  pass  through  a revolution,  with  fire  and 
sword  and  endless  devastation  and  misery,  in  order  to  make 
partially  successful  what  needed  not  to  be  the  substitution  of  a 
new  faith,  but  only  the  return  to  something  nearer  its  own  origi- 
nal standard,  to  rid  itself  of  the  usual  dual  product  of  degrada- 
tion, priestly  formalism  and  hypocrisy  and  popular  ignorance 
and  superstition,  and  to  shake  off  the  Inquisitorial  hands  that 
forced  a hollow  and  fruitless  recantation  from  the  lips  of  Galileo, 
and  even  now  would  gladly  strangle  modern  knowledge  and 
education,  as  subversive  of  its  sway  over  the  minds  of  men. 

Thus  the  old  race-religions  could  not  but  become  effete, 
incapable  of  satisfying  the  more  enlightened  religious  cravings 
of  the  communities  that  had  produced  them.  But,  incapable 
also  of  reformation  from  within,  of  revivifying  themselves  by 


ON  THE  SO-CALLED  SCLENCE  OF  RELIGION. 


451 


absorbing  and  representing  the  thought  of  the  best  and  wisest 
of  their  devotees,  they  have  had  to  submit  to  complete  over- 
throw, and  the  substitution  of  faiths  of  a different  origin. 
There  is  no  more  marked  distinction  among  religions  than  the 
one  we  are  called  upon  to  make  between  a race-religion,  which, 
like  a language,  is  the  collective  product  of  the  wisdom  of  a 
community,  the  unconscious  growth  of  generations,  and  a reli- 
gion proceeding  from  an  individual  founder,  who,  as  leading 
representative  of  the  Tetter  insight  and  feeling  of  his  time 
(for  otherwise  he  would  meet  with  no  success),  makes  head 
against  formality  and  superstition,  and  recalls  his  fellow-men  to 
sincere  and  intelligent  faith  in  a new  body  of  doctrines,  of 
specially  moral  aspect,  to  which  he  himself  gives  shape  and 
coherence.  Of  this  origin  are  Zoroastrianism,  Mohammedanism, 
Buddhism  ; and,  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  general  historian 
of  religions,  whatever  difference  of  character  and  authority  he 
may  recognize  in  its  founder,  Christianity  belongs  in  the  same 
class  with  them,  as  being  an  individual  and  universal  religion, 
growing  out  of  one  that  was  limited  to  a race.  For  faiths  thus 
originated  have  a very  different  propagative  force  from  their 
predecessors : the  latter  were  content  with  the  allegiance  of  the 
race  that  produced  them,  tolerant  if  not  interfered  with  on  their 
own  ground,  ready  to  admit  the  claims  of  other  faiths  like  them- 
selves, and  even  to  borrow  from  them  ; the  former  claim  an 
undivided  authority  and  unlimited  acceptance ; they  go  prose- 
lyting, by  persuasion  or  by  force,  in  every  direction  ; they  are 
strict  to  impose  uniformity  within  and  break  down  opposition 
without  ; and  they  have  long  since  brought  within  their  pale  all 
the  leading  nations  of  the  world. 

We  have  thus  made  a hasty  review  of  the  outlines  of  what 
the  historical  and  comparative  study  of  the  world’s  religions, 
ancient  and  modern,  believes  itself  to  have  established,  &nd  so 
solidly  that  it  is  likely  in  the  main  to-  stand,  whatever  modifica- 
tion in  minor  respects,  and  whatever  filling-in  of  particulars,  it 
may  receive  from  the  results  of  future  investigations.  That  it 
will  ever  attain  in  detail  the  definiteness  of  the  kindred  science 
of  language  is  hardly  to  be  expected ; it  is  a history  of  men’s 
opinions,  as  inferred  from  modes  of  expression  far  less  clear, 


452 


THE  PRINCETON  REVIEW. 


objective,  and  trustworthy  than  are  the  records  of  speech.  But, 
whether  it  attain  or  not  the  status  of  a science,  it  is  at  any  rate 
a branch  of  the  study  of  man  and  his  institutions  having  such 
importance  that  no  one  can  afford  to  be  ignorant  of  its  methods 
or  to  disregard  its  results. 


William  D.  Whitney.